Home

iRMC S4 - integrated Remote Management Controller

1. UDP datagrams to Datagrams ae Mont Pot generated FRU by BMC Remote pee LAN LAN _ _ gt mgmt Controller mi BMC system N PCI oi System Bus Outgoing packets f from system ll ra a software pactes Figure 4 BMC and LAN controller Serial Over LAN interface SOL Serial Over LAN is an interface compliant with the IPMI V2 0 standard which controls transfer of serial data over a LAN connection In particular SOL specifies the packet formats and protocols for transferring serial data streams over a LAN between the serial controller on the managed computer and a remote workstation SOL is based on the IPMI over LAN specification In order to establish an SOL connection a remote management application first initiates an IPMI over LAN session with the BMC After this has been done the SOL services can be activated from the remote workstation The data traffic between the serial controller and the remote workstation is handled over the same IPMI session as the IPMI commands As soon as an SOL connection has been established data transfer between the serial controller and the remote workstation is carried out as follows Transfer from the serial controller to the remote workstation The data stream issued by the serial controller is partitioned by the BMC packaged and then sent to the remote workstation over the LAN Transfer from t
2. arecercecl Sys em Repori ServerView Lee Seive Views RC Sa Web Sever a 2 an untae Tape IRIG S maton Power LED Power On IRIG Se Time AIS Connect Error LED off Sar Coniguraten a css ueo of eich mney Identity Le0 or Cerise Upload Cerere Cerio a Asset Tag Configuration gt Power Meregement a System Asset Tag System Asset Tag Power Onon E Event Log cua cba E Nett Stings Power coreumpion Be System Information Gonsumaton Optone E Console Redirection System Type PRIMERGY RX100 S8 umeni consumgton i Raa a RKDOSER Power History Video Record BIOS Version V4 6 5 4 R1 5 0 for D3229 A1x S awe Video Redtecon a Gil Saa EO Son DONT Operating System Information Temperane E Lifecycle Management ma vabyes System Name SW1 RX10058 Comporent stake as obs vos Wn oe I pil Contact Andreas symm Up te WA SEL Cor tguatcn I amas Syslog Coniguration an I System FRUADPROM Information ner eregemen J gt We bork Se lings I m ener FRU Product Name Serial Part Version Vendor specific CSS Ererei Name facturer information or Model Number Number Information Information Component Port ard Senices I Chassis FUJITSU Product PRIMERGY RX100 S8 YLNE000040 26361 K1420 V301 0360 No Pro Seltras I Mabosi rusu Boa ozs aozas sascot acem At2 wo90s 6561 pe Werte I Current Overa
3. gl Server View Remote Ma iRMC 4 Web Server oji y1 RX300S8 Power Consumption History EASA Current Overall Power Consumption Current Minimum Peak Average Current Maxi mum fanagement Power Power Power Power Power onsumption insumption Options 112 Watt 112 Watt 122 Watt 114 Watt re 860 Watt inent Consumption wer History Power History Options og fanagement Power Monitoring Units Watt Settings Powar History Period 1hour Enable Power Monitoring 7 nagement Redirection Apply Delete History edirection UWS dedia Power History Chart Selected Period Min 108 Avg 115 Max162 Tue 06 Aug 2013 15 22 00 Power Min 114 Avg 114 Max 122 Power wat 160 140 130 120 110 14 45 14 50 14 55 15 00 15 05 15 10 15 15 15 20 15 25 15 30 15 35 15 40 Last 60 minutes dygraphs library http dvaraphs com Copyright 2009 License Save History K 2 Figure 126 Power Consumption History page iRMC S4 215 Power Consumption Current Power Consumption i This option is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers Under Current Power Consumption you can see all the measurements for the server power consumption in the current interval current minimum maximum and average power consumption A graphical display also shows the current power consumption of the server compared with the maximum possible power consumption Current Ov
4. Figure 229 Custom Image page Custom Image URL Here you can specify the URL from which ISO images should be downloaded onto the iRMC Image Description Here you can enter a textual description of the image 352 iRMC S4 Lifecycle Management Download Custom Image Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start downloading the custom image immediately automatically at a fixed date or periodically immediate Downloads the custom image immediately once only Downloads the custom image at the specified date and time never Never downloads the custom image Intended Boot Mode Specifies the initial intended boot mode that will be assigned to a newly downloaded ISO image If you select an automatically triggered boot e g after download daily weekly this will be the used boot mode In the Downloaded Ccustom Image list there is a new column named Intended boot mode PC compatible legacy Extensible Firmware Interface Boot EFI Execute Custom Image Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start activating the custom image immediately automatically at a fixed date or periodically after download Automatically executes the custom image automatically after an immediately initiated download immediate Executes the custom image immediately daily Executes the custom image once a day at the specified time weekly Executes the custom image once a week
5. Figure 29 Virtual Console Sharing Privileges dialog box Select the next Master Session iIRMC S4 85 Using AVR This dialog box which counts down from 10 seconds offers for selection the user of the other session If you select this option the other session will switch to Full access mode Ifyou deselect this option the other session will remain in Partial access only Video mode f the counter expires before you have confirmed with OK the other session will remain in Partial access only Video mode 5 2 4 Local Monitor Off Control function The Local Monitor Off Control function of the iRMC allows you to power down the local monitor of the managed server for the duration of your AVR session In this way you ensure that the inputs you make and the actions you perform on the local monitor on the server using AVR cannot be seen The identification LED flashes to indicate Local Monitor Off mode on the server You configure the Local Monitor Off Control function on the Advanced Video Redirection page of the iRMC web interface see page 324 On the Advanced Video Redirection page you can also configure that the local monitor is always switched off automatically whenever a new AVR session is started After you have configured the system appropriately you can switch the local monitor of the server on and off from the remote workstation by alternatively using the AVR Video menu by clicking the second
6. 418 Installing the operating system on the managed server after Configuration es o soes e a ew ee ee ee ee 421 Installing Windows on the managed server after configuration 421 Installing Linux on the managed server after configuration 423 Appendix 2 6288 eee dened ww ed eee aaa ee 425 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 425 DEMIN 2 on 6 be ood 2o4 4 4 OoHh e a eee 425 Description of the IPMI OEM commands 427 Description format 22244 427 SCCl compliant Power On Off commands 428 SCCl compliant communication commands 433 SCCl compliant signaling command 435 Firmware specific commands 436 BlOS specific commands gt sa sesa serias aesa 440 iRMC S4 specific commands 442 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration 452 iRMC configuration data gt o 522 6h ee ee bee Pee es 452 OWOC 20 oe y See Bee bee RA a Soars 452 SCC IMEI er aeeoea BS eae LER A GE Saws 454 RGSHiCHOnS 2 responerie kee SOD ew Dee od 458 Exporting importing configuration data from on the iRMC S4 459 iRMC S4 Raz 122201 122 252 12 2 23 12 2 2 4 12225 12 3 12 3 1 12 311 12 3 12 123 2 12 3 2 1 1 ee 123 20 12 3 2 4 12 3 2 5 12 3 2 6 1232 7 12 3 28 12 3 2 9 12 3 2 10 12 3 2 11 12 3 2 12 12 3 2 13 12 3 2 14 12 3 2 15 12 3 2 16 Scripted configuration ofthe iRMC 460 List of SCCI commands suppo
7. iIRMC S4 63 Local user management for the iRMC S4 4 3 Local user management for the iRMC S4 The iRMC possesses its own local user management Up to 16 users to be configured with passwords and be assigned various rights depending on the user groups they belong to The user identifications are stored in the IRMC S4 s local non volatile storage The following options are available for user management on the iRMC User management via the web interface User management via the Server Configuration Manager 4 3 1 Local user management using the iRMC S4 web interface User management on the iRMC requires Configure User Accounts permission You can view a list of configured users under the web interface You can also configure new users change the configuration of existing users and remove users from the list gt Start the iRMC web interface see section Logging into the IRMC web interface on page 122 Showing the list of configured users gt Inthe navigation area click the User Management iRMC S4 User function The User Management page opens containing a list of configured users see page 281 Here you can delete users and call the page for configuring new users This page is described in section User Management on page 280 64 iIRMC S4 Local user management for the iRMC S4 Configuring new users gt On the User Management page click the New User button The New User Configuration pa
8. 26 Unexpected flash status of the iIRMC before loading file 27 Firmware image file does not exist 28 Unexpected IPMI command response data size Table 24 Return codes of the flash tools 410 iRMC S4 Flash tools Value Meaning 29 Unexpected return value from HTI function 30 The operating system cannot run this application program Table 24 Return codes of the flash tools iIRMC S4 411 11 Remote installation of the operating system via iRMC S4 This chapter gives an overview on how you to use the ServerView Installation Manager abbreviated to Installation Manager below and the iRMC features Advanced Video Redirection AVR and Virtual Media to install the operating system on the managed server from the remote workstation The chapter discusses the following specific topics General procedure for the remote installation of an operating system using storage media which are provided via the Virtual Media feature In the following storage media provided via the Virtual Media feature are referred to as virtual storage media for short Booting the managed server from the remote workstation using the ServerView Suite DVD 1 Windows and Linux Installing Windows from the remote workstation after configuration on the managed server Installing Linux from the remote workstation after configuration on the managed server The description focu
9. Boot Type Determines the boot mode in which the system will be started at the next boot Depending on the server operating system the following options are available for selection PC compatible legacy The system is booted in legacy BIOS compatibility mode Extensible Firmware Interface Boot EFI The system is booted in UEFI boot mode only on 64 bit operating systems Next Boot only Settings apply to the next boot only gt Click Apply to activate your settings 200 iRMC S4 Power Management Power Control powering the server up and down rebooting the server The Power Control group allows you to power the server up down or to reboot the server Power Control Power On O Power Cycle O Immediate Power Off O Graceful Power Off Shutdown oO Immediate Reset O Graceful Reset Reboot O Pulse NMI O Press Power Button Apply Figure 116 Power On Off page Restart server is powered up Power Control O Power On Power Cycle Immediate Power Off Graceful Power Off Shutdown Immediate Reset Graceful Reset Reboot Pulse NMI Press Power Button Apply Figure 117 Power On Off page Restart server is powered down Power On Switches the server on Immediate Power Off Powers the server down regardless of the status of the operating system Immediate Reset Completely restarts the server cold start regardless of the status of the operating system Pulse NMI Initia
10. Change passworce Console Redirection Start a Command Line Console Logging selection or 0 to Operating the Remote Manager osure Information quit a gt Select the required menu item by entering the number or letter which precedes the menu item e g c for Change password Functions that the user is not permitted to use are indicated by a dash and functions that are not available are indicated by an asterisk gt Press Ctrl 0 or the key combination D to close the Remote Manager An appropriate event will be written to the event log iRMC S4 361 Overview of menus 8 3 Overview of menus The Remote Manager menu for the iRMC has the following structure e System Information View Chassis Information View Mainboard Information View OS and SNMP Information Set ASSET Tag e Power Management Immediate Power Off Immediate Reset Power Cycle Power on Graceful Power Off Shutdown Graceful Reset Reboot Raise NMI via iRMC e Enclosure Information System Eventlog View System Eventlog text newest first View System Eventlog text oldest first Dump System Eventlog raw newest first Dump System Eventlog raw oldest first View System Eventlog Information Clear System Eventlog 362 iRMC S4 Overview of menus Internal Eventlog View Internal Eventlog text n
11. Te Ethernet Ports and Services Offline Update Proxy Settings DNS Prepare Offline Update SNMP Start Update Process Alerting User Management include BIOS and iRMC Firmware Updates Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Activate Virtus Media E Lifecycle Management Offline Update Logs Update Settings Online Update T There is no any log file to save Offline Update Custom Image PrimeCollect pe Logout i Note Repository Location can be modified under Update Settings i Note Start Update Process will cause system reboot Refresh v lt gt Figure 222 Online Update page Starting an online update always comprises the following steps 1 Performing the update check 2 Starting the online update process Both steps which are described in detail below can be executed manually or scheduled Full Online update functionality is only available if the ServerView i Agentless Service is running on the server operating system Otherwise only iRMC and or BIOS firmware can be updated The System Information group in the System Overview page informs you whether the ServerView Agentless service is available see page 137 The ServerView Agentless Service provides driver and firmware inventory data and finally installs the component driver and firmware updates on the managed server while the system is up and running iRMC S4 341 Lifecycle Management For a more detail
12. Can be used with global user accounts managed by an LDAP directory service and HTTP 1 1 Basic authentication If HTTP 1 1 Basic authentication is used it is recommended that for encryption and confidentiality reasons you use the HTTPS protocol to protect the username password combination Uses a configuration file format that is based on XML You have the option to edit the file manually or to export it from a reference installation or from the Server Configuration Manager The configuration file can be re used with other SCCI based installation methods e g Server Configuration Manager Can be easily extended to new configuration items and new supported SCCI commands iIRMC S4 453 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration 12 2 1 2 SCCI file format The format of the XML configuration file pre used is taken from the i setup configuration help file that is installed together with the ServerView agents on Windows platforms A copy of this description with iRMC S4 specific notes is shown below The configuration file is a based on XML syntax Each configuration setting consists of a simple XML fragment starting with a lt CMD gt tag The complete sequence of configuration settings is enclosed in a pair of tags lt CMDSEQ gt and lt CMDSEQ gt The following is an example of a typical command sequence comprising two configuration settings lt CMDSEQ gt lt CMD Cont
13. Login required to continue UserName admin Password eeeees Secure SSL iRMC S4 Login CAS Login Figure 204 Login page explicit authentication required This allows users to temporarily login at the iRMC with privileges and permissions that differ from the authorization profile defined under CAS User Privilege and Permissions see page 317 A user may for instance currently be logged in to the CAS service under a user ID with the User privilege and now wants to perform an action requiring the Administrator privilege The user can temporarily login at the iRMC under a user ID with the required privileges However the user cannot switch between both user IDs The buttons iRMC Login and CAS Login work as follows iRMC S4 Login Logs the user in to the iRMC web interface with the values specified for User name and Password The CAS service is bypassed iIRMC S4 315 User Management CAS Login Logs the user in to the iRMC web interface via SSO Ifthe user has not been authenticated by the CAS service yet The user is redirected to the CAS service for authentication with the specified values for User name and Password Ifthe user has already been authenticated by the CAS service The user is logged in at the iRMC without being prompted for user name and password CAS Network Port Port of the CAS service Default port number 3170 CAS Server DNS name of the CAS service It is absolut
14. Sensors a E Event Log Clear Internal Event Log Save Internal Event Log IPMI SEL content Internal Event Log SEL Configuration Server Management aici wanes Display critical MY display Major M Display Minor MO Display into Alertin Apply User Management Console Redirection Internal Event Log Content Event Event Error Event Alert prVideo Redirection GW Date Severity Code Description Group Virtual Media Tue 06 Aug 201302 48 16PM__ Info 2300B3 IRMC 54 Browser http connection user admin auto logout Security Logout Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 44 20 PM Info 2300B8 iRMC S4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session finished from 172 17 187 194 Security Refresh Tue 06 Aug 201302 41 05 PM Info 230087 iRMC 4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session started from 172 17 187 194 Security Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 40 44 PM_ Info 2300B1 iRMC S4 Browser http connection user admin login from 172 17 167 194 Security Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 34 08 PM Info 230083 IRMC S4 Browser http connection user admin auto logout Security Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 34 08 PM Info 2300B3 IRMC 4 Browser http connection user admin auto logout Security Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 30 24PM_ Info 2300B8 iRMC S4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session finished from 172 17 167 194 Security Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 29 06 PM Info 230087 iRMC S4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session started from 172 17 187 194 Security Tue 06 Aug 20
15. Service Processor RAID Management Change password Console Redirection EMS Sac Start a Command Line shell Console Logging Enter selection or 0 to quit i Figure 236 Remote Manager Main menu window without system information The Remote Manager window contains information on the affected system This information identifies the server and indicates its operating status Power Status Some details e g the System Name are only shown for servers and only if the server is configured appropriately gt In order to be able to use the Remote Manager you must log in with a user name and a password Then an appropriate event will be written to the Event log and the relevant main menu of the Remote Manager displayed see section Main menu of the Remote Manager on page 367 You can terminate the login process at any time using Ctrl D 366 iIRMC S4 Main menu of the Remote Manager 8 5 Main menu of the Remote Manager Main Menu system Information Power Management Enclosure Information Service Processor RAID Management ic Change password ic Console Redirection EMS SAac s Start a Command Line Shai il Console Logging Enter selection or 0 to quit i Figure 237 Remote Manager Main menu The main menu of the Remote Manager provides the following functions System Information View information on the managed server and set the
16. Video Redirection JWS TFTP Server Virtual Media Update File bios bin Apply TFTP Test TFTP Start Logout Refresh Figure 88 BIOS Update Settings page Updating flashing the BIOS course of events and important notes The following overview applies for both updating the BIOS via upload from file and updating the BIOS via TFTP Details on how to initiate the steps described in this overview are described below in this section During the complete update process the current update status is indicated in the BIOS Update Settings page 168 iIRMC S4 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS S ServerView Server View Remote Management iRMC S4Web Server TX14052EB E System Information 2 Bios BIOS Update BIOS Version 4 6 5 4 R0 71 0 for D3230 A1x E iRMC s4 E Power Management E Power Consumption Server Management E Network Settings E Alerting E User Management H Console Redirection lt Video Redirection JWS BIOS Flash Status File Transferred Successfully P Server Update Fite b Appl TFTP Test TFTP Sta Reset TFTP Staty Warning A BIOS firmware update is currently in progress Do not Power Off or Reset the server Figure 89 Updating BIOS TFTP download successfully finished Updating the BIOS comprises the following steps 1 In the first step you download the update file After the update file has been downloaded the follo
17. indicates the status of an individual HDD or SSD 228 iRMC S4 Sensors Check status of the sensors i Please note TheiRMC supports this feature only if the backplane supports this feature This feature is deactivated if RAID Information is enabled This feature is only supported if the managed PRIMERGY server supports the agentless HDD monitoring function also known as out of band HDD monitoring If these requirements are met the HDD lt n gt status of each individual HDD and the PCleSSD lt n gt status of each SSD is reported directly to the iRMC i e without using the ServerView agents HDDO Disk Disk Bay 1 OK 5 HDD1 Disk Disk Bay 2 OK s HDD2 Disk Disk Bay 2 OK s2 HDD2 Disk Disk Bay 4 OK 52 Pclesspo Disk Disk Bay 49 OK 54 Pciesso1 Disk Disk Bay 50 OK 55 Pclessp2 Disk Disk Bay 51 Empty Slot 56 PCclessp3 Disk Disk Bay 52 Empty Slot 57 PcieSspo Rear Disk Disk Bay 57 Empty Slot G 58 PCleSSD1 Resr Disk Disk Bay 58 Empty Slot 59 Pclesso2 Rear Disk Disk Bay 59 OK 60 PciessD3 Rear Disk Disk Bay 60 OK Figure 135 Status display for individual HDDs and SSDs iRMC S4 229 Sensors Check status of the sensors Li The precise entries displayed in the Component Status Sensor Information table therefore depend on the server state and whether the server supports agentless HDD monitoring The entry with Designation HDD
18. o manasv 333 302 3 57 330 Volt OK Logout Qo PCH 1 5V 1 48 1 42 158 150 vot OK Siah O 2 PCH 11V 108 4 02 1 18 140 Volt OK etres QO 2 CPU1 1V 0 98 0 93 1 07 100 Volt OK QO cPu2 1v 098 093 1 07 100 Volt OK Figure 132 Voltages page 224 iIRMC S4 Sensors Check status of the sensors 7 10 4 Power Supply Check power supply The Power Supply page provides information on the power supplied from the power supply units For some server types the Power Supply page also allows you to configure power supply redundancy settings S ServerView PRIMERGY RX300 ss SW41 RX300S8 System Information Bios E iRMC 54 E Power Management No Designation Status Coi E Power Consumption Sensors 4 Power Unit Fully redundant Yes Fans o z Psut Power supply OK Yes o Temperature 3 PSU2 Powersupply OK Yes Voltages Power Supply Component Status Event Log Server Management E Network Settings E Alerting User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS E Virtual Media Logout Refresh Figure 133 Power Supply page iIRMC S4 225 Sensors Check status of the sensors Supported for iRMC S4 Power Supply Redundancy Configuration i This functionality can only be configured on systems with more the two PSUs The Power Supply Redundancy Configuration group allows you to set the redundancy mo
19. 86 Redirecting the keyboard 2 200 87 Redirecting the Mous o 4044 sa eae ee ee a a a 89 iRMC S4 5 2 7 527 1 5 2 0 2 5 2 0 8 5 2 7 4 5 2 7 0 5 2 7 6 ee ered 5 2 7 8 5 2 7 9 5 3 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 3 6 1 4 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 7 4 4 74 5 7 4 6 7 4 7 Menus and toolbar of the AVR window VIGGO MERU se 4 e Bon aR wee od BR ROd wee RK AVR window Keyboardmenu AVR window Mouse menu AVR window Options menu AVR window Media menu AVR window Power Control menu AVR window Active Users menu AVR window Help menu anaana a aaa aa AVR Tool Daf 6 gcca ee bo Ko a aE A ke od Using AVA viaHTMLS lt 6c eas ee ee ae a Virtual Media Wizard 2 a eee ee ee es Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation Starting Virtual Media wizard 4 Virtual Media dialogbox 2 000 Provision of storage media for virtual media Clearing Virtual Media connections iRMC web interface 0 0000 eee enna Logging into the iRMC webinterface Required user permissions 0 582005 Structure of the user interface 0 2005 System Information Information on the server System Overview General information on the server Sy
20. Configure User Accounts Configure iRMC S4 Settings Video Redirection Enabled SSA 8 Remote Storage Enabled User Shell Text Access Remote Manager Apply l Figure 175 User Management User lt name gt Configuration page Privilege Permissions IPMI User Enabled If this option is disabled the user will not be able to log on to the iRMC LAN Channel Privilege Assign a privilege group for a LAN channel to the user here User Operator Administrator OEM Refer to section User permissions on page 62 for information on the permissions associated with the privilege groups Serial Channel Privilege Assign a privilege group for a serial channel to the user here The same privilege groups are available as for LAN Channel Privilege iIRMC S4 285 User Management In addition to the channel specific permissions you can also individually assign users the following channel independent permissions Configure User Accounts Permission to configure local user access data Configure iRMC S4 Settings Permission to configure the iRMC settings Video Redirection Enabled Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection AVR in View Only and Full Control mode Remote Storage Enabled Permission to use the Remote Storage functionality User Shell Text Access Select the desired user shell here The following options are available SMASH CLP See section Start a Co
21. Directory Service Access Configuration LDAP Auth Password seesssesssenenannnne Confirm Password Principal User DN en myprincipal ou people Append Base DN to Principal User DN Bind DN OU DN Enhanced User Login Apply Test LDAP access Figure 196 Novell eDirectory Open LDAP Directory Service Access Configuration LDAP Auth Password Password the Principal User uses to authenticate themselves on the LDAP server Confirm Password Repeat the password you entered under LDAP Auth Password 310 iRMC S4 User Management Principal User DN Fully distinguished name i e the full description of the object path and attributes of the generic iRMC user ID principal user under which the iRMC queries the permissions of the iIRMC users from the LDAP server Append Base DN to Principal User DN If you activate this option you do not need to specify the Base DN under Principal User DN In this event the Base DN is used that you specified under Base DN in the Global Directory Service Configuration group Bind DN Bind DN shows the principal user DN used for LDAP authentication Enhanced User Login Enhanced flexibility when users log in CAUTION Only activate this option if you are familiar with the LDAP syntax If you inadvertently specify and activate an invalid search filter users can only log in to the iRMC under a global login after the Enhanced User Lo
22. Figure 173 User Management User lt name gt iRMC S4 283 User Management iRMC S4 User Information Configuring user access data The iRMC S4 User Information group allows you to configure the access data for the user iIRMC S4 User Information Name Userd Password sssssssssssssssss Confirm Password Description NewUser Description Apply Figure 174 User Management User lt name gt Configuration page User Information Name Enter the name of the user A valid user name must start with a letter The remaining part of the name may only contain letters digits underscores dashes periods and at signs Blank characters are not allowed User names must be unique Duplicate user names are not allowed Password Enter the user password Enabling SNMPvs3 for the user requires that the password configured for the user has a minimum length of 8 characters Confirm Password Confirm the password by entering it again here Description Enter a general description of the configured user here gt Click Apply to activate your settings 284 iRMC S4 User Management IPMI Privileges Permissions Assigning user privileges The PMI Privileges Permissions group allows you to configure the channel specific user privileges IPMI Privileges and Permissions IPMI User Enabled LAN Channel Privilege User v Serial Channel Privilege User v
23. Gateway IPv4 address of the default gateway in the LAN DHCP Enabled If you activate this option the iRMC gets its LAN settings from a DHCP server on the network Do not activate the DHCP option if no DHCP server is available on i the network If you activate the DHCP option and there is no DHCP server available on the network the iRMC goes into a search loop i e it continues searching for a DHCP server until it finds one iIRMC S4 255 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters The configured iRMC can be registered with a DNS server by an appropriately configured DHCP server see section DNS Configuration Configuring DNS for the iRMC on page 264 IPv6 configuration The IPv6 configuration group allows you to automatically or manually configure an IPv6 address for the iRMC IPv6 configuration Manual IPw6 configuration C Link Local Address fe80 219 99ff fea2 fa42 64 Unique Local Address fdb8 2976 8500 575 219 99ff fea2 fa4254 IPv6 Gateway fe80 217 dfff fe07 3580 Apply Figure 157 Network Interface page manual IPv6 configuration disabled Manual IPv6 configuration This option is disabled by default If Manual IPv6 configuration is disabled Stateless Autoconfiguration or Stateful Address Configuration is used to automatically configure a routable IPv6 address for the iRMC Stateless Autoconfiguration Stateless Autoconfiguration uses the Link Local Address wh
24. If the installation requires you to integrate drivers from the floppy disk then before starting the installation you must set up a virtual media connection tothe storage medium CD ROM DVD ROM or ISO image from which you want to boot and if necessary to storage medium for driver installation iIRMC S4 415 Remote Storage connections 11 2 Connecting a storage medium as Virtual Media The Virtual Media functionality makes a virtual drive available which is located elsewhere in the network The source for the virtual drive can be Physical drive or image file at the remote workstation The image file may also be on a network drive with drive letter e g D for drive D Image file provided centrally in the network via Remote Image Mount For detailed information on the virtual Media feature see chapter Virtual Media Wizard on page 111 Connecting a storage medium as virtual storage medium at the remote workstation Proceed as follows at the remote workstation to establish the virtual media connection gt Log into the iRMC web interface with Remote Storage Enabled permission see page 122 gt Open the Advanced Video Redirection AVR page and start the AVR see page 324 gt Start Virtual Media in the AVR window see page 113 gt Prepare the storage media as virtual storage media see page 116 Ifinstallation is performed via the Installation Manager Ser
25. Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters SNMP Protocol SNMP protocol version to be used For each user you can configure if a user is allowed to use SNMP see section iRMC S4 User local user management on the iRMC on page 280 All SNMPv1I N2c 3 The SNMP service is available for all SNMP protocol versions SNMP v1 v2c v3 SNMPv3 only Only SNMPVs3 is available The following two options are only displayed if All SNMPvI 2c v3 has been selected under SNMP Protocol SNMPvI v2c Community Community string in case of SNMP v1 v2c i The community string may contain the following characters A Z a z 0 9 _ amp Space characters and are not allowed In SNMP terminology a community denotes a group comprising one or more management platforms Every community is identified by a community string The community string is a non encrypted component of every SNMP request and identifies the sender of the request as a member of the community concerned Thus authorization for a SNMP GET request is controlled with this community string The community string makes a simple authentication mechanism available in SNMP Since the community string is sent in non encrypted form with the SNMP message it is always at a risk of being used without authorization This can be problematic for using SNMP with security in mind On the other hand most communities use the preset community string public in any case SNMPvI1
26. 7 3 SMTP Retry Delay 0 255 30 Seconds SMTP Response Timeout 45 Seconds Apply Figure 167 Email Alerting page Global Email Configuration Email Alerting Enable Activate this option SMTP Retries 0 7 Number of SMTP retries SMTP Retry Delay 0 255 Time in seconds between SMTP retries SMTP Response Timeout Timeout in seconds for an SMTP response gt Click Apply to activate your settings Primary SMTP Server Configuration Configure primary mail server The Primary SMTP Server Configuration group allows you to configure the primary server SMTP server Primary SMTP Server Configuration SMTP Server 0 0 0 0 SMTP Port 25 Auth Type None X Send FQDN with EHLO HELO V Secure SSL O Verify SSL Certificate Apply Figure 168 Email Alerting page Primary SMTP Server Configuration 274 iIRMC S4 Alerting Configure alerting SMTP Server IP address of the primary mail server You can activate the Domain Name System DNS for the iRMC il see DNS Configuration Configuring DNS for the iRMC on page 264 You can then use a symbolic name instead of the IP address SMTP Port SMTP port of the mail server Auth Type Authentication type for connecting the iRMC to the mail server None No authentication for the connection SMTP AUTH RFC 2554 Authentication according to RFC 2554 SMTP Service Extension for Authentication In this case
27. CPU Utilization History Options In the CPU Utilization History Options group you can modify the settings for the chart display CPU Monitoring Units Unit of the CPU usage iRMC S4 149 System Information Information on the server CPU History period Time range between one hour and five years that you can select Samples for one hour twelve hours and one day are temporary and are not stored Samples for one week two weeks one month one year and five years are stored in flash memory file based Samples for one week two weeks and one month are stored every hour Samples for one year and five year periods are stored with one day resolution Enable CPU monitoring Activates the monitoring in the defined time range Apply Applies the selected options Delete History Deletes the collected data CPU History Chart Displays the data collected in a chart with the unit on the x axis and the time range on the y axis Save History Opens a dialog to select the directory where to store the collected data 150 iIRMC S4 System Information Information on the server 7 4 6 Network Inventory The Network Inventory page provides information on the Ethernet ports of the iRMC S ServerView Server View Remote Manager iRMC S4 Web Server Network Inventory E System Information Ethernet Ports System Overview System Components Network Inventory Enabled Slot Func Port Module Fir
28. High Firmware Image The high firmware image firmware image 2 is selected 194 iRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Update file File in which the firmware image is stored Only complete firmware images comprising a firmware version and a SDRR version can be updated e g RX30S8_07 01F _sdr03 47 bin Browse Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the update file Apply Activates your settings and starts updating the iRMC firmware iRMC S4 TFTP Settings The iRMC S4 TFTP Settings group allows you to update the iRMC firmware online To do this you must provide the current firmware image in a file on a TFTP server You will find the appropriate firmware image for your PRIMERGY server on ServerView Suite DVD 2 or you can download it under http support ts fujitsu com com support downloads html IRMC S4 TFTP Settings TFTP Server l Update File rom ima_ene Flash Selector High Firmware Image z Apply TFTP Test TFTP Start Figure 112 iRMC S4 Firmware Update page iRMC S4 TFTP Settings TFTP Server IP address or DNS name of the TFTP server on which the file with the firmware image is stored Update file File in which the firmware image is stored Only complete firmware image can be updated e g RX30S8_07 0 F_sdr03 47 bin iRMC S4 195 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Flash Selector Specify what iRMC firmware is to be updat
29. SYSTEM_IP SYSTEM_OS ASSET_TAG Current AVR Title Displays the AVR title which will be displayed in the AVR title bar 328 iRMC S4 Console Redirection Redirecting the console gt Click Apply to activate your settings Video Redirection Starting AVR using Java You start AVR in the Video Redirection group Video Redirection Video Redirection Start Video Redirection Java Web Start Figure 213 Advanced Video Redirection page Local Monitor gt Click Start Video Redirection Java Web Start to start a second AVR session The Java applet for Advanced Video Redirection is started For details on the AVR window see chapter Advanced Video Redirection AVR on page 79 The two active AVR sessions are shown as follows on the Advanced Video Redirection page PRIMERGY Server View Remote Management iRMC 2 Web Server TA150S7RS M Deutsch BASS Advanced Video Redirection E System Information ana iRMC 2 E Power Management Make Screenshot E Power Consumption Sensors Event Log AVR Active Session Table Server Management E Network Settings No IP User User Session Storage Cantake Session Aerting Address Name Id Privilege Enabled Control State User Management E Console Redirection O 192 168 0 207 usei 3 ViewOnly No Yes Established Disconnect BIDS Text Console ideo Redirection 4 192 168 0207 admin 2 FullControl Yes Yes Established Disconnect deo Redir
30. Sample output see below lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt Root Schema 2 Version 97 30F OS iRMC xmIns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance gt lt Summary gt lt Created gt lt IsAdmin gt true lt IsAdmin gt lt Date gt 2014 02 05 17 27 15 lt Date gt iRMC S4 469 iRMC system report lt Bui 1dDuration gt 3 lt Bui 1dDuration gt lt Company gt FUJITSU lt Company gt lt Computer gt i1 RMCFDAF9F lt Computer gt lt OS gt iRMC 97 30F SDR 3 32 ID 0342 TX140S2 lt 0S gt lt Domain gt lt Domain gt lt HostIPv4Address gt 10 172 103 13 lt HostIPv4Address gt lt HostIPv6Address gt fe80 219 99f fF fefd af9f lt HostIPv6 Addr ess gt lt Created gt lt Errors Count 1 gt lt Eventlog gt lt Message gt 59 important error s in event log lt Message gt lt Eventlog gt lt Errors gt lt Warnings Count 1 gt lt Eventlog gt lt Message gt 23 important warning s in event log lt Message gt lt Eventlog gt lt Warnings gt lt Content gt lt Ite ame System Bios gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System Processor gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System Memory gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System Fans gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System Temperatures gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System PowerSupplies gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System Voltages gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System IDPROMS gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame Sy
31. User configuration details 283 iRMC S4 alone 7 19 21 7 1522 7 15 23 7 15 3 7 16 716 1 FAG 7 16 12 7 16 2 7 17 ZAZA Eline 7 18 7 18 1 7 18 2 7 18 3 7 18 4 7 18 5 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 Directory Service Configuration LDAP Configuring the directory service attheiRMC 294 Standard LDAP groups with authorization settings on the RNC B45 6 teh anaa RAL E a Sa OER SE 297 Configuring iRMC for Microsoft Active Directory 302 Configuring iRMC for Novell eDirectory OpenLDAP OpenDS Open DJe ried 220 9 BGR ER REED Ra RES RS 307 Centralized Authentication Service CAS Configuration Configuring the CAS Service 2 244 6288 PER HERR RE HE kF 313 Console Redirection Redirecting the console 319 BIOS Text Console Configure and start text console redirection 319 BIOS Console Redirection Options Configure text console redirection 320 Text console redirection while the operating system is running 322 Advanced Video Redirection Start Advanced Video Redirection AVR 324 Virtual Media 446268 622 06 4865 28 6 amp ee aim 332 Virtual Media Options Configuring virtual media options 333 Remote Image Mount connecting remote ISO images 335 Lifecycle Management 52 e280 eee 339 Update Settings Configuring general eLCM update settings 340 Online Update Configuring the eLCM online update 341
32. Using AVR via HTML5 on page 109 The active session is displayed in the AVR Active Sessions Table group iRMC S4 331 Virtual Media 7 17 Virtual Media The Virtual Media feature provides the managed server with a virtual drive which is physically located elsewhere in the network The source for the virtual drive can be a physical drive floppy disk drive CD ROM DVD ROMW or an ISO image image file In order to use the iRMC function Virtual Media you require a license key see page 176 You can make the virtual media available as a physical drive or image file at the remote workstation see page 112 The image file may also be a network drive with drive letter e g D for drive D The Virtual Media link contains links to the following pages Virtual Media Options Configuring virtual media options on page 333 Remote Image Mount connecting remote ISO images on page 335 This link is only displayed if Remote Image Mount support has been enabled in the Virtual Media Options page 332 iRMC S4 Virtual Media 7 17 1 Virtual Media Options Configuring virtual media options The Virtual Media Options page allows you to configure the options for the virtual media provided via the iRMC S ServerView PRIMERGY RX300 S8 Server View Remote Management iRMC S4 Web Server sw1 rx300s8 Virtual Media Options System Information Virtual Media Options System Ove
33. vi Options controlling SSH authentication Authentication methods C Attempt TIS or CryptoCard auth SSH 1 Attempt kepboard interactive auth SSH 2 Authentication parameters C Allow agent forwarding C Allow attempted changes of username in SSH 2 Private key file for authentication F v holie My documents SSH key priv Figure 22 Configuring the SSH authentication options gt Select the file containing the private key that you want to use with the iIRMC S4 Please note At this point you require the private key see page 68 and not the public key that you loaded onto the iRMC iIRMC S4 75 Local user management for the iRMC S4 Under Connection Data you can additionally specify a user name for automatic login onto the iRMC DX PuTTY Configuration Category Session Data to send to the server Logging Login details Terminal z Keyboard Auto login username admin Bell Features Window Terminal type string xterm Appearance k P Terminal speeds 38400 38400 Behaviour Translation Selection Colours Variable Terminal details Environment variables Connection Value Proxy Telnet Rlogin SSH Kex Auth x11 Tunnels v Figure 23 PuTTY Specifying the user name for automatically logging into the iRMC Configuring the OpenSSH client program ssh for using the public SSHv2 key You establish an SSHv2 protected connection to the iRMC using the OpenSSH client program s
34. 14 gt lt Line Offset 0 gt lt Hex gt 02 4D 6B F2 52 20 00 04 El FE 6F AO 00 03 lt Hex gt lt Line gt lt HexDump gt lt Data gt lt Entry gt 12 3 2 14 InternalEventLog The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport h implementation Sample Output see below lt InternalEventlog Schema 1 gt lt Entry gt lt Date gt 2014 02 05 15 53 00 lt Date gt lt Severity gt INFO lt Severity gt lt ErrorCode gt 2300B1 lt ErrorCode gt lt Message gt iRMC Browser http connection user admin login from 10 172 103 28 lt Message gt lt Entry gt 12 3 2 15 BootStatus The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport h implementation Sample Output see below lt BootStatus Schema 1 gt lt PowerOnReason AsString Power Switch gt 1 lt PowerOnReason gt lt PowerOffReason AsString Software gt 0 lt PowerOffReason gt lt PowerFailBehavior AsString remain of f gt 1 lt PowerFai 1Behavior gt lt BootStatus gt iIRMC S4 475 iRMC system report 12 3 2 16 ManagementControllers Only information about the hosting iRMC is provided Sample Output see below lt ManagementControllers Schema 1 gt lt iRMC Name iRMC gt lt Firmware gt 97 30F lt Firmware gt PAddress gt 10 172 103 13 lt 1IPAddress gt PSubnetMask gt 255 255 255 0 lt IPSubnetMask gt PGateway gt 10 172 103 1 lt IPGateway gt MACAddress gt 00 19 99 FD AF 9F lt MACAddress gt ManagementLANPort gt 0 lt
35. Communication protocols used by theiRMC IPMI technical background 22 065 DCMI Data Center Management Interface Changes since the previous versions of the manual ServerView Suite link collection Documentation for ServerView Suite Notational conventions 0802 ee eae Logging on to the iRMC S4 for the first time Requirements cme rerea ti ta ee e iRMC S4 factory defaults nananana aaa Logging into the iRMC S4 web interface Configuring the iRMC S4 2 00022 Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S4 PrerGgUISIIES sg cS we a a a a EEE ES Connected to the correct LAN port Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC and the SYGIGM 2 r a eae SR 2h Se SA od Hage Sees Access froma differentsubnet Configuring the LAN interface Configuration tools Configuring the LAN interface using the UEFI setup utility Testing the LAN interface 2 iIRMC S4 3 2 S21 3 22 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 3 1 4 3 3 2 4 3 3 3 4 3 3 4 5 1 5 2 521 DA 5 2 3 5 2 4 525 5 2 6 Configuring text console redirection via LAN using the UEFI Setup utility e s 64 cee ee eee ee ee ewe cae 48 Configuring text console redirection forthe iIRMC S4 49 Using console redirection while the
36. Component Status Check status of the server components 227 System Event Log and Internal Event Log 231 System Event Log Content Show information on the SEL andthe SELentries 232 Internal Event Log Show information on the internal event log and the associated EMMER 4 ak he Lhe eG DH Re ee Ee ah ee eS 235 System Event Log Configuration Configure IPMI SEL and internal event log 238 Syslog Configuration configure syslog forwarding for SEL and internal event log 24 ne eis oe ee eed a eae SE w 241 Server Management Information Configuring the server settings 6 245 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters 2 250 Network Interface Settings Configure Ethernet settings ontheiRMC 251 Ports and Network Services Configuring ports and network services 258 Proxy Settings Configuring proxy settings 262 DNS Configuration Configuring DNS forthe iRMC 264 SNMP Generic Configuration 4 268 Alerting Configure alerting 0 208 270 SNMP Trap Alerting Configure SNMP trap alerting 271 Email Alerting Configure email alerting 273 User Management assii 682588 bee eae eee aa 280 iRMC S4 User local user management on theiRMC 280 New User Configuration Configuring a new user 282 User lt name gt Configuration
37. In response to this development a number of vendors founded the Intelligent Platform Management Interface IPMI initiative with the objective of defining a standardized abstract message based interface between the central system controller Baseboard Management Controller BMC and intelligent hardware for platform management For further details on IPMI please refer to section IPMI technical background on page 26 The integrated Remote Management Controller iRMC represents a BMC with integrated LAN connection and extended functionality In this way the iIRMC offers comprehensive control over PRIMERGY servers irrespective of the system status In particular the iRMC allows for out of band management Lights Out Management LOM of PRIMERGY servers Out of band management uses of a dedicated management channel that enables a system administrator to monitor and manage servers via remote control regardless of whether the server is powered on a Figure 1 iRMC S 4 on the system board of a PRIMERGY server iRMC S4 13 Preface As an autonomous system on the system board of a modern PRIMERGY server the iRMC has its own operating system its own web server separate user management and independent alert management The iRMC remains powered up even when the server is in stand by mode Beyond making it possible to manage a PRIMERGY server out of band the enhanced functionality of the newest version of the iRMC
38. Microsoft Active Directory Directory Service User Group Information Email Enabled Specify whether the user is to be informed about system statuses by email Mail Format Depending on the selected email format you can make a number of settings in the Email Alerting Mail Format dependent Configuration group see page 278 The following email formats are available Fixed Subject ITS Format SMS Format 300 iRMC S4 User Management Preferred Mail Server Select the preferred mail server You can choose one of the following options Automatic If the email cannot be sent successfully immediately for instance because the preferred mail server is not available the email is sent to the second mail server Primary Only the mail server which has been configured as the primary SMTP server see page 274 is used as the preferred mail server Secondary Only the mail server which has been configured as the secondary SMTP server see page 276 is used as the preferred mail server Errors sending email are recorded in the event log Email Address Email address of recipient Email address must be configured for the user in the LDAP directory Paging Severity Configuration Here you can configure system events about which an iRMC user is to be informed by email Every entry in the event log for the iRMC is assigned to a particular paging group The following settings are available for each even
39. The status of the global error LED the CSS LED and the identification LED are shown under System Status You can also switch the PRIMERGY identification LED on and off System Status Power LED Power On Error LED o On css LED of Identity LED Off Tum On Figure 59 System Overview page System Status Power LED Power status of the server The following statuses are possible On Power ON green Off Power OFF orange Error LED Informs about the server s Global Error LED Status Info Global Error LED Overall system status iRMC on the Server off does not light up No critical event on lights red Prefailure event for a non CSS component blinking flashes red Critical event CSS LED Informs about the servers CSS Customer Self Service LED Status Info CSS LED on the Overall system status iRMC Server off does not light up The server is operational on lights orange Prefailure event for a CSS component blinking flashes orange Defective CSS component iIRMC S4 135 System Information Information on the server Identify LED Server identifier The following statuses are possible On blue Off grey Turn On Turn Off Click Turn On Turn Off to toggle the PRIMERGY identification LED on and off Asset Tag Configuration Under Asset Tag Configuration you can enter a customer specific asset tag for
40. amp l l lt gt You must therefore not use these characters as components of Relative Distinguished Names RDN ServerView User admin Logout _FUfirsu PRIMERGY TX149 2 FUST SU ServerView IRMC 4 Web Server TM oeutsn BSE IRMCFDAFSB Directory Service Configuration pi ance Global Directory Service Configuration System Ovemen Sistem Components eee Suning LDAP 55L Enabled Parle Disabie Local Login eh ae Always use SSL Login B is rae Creceati Directory Server Type Novel eDIrenir v ee n F sending uthorization Type Sener Maragenent Senerview LDAP Groups win Aumortzaton Setings on LDAP Sener Senon Senge Stancara LDAP Groups win Aumorizaton Seming on RNC erg User Maragenent Primary LDAP Server RMC St User LDAP server LDAP Contguraten peera tea Caangna LDAP 31 Port 636 Consors Sec reco Vioeo Reamresnon NS Backup LDAP server a vinai Meta LDAP Server LDAP Port 539 Geen LDAP 81 Port E35 en Department name seoarenent Revers Bass ON y rectory as Note 1 Warning I your directory server is unreachable and LOAP is enabled you wit not be abie to login 1 Note 2 LOAP js clszoled tis seting disables standard Web browser RFC2617 authenticatioyiogh anc toroes Pe use of he haas login eoreen Directory Service Access Configuration oat i Directory Service Email Alert Configuration LDAP Eman asort Enabie LDAP Alert Table Refresh jy H
41. lt STATUS gt 0 lt STATUS gt lt CMD gt lt CMDSEQ gt Figure 260 Contents of the generated pre file 466 iIRMC S4 iRMC system report 12 3 iRMC system report System Report is one of the features provided by PRIME COLLECT Typically the information is collected by the ServerView agents running on the host operating system and includes various types of hardware and software information The collected information includes among others iRMC information sensor IDPROM FRU eventlog as well as software and drivers installed on the host operating running processes etc Even in cases where ServerView agents are not running a subset of this information comprising mainly service incidents can be made available directly out of band from the iRMC This section describes Scripted download and automatic evaluation of the iRMC report System report items provided by the iRMC 12 3 1 Scripted download and automatic evaluation of the iRMC report 12 3 1 1 Scripting with CURL Curl is an open source command line tool for transferring data specified with URL syntax The latest version of the source code as well as precompiled versions for different operating systems can be downloaded from http curl haxx se The following are some examples of how to retrieve the System Report file with CURL from the iRMC for details of the cURL command line options please refer to the CURL documentation As default CURL se
42. wile 5 2 amp ajs w o0 2 2 2 o izlo 2 S Z lEI 5 aes ejeg j 2 o 5 53j lo 3 DPI FPlo s p O Wi 5 2 3 6 5 3 S O j lt joOoJ gt O JO gt Power Management Open Power On Off page xX X X xX Modify Boot Options X Use Power Control XIXIX Open edit the Power Options page X Open Power Supply Info page XIXIXIX Power Consumption Open edit Power Consumption Configuration page X Open Current Power Consumption page 2 xX Open edit Power Consumption History page 2 X Sensors Open Fans page XIXIXIX Start fan test Fan Test group xX X X X Set Fan Check Time Fan Test group X Select individual Fans System Fans group X Set Fan Fail Action Delay Time X Open Temperature page XIXIXIX Define action on critical temperature X Open Voltages page XIXIXIX Open Power Supply page XXIX Configure power supply redundancy X Open Component Status page XIXIXIX 126 iRMC S4 Required user permissions Functions in the iRMC web interface Permitted with Required IPMI privilege iRMC specific level permission 3 Zla 2Qi os 5 2 3 3 8 G e a AS ale iv 2 S f is ae eje o 2 mee e fe e a o s PIiDPio s pe O wW z ai ae 6 3 5 o at O SD O JO gt Open System Event Log Content page XIXIXIX Clear the system event log SEL XIXJIX Save event log SEL xX X X xX Define
43. 1 Return ID String of Component Status Sensor BC F5 Completion Code 01 Status Signal not available 02 Component not present 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first Signal Status 00 ok 01 Identify 02 Prefailure Warning 03 Failure CSS and Physical LED available Bit 6 0 0 No physical LED available Bit 6 0 gt 00 Physical LED available Single or Multiple Color Code Bit 7 0 No CSS Component Bit 7 1 CSS Component Length of ID String of Component Status Sensor only present if Bit O in Request Byte 8 is set Length of ID String of Component Status Sensor in ASCII chasracters only present if Bit O in Request Byte 8 is set iIRMC S4 445 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC F5 43 Get SEL entry long text This command translates a given SEL entry into long text Request Data B8 NetFniLUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group iRMC 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first 43 Command Specifier Record ID of SEL record LS Byte first 0x0000 get first record OxFFFF get last record Offset in response SEL text MaxResponseDataSize _ size of Converted SEL data 16 n in response Response Data BC F5 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first Next Record ID Actual Record ID Record type Timestamp Severity 0 No CSS component 1 CSS component 000 INFOR
44. 13 Permissions to use the Remote Manager menus iRMC S4 369 Required user permissions Remote Manager menu items level Permitted with IPMI privilege Required permission User Configure User Accounts Configure iRMC Settings Video Redirection Enabled Remote Storage Enabled Service Processor Toggle Identify LED x Operator x lt Service Proc Reset iRMC S4 warm cold reset View RAID Management View Controller information View physical device information x lt gt lt gt x x OEM B View logical device information View array configuration information View BBU status 2 xI Xx Xx x x x gt lt x lt x x x Administrator Change Password Console Redirection EMS SAC Start a command Line shell Console Logging 1 2 System dependent feature Action is only possible if no agents are running lt gt lt gt lt Table 13 Permissions to use the Remote Manager menus x lt gt lt gt lt x lt gt lt gt lt 370 iRMC S4 Change the password 8 7 Change the password The Change password menu item allows a user with the privilege Configure User Accounts see page 62 to change their own password or the passwords of other users 8 8 System Information Information on the managed server The fol
45. 2 Configuring text console redirection via LAN using the UEFI setup utility Text console redirection will be available depending on the configuration of text console redirection and on the operating system of the server either for the duration of the BIOS POST phase only or beyond the BIOS POST phase while the operating system is running This section describes Configuration of text console redirection via LAN using the UEFI setup utility Special requirements of the operating system used that you need to take account of if you also want to use console redirection while the operating system is running You can also configure text console redirection via LAN using the iRMC S4 web interface see section BIOS Text Console Configure and start text console redirection on page 319 48 iIRMC S4 Configuring text console redirection via LAN 3 2 1 Configuring text console redirection for the iRMC S4 gt Call the UEFI setup utility of the managed server Do this by pressing F2 while the server is booting gt Call the Server Mgmt menu p Utility Copyright C Boule B 012 American Megatrends Inc oai amp CAL Serial Multiplexer System Figure 9 Server Mgmt Menu gt Make the following settings Serial Multiplexer Set the value to iRMC iIRMC S4 49 Configuring text console redirection via LAN gt Call the Console Redirection menu Aptio Setup Utility C
46. 28 7d Key type Key length MD5 fingerprint of the saved key Figure 19 Display of the key fingerprint For reasons of security make sure that the fingerprint shown here matches that shown in PuTTYgen see figure 17 on page 68 under Key fingerprint 72 iIRMC S4 Local user management for the iRMC S4 4 3 3 3 Configuring PUTTY and the OpenSSH client for using the public SSHv2 key Configuring PuTTY for using the public SSHv2 key The PuTTY program allows you to set up a public key authenticated connection to the iRMC and log in either under your user name or using the auto login mechanism PuTTY handles the authentication protocol automatically on the basis of the public private SSHv2 key pair previously generated Proceed as follows gt Start PuTTY on your Windows computer The following window appears when PuTTY is started oN PuTTY Configuration Category Session Basic options for your PuTTY session Logging E Terminal Keyboard Bell Features Protocol Window O Raw OTelnet ORlogn SSH Appearance Behaviour Translation Saved Sessions Selection TX300 85 X Cours Default Settings E Connection TX12082 Proxy TX200 84 Telnet 1x200 85 Rlogin SSH Kex Specify your connection by host name or IP address Host Name or IP address Port Load save or delete a stored session Close window on exit at Odlways ONever Only on clean exit Tunnels v Cae a _ Fig
47. 3 on page 29 28 iIRMC S4 IPMI technical background auvog quyvog Guvog AYOWSA YaMOd LNYONNGSY YOSSa90ud JOSUBS ew aimesadua es sJ YSSIN me Poras Woudaas nus nus Id JaMod OuvO SISSVHO salddns sessng juewebeue eyeAug seunqesaduie L sue ba 5105185 SISSPYD He O NUOD 4853H Q JEMOY SUB sainjevaduwa sebeyo ba AujIND1D JO1JUOD Q S4OSUaS sep zu Wweyshs sng WalshS dA yYogXJHLON Ja OU0D euss peoga yo WO d33S nas OANI nays LINN 3178Y 30Y1d3H 01314 dXvOg3SY8 Ja O UOD pues YSTIONLNOD AYO LISOdSaY owa SLMS Lys yas GHOOSY VLV d YOSNSS YA TIONLNOD LNAASO NYIN Jas 907 INJA WSLSAS INSWS9VNVN SISSVHD aquvogasva jPuoldo 390M awd JA OUOD leuas SIBAIBDSUEL S8rsy sng jJuewabeuepy sISSeYyD Jua HEIOIS 9 Je OA UON 2141 QINDI 4oyeuu0D aWdl xny Joyeuu0D yuowebeuew od Jalou NYT Jey zul pueq epis GWdi xny pep pus wspeueN apwsy Figure 3 IPMI block diagram source IPMI specification see section References on page 33 29 iRMC S4 IPMI technical background IPMI and in band and out of band management In the field of system management a distinction is made between in
48. 40 44PM Info 230081 IRMC S4 Browser http connection user admin login from 172 147 167 194 Security i Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 34 08 PM Info 230083 iRMC S4 Browser http connection user admin auto logout Security i Tue06 Aug 2013 02 34 08 PM Info 230083 IRMC 4 Browser http connection user admin auto logout Security i Tue06 Aug 2013 02 30 24PM_ Info 230088 iRMC 4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session finished from 172 17 167 194 Security i Tue06 Aug 2013 02 29 06 PM Info 230087 iRMC S4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session started from 172 17 167 194 Security i Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 28 45 PM Info 230081 IRMC S4 Browser http connection user admin login from 172 17 167 194 Security i Tue06 Aug 2013 10 20 17 AM Info 230081 iRMC 4 Browser http connection user admin login from 172 147 167 184 Security i Tue06 Aug 2013 10 20 03 AM Info 230083 IRMC 4 Browser http connection user admin auto logout Security i Tue 06 Aug 2013 10 20 03 AM Info 230083 iRMC S4 Browser http connection user admin auto logout Security i Tue 06 Aug 2013 10 08 03 AM Info 230088 iRMC S4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session finished from 172 17 167 194 Security i Tue 06 Aug 2013 10 02 11 AM Info 230087 IRMC S4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session started from 172 17 167 194 Security i Tue 06 Aug 2013 10 01 40 AM Info 230081 iRMC 4 Browser http connection user admin login from 172 17 167 194 Security i Tue06 Aug 2013 09 57 20 AM Info 230081 iRMC S
49. Access privilege of the user Currently readonly is fixed preset Authentication Select the authentication protocol that SNMPv3 uses for authentication SHA Secure hash algorithm SHA is used for authentication MDS Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 is used for authentication iRMC S4 287 User Management Privacy Select the privacy protocol that SNMPv3 uses for encrypting the SNMPVS traffic DES Digital Encryption Standard is used for encrypting the SNMPv3 traffic AES Advanced Encryption Standard AES 128 bit encryption is used for encrypting the SNMPv3 traffic gt Click Apply to activate your settings User SSHv2 public key upload from file The User SSHv2 public Key upload from file group allows you to load a user SSHv2 public key from a local file User SSHv2 public key upload from file Key fingerprint RSA 1023 ee 99 d7 ac 8f 8e 07 2f 20 9b 81 80 3f 84 28 7d SSHv2 Public Key file Browse Upload Figure 177 User Management User lt name gt Configuration page User SSHv2 public key upload from file Browse Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the file containing the SSHv2 public key Upload Loads the SSHv2 public key specified in the input field onto the iRMC For further details on SSHv2 public key authentication for iIRMC users see section SSHv2 public key authentication for iRMC S4 users on page 66 288 iRMC S4 User Management S MIME
50. Configuration page Email Configuration Email Enabled Specify whether the user is to be informed about system statuses by email Encrypted Specify whether emails should be encrypted with S MIME Mail Format Depending on the selected email format you can make a number of settings in the Email Alerting Mail Format dependent Configuration group see page 278 The following email formats are available Standard Fixed Subject ITS Format SMS Format Only generating emails with 160 characters maximum length SMS Format is the preferred email to SMS gateways solution iRMC S4 291 User Management Preferred Mail Server Select the preferred mail server You can choose one of the following options Automatic If the email cannot be sent successfully immediately for instance because the preferred mail server is not available the email is sent to the second mail server Primary Only the mail server which has been configured as the primary SMTP server see page 274 is used as the preferred mail server Secondary Only the mail server which has been configured as the secondary SMTP server see page 276 is used as the preferred mail server il Errors sending email are recorded in the event log Email Address Email address of recipient Use extra SMS Email Subjects Only displayed if Mail Format SMS Format is enabled If enabled an SMS gateway provider specific email subject is
51. Console Logging Run State Menu State STOPPED Normal Mode ir Start Console Logging Stop Console Logging it Toggle to Text Mode Toggle to Normal Mode Enter selection or 0 to quit i Figure 247 Remote Manager Console Logging Run State menu The Console Logging Run State Menu provides the following functions Start Console Logging Start output of messages to the text console Stop Console Logging Stop output of messages to the text console Toggle to Text Mode Switch to text mode Allescape sequences are filtered out before messages are output to the console Toggle to Normal Mode Switch to normal mode In normal mode only the following escape sequences are filtered out before messages are output to the console lt ESC gt lt ESC gt stop lt ESC gt Q lt ESC gt R lt ESC gt r lt ESC gt R lt ESC gt This means that color pseudo graphics etc can also be represented to a limited extent Table 22 Console Logging Run State menu 382 iRMC S4 Command Line Protocol CLP 8 16 Command Line Protocol CLP The iRMC supports various text based user interfaces known as user shells which can be configured differently for individual users The System Management Architecture for Server Hardware SMASH initiative defines a number of specifications with the following objectives Provision of standardized interfaces for managing heterogeneous com
52. Disconnect the power supply connector gt Insert the connector in the socket again with the Identify key held down The managed server is now in emergency mode gt Boot the server to DOS and use the recovery flash procedure to update the iIRMC S4 s firmware If the firmware is not active then the boot operation may take up to 2 minutes to start You can ignore the error message iRMC S4 Controller Error which the BIOS outputs during this period iIRMC S4 407 Flash tools 10 5 Flash tools The flirmcs4 w64flirmcs4 and linflirmcs4 w32flirmcs4 differ only in i respect of the name and the environment in which they are called This means that the description below also applies to these tools Instead of w82flirmcs4 you simply enter flirmcs4 w64flirmcs4 or linflirmcs4 as appropriate Syntax w32flirmcs4 lt filename gt lt Option gt i lt Filename gt without flash options Update firmware same as u Options h or Show this Help Info N Show the actual program version of w32flirmcs4 vNoDriverLoad Show the actual program version of w32flirmcs4 o Show the actual revisions of the firmware i Flash 1st EEPROM with version check 2 Flash 2nd EEPROM with version check fA Flash forced 1st EEPROM without version check f2 Flash forced 2nd EEPROM without version check fi Flash forced inactive EEPROM without version check li Flash inactive EEPROM with version check u
53. Do not use this parameter to request for the system cabinet Data DATA If a SET parameter write operation is specified Data type Type parameter and in some cases data length LEN parameter are required Currently the following data types are supported xsd integer Integer value Example lt DATA Type xsd integer gt 1234 lt DATA gt iIRMC S4 455 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration xsd hexBinary Stream of bytes Each byte is coded in two ASCII characters Use the Len parameter as shown in the example below to specify the length of the stream i e the number of bytes The data type xsd hexBinary can be used without any restriction The number of bytes used is determined by the Len parameter Example A stream of four bytes 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x04 will be coded as the following ASCII stream lt DATA Type xsd hexBinary Len 4 gt 0001020304 lt DATA gt xsd string Normally used for the transfer of strings Additionally the string type can be used for IPv4 addresses and MD5 based user passwords In this case the string data is internally converted to the accepted target format Transferring encrypted data A Fujitsu proprietary data encryption is supported for some sensitive data such as user or service DAP SMTP access passwords or the AVR license key of the IRMC You can use the iRUC_PWD exe program for encrypting password data see section Generating encrypte
54. Flash inactive EEPROM if new version is greater than active EEPROM wr Initiate a warm reset of the firmware s 0 2 Show Set FW Upload Selector 0 Auto inactive image 1 Image 1 low firmware image 2 Image 2 high firmware image 408 iRMC S4 Flash tools b 0 5 Show Set FW Boot Selector 0 Auto select higher firmware version 1 Image 1 low firmware image 2 Image 2 high firmware image 3 Auto select lower firmware version 4 Auto select most recently programmed firmware 5 Auto select least recently programmed firmware n No console output no user entry necessary noUserEntry No user entry necessary but with console output logError file Write errors to logfile default w32flirmcs4 logError logOutput file Write each terminal output to logfile default w32flirmcs4 logOutput logDebugffile Write each internal debug output to logfile default w32flirmcs4 logDebug ignore Flash the selected EEPROM without any checks FW version SDR ID d 0 99 0 99 Additional debug output verbose level a without verbose level print whole debug output b one verbose level print debug output lt verbose level c two verbose level print debug output between 1st and 2nd verbose level le Emulation test mode no access to iRMC for test only noExitOnError No exit and continue program after error for test only 99 No flash because EEPROM firmware is actual iRMC S4 409 Flash tools Return codes Value Meanin
55. Ht Wscri ror Resume Next THttp CreateObject Microsoft XMLHTTP tp Open POST http amp IP_ADDRESS amp config False AME PASSWORD tp setRequestHeader Content Type application x www urlencoded tp Send objFile ReadAl pt Echo xmlhttp responsexml xm 462 iIRMC S4 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration 12 2 2 4 Scripting with Python usr bin python3 import sys import httplib2 from urllib parse import urlencode iRMC USER admin PWD admin IP_ADDR 192 168 1 100 h httplib2 Http Basic Digest authentication h add_credentials USER PWD def doit data ausgabe sys stdout try resp content h request http s config IP_ADDR POST data if respLC status 200 data content decode utf 8 print data file ausgabe else print STATUS respl status file ausgabe print str resp file ausgabe except Exception as err print ERROR str err file ausgabe print Example 1 send a configuration file to the iRMC try data open ConfigFile pre read doit data except Exception as err print ERROR str err file ausgabe Example 2 Set Config Space Values 0x200 ConfCabinetLocation and 0x204 ConfSystemContact direct from the script LocationContact lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 standalone yes gt iRMC S4 463 Confi
56. Information menu 374 iIRMC S4 Enclosure Information The sub menu contains the following functions System Eventlog Call the System Eventlog menu see the section System Eventlog on page 376 Internal Eventlog Call the internal Eventlog menu see the section Internal Eventlog on page 377 Temperature Display information on the temperature sensors and their status Voltages Current Display information on the voltage and current sensors and their status Fans Display information on the fans and their status Power Supplies Display information on the power supplies and their redundancy status Door Lock Display information on whether the front panel or housing are open Memory Sensors Display information on the memory statuses CPU Sensors Localize the processors of the server Component Status Display detailed information on all sensors that have a PRIMERGY diagnostic LED List All Sensors Display detailed information on all sensors Table 16 Enclosure Information menu iIRMC S4 375 Enclosure Information System Eventlog The following menu app Information sub menu ears if you select System Eventlog from the Enclosure System Eventlog Menu 1 View System Eventlog text newest first 2 View System Eventlog text oldest first 3 Dump System Eventlog raw newest first 4 Dump System Eventlog raw oldes
57. JWS vinal vedia Thine Pany Licenses Logout Retresn Directory Service Configuration LDAP Enabled LDAP L Enabled Disable Local Login Always use SSL Login Directory Server Typa Novell eDirectory v ServervView LDAP Groupa witn Avtnorization Semings on LDAP Sener Sandara LDAP Groups win Aumorization Settings on IRMC Primary LDAP Server LDAP Server LDAP Port 355 LDAP SSL Port 636 Backup LDAP Server LDAP Server LDAP Port Sas LDAP 53L Port E35 Bass DN p Note 1 Warning It your directory server is unrsacnabie and LDAP Is enabled you wii not be abie to login 1 Note 2 LDAP is diszolec tis seming disaoles stancara Weo browser RFC2517 aumenticatiowjogh anc foros te use of me nps ogi screen w Name LAN Channel Priviege Sariai Channet Privilege 1 LDAPuserarouot user user Delete 2 WAPuserorows Acministrator Acministrator Delete Append Base DN to Principal User DN Bind DN Enhanced User Login Apot TESLDAP acces Figure 193 Global Directory Service Configuration Specifications for Novell eDirectory Open LDAP iIRMC S4 307 User Management Proceed as follows gt Complete your specifications in the Global Directory Service Configuration group Global Directory Service Configuration LDAP Enabled LDAP L Enabled Disable Local Login Always use SSL Login Directory
58. Low F OK FANOPSU1 6 PSU1 Low 8 OK FANT PSUC PSU1 Low 9 OK FANOPSU2 PSU2 Low 10 OK FAN1PSU2 PSU2 Low 11 OK FANOPSU3 10 PSUS Low 142 OK FANT PSU3 11 PSUS Low Warning Critical Level Level No Status Designation Location Temperature O ok Sensor 0 SBB canister 0 39 C 57 C 64 C 2 Notinstalled Sensor 1 SBB canister 1 Figure 80 RAID enclosures details ETERNUS JX60information Locate Turns on the identify LED of the RAID enclosure iIRMC S4 159 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems 7 5 3 Physical Disks Information on RAID physical disks The Physical Disks page provides information on each RAID physical disk on the managed server S ServerView E System Informstion System Overview System Components Slot Status Interface Type Vendor Product Capacity Temperature 0 Operational SAS HDD SEAGATE ST91000640SS 1000 GB 34 C 1 Operational SAS HDD SEAGATE ST91000640SS 1000 GB 34 C 2 Operational SAS HDD SEAGATE STS9900805SS 900GB 24 C 4 Operational SAS HDD SEAGATE ST91000640SS 1000 GB 33 C 9 9 2 Operational SAS HDD SEAGATE ST9900805SS 900GB 34 C 9 5 Operations SAS HDD SEAGATE ST91000640SS 1000GB 24 C Operational SAS HDD SEAGATE STS900805SS 900GB 34 C TT 7 Operational SAS HDD SEAGATE ST9900805SS 900GB 33 C Console Redirection Figure 81 RAID Information Physical Disks page 160 iIRMC S4 RAID Inf
59. Offline Update Configuring the eLCM offline update 346 Custom Image Handling custom images 352 PrimeCollect Health management 356 iRMC S4 via Telnet SSH Remote Manager 2 0000 ee eee eee 359 Requirements on the managed server 360 Operating Remote Manager 2 0805 361 Overview ofmenus asasan annann 362 LOQGINGUIA e 45 0 oS Se doe aoe Fe RG RES EES Bia 365 Main menu of the Remote Manager 367 Required user permissions 0 085 369 iIRMC S4 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 9 1 9 2 9 3 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 Change the password asana aaa 371 System Information Information on the managed server 371 Power Management 2 2c eee ee ee ee 373 Enclosure Information System event log and status of the sensors 374 Service processor IP parameters identification LED and IRMC S4 reset 2s cc ewe eee eR ee we ee 378 RAID Management 2 2 0 0002 eee eee 379 Console Redirection EMS SAC Start text console redirection 0 2 380 Start a Command Line shell Start a SMASH CLP shell 2 028 055 380 Console Logging Redirect message output to the text console Se al so ea PE ewe Re Ome EE a 381 Command Line Protocol CLP 2 383 Configuring iRMC S4 using the Server Confi
60. Power On Reason Power on Remote control vis Remote Manager at efi tat omcpaeneat Last Power Off Reason Power off Remote control vis Remote Manager Power On Off Power Options Power Supply Info ii i Poser Goraunplian Error Halt Settings Continue a mowa Boot Device Selector No Change K Evert tog Boot Type PC compatible legacy v Server Management OPEN E E Network Settings d Alerting Apply User Management Console Redirection Power Control Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media Power On Power Cycle Third Party Licenses Power Off Graceful Power Off Shutdown Immediate Reset Graceful Reset Reboot Logout Pulse NMI Press Power Button Refresh z i Note Graceful Shutdown and Graceful Reboot require installed and running ServerView Agents Note Press Power Button emulates a short press on the Power Button of the server Depending on the Operation System and the configured action the server can shutdown suspend hibernate or continue operstion Figure 113 Power On Off page Power Status Summary The Power Status Summary group provides information on the current power status of the server and on the causes for the most recent Power On Power Off In addition a Power On counter records the total months days and minutes during which the server has been powered Power Status Summary Power Status Power On Power On Counter 1 Years 4 Months 22 Days 7 Hours 45 Minutes Last Power On
61. Requirements for configuring the LAN interface Configuring the LAN interface in the UEFI setup utility Testing the LAN interface Spanning Tree tree for the connection of the iRMC must be deactivated e g Port Fast enabled Fast Forwarding enabled iIRMC S4 43 Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S4 3 1 1 Prerequisites Note the following requirements with respect to configuring the IP address The LAN cable must be connected to the correct port see section Connected to the correct LAN port on page 44 Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC and the system see the section Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC and the system on page 45 3 1 1 1 Connected to the correct LAN port The interface for a LAN connection is provided on an onboard LAN controller assigned to the iRMC see also figure 4 on page 31 Depending on the server type the system board of a PRIMERGY server provides two or three LAN interfaces The ports marked with a wrench symbol are assigned to the iRMC in figure 7 for example these are port 1 and the top left hand port Check that the LAN cable is connected to the correct port Depending on the type of PRIMERGY server different ports may be marked with the wrench symbol ACTMITY Y es ae VW ea wO 9 Dedicated Service Management LAN port exclusively for the 1 Ss Shared LAN iRMC S4 with the IRMC S4 iRMC S4 and system a LAN speed
62. Restoration BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format group allows you to restore single BIOS parameter settings from a restoration file in ServerView WinSCU XML format 166 iRMC S4 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS Restoration BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format Restoration File a Keine Datei ausgew hlt Figure 87 Restoration BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format Restoration Status The Restoration Status is only displayed if a restoration is currently in process or has been completed Displays the status of the current restoration process Successful completion is indicated by Operation successful You can clear the status display by clicking the Clear Status button which is only available if a status is currently displayed Restoration File Clicking Browse opens a browser dialog allowing you to navigate to a file pre containing a backup of single BIOS parameters in the ServerView WinSCU XML format Upload Initiates the restoration of single BIOS parameter settings based on the file specified in the Restoration File field Once the restoration process has started the current process status is indicated under Restoration Status i Notes on the restoration process During the restoration process all buttons and input fields are disabled If powered off the managed server will automatically be p
63. Update Prepare Offline Update immediste V Start Update Process never v V include BIOS and iRMC Firmware Updates Activate Figure 227 Offline Update page Offline Update group iIRMC S4 347 Lifecycle Management Prepare Offline Update Prepares the offline update Preparing the offline update includes the following activities which are automatically performed by the iRMC Downloading from the latest firmware update packages for system components iRMC firmware and BIOS to the iRMC Creating a system specific local copy of the Update DVD iso Only components specific for the managed server are regarded This ISO image also contains an XML File that defines the tasks for the update process This file is called UserProfile xml Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start preparing the offline update process immediately automatically at a fixed date or periodically immediate Prepares the update immediately daily Prepares the update once a day at the specified time weekly Prepares the update once a week at the specified day and time monthly Prepares the update process once a month at the specified day and time yearly Prepares the update once a year at the specified date and time once only Prepares the update at the specified date and time never Never starts the update process Start Update Process Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start
64. Voltages Power Supply Component Status Event Log Server Management User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media Logout Refresh Server View Remote Management iRMC S4 Web Server amp 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 641 62 63 64 0o00 00000000000000 0 65 68 O 70 Slot5 Sloth Slot RAID HDDO HDD1 HDD2 HDDS HDD4 HDDS HDDS HDD HDDS HDDS HDD10 HDD11 HDD12 HDD13 HDD14 HDD15 BIOS vom _ _ ME PCI Express Bus PCI Express Bus PCI Express Bus System Firmware BIOSEFI System Mgmt Software System Mgmt Software System Mgmt Software Oo System Mgmt Module Empty PCI Slot Empty PCI Slot OK Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot Empty Slot OK oK OK OK OK Identity Identity Identity No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED No LED X Figure 134 Component Status page iRMC S4 227 Sensors Check status of the sensors Identify Lights up the LED that is attached to the related sever component The LED s label turns to Identify Off A g
65. XIXIXIX Modify the BIOS Console Redirection Options X Start Text Console Redirection xX X X X X Open edit the Advanced Video Redirection page X Virtual Media Open edit the Virtual Media page KIXI x Open edit the Remote Image Mount page xX X X X X Open edit the Media Options page 2 X X X X X Lifecycle Management Open edit the Update Settings page XIX x Open edit the Online Update page xIx x Open edit the Offline Update page x x x Open edit the Custom Image page x Xx x Table 5 Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface 128 iIRMC S4 Required user permissions Functions in the iRMC web interface Permitted with f Required IPMI privilege f iRMC specific level permission 3 Lja o 52l lg alisiealz o W e q lajs jul olg j o m ols 3 2 2 S f is ae eje o 2 mee fe fe e a o 3 PIiDPio s s O w z 2 3 s o 3 7 o lt t O S O O gt Open edit the PrimeCollect page x X x 1 Action is only possible if no agents are running 2 Feature is not available on all systems Table 5 Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface iRMC S4 129 Structure of the user interface 7 3 Structure of the user interface The iRMC web interface is structured as follows Interface language selector Title bar Logout button Selected function System rwmaton Sem Ouentew System Comporent
66. access to a directory service has been configured for the iRMC LDAP Enabled option see page 295 If LDAP access to the directory service is not configured for the iIRMC LDAP Enabled is not activated and then Always use SSL login option see page 295 is deactivated the following login screen appears S ServerView PRIMERGY RX300 S8 ServerView Remote Management iRMC S4 Web Server M Deutsch Haas Login required to continue Login required to continue Login Figure 57 Login page after logging out Click Login to open the login screen of the web interface see figure 54 on page 122 This allows you to log in again if you wish iRMC S4 131 Structure of the user interface If LDAP access to the directory service is configured for the IRMC LDAP Enabled option is activated or the Always use SSL login option see page 295 is deactivated the appropriate login screen appears see figure 55 on page 123 e Click Refresh to refresh the contents of the iIRMC web interface Alternatively you can configure the interface to automatically update the contents periodically see Enable Auto Refresh on page 260 132 iRMC S4 System Information Information on the server 7 4 System Information Information on the server The System Information entry contains the links to the following pages System Overview General information on the server on page 134 System Co
67. allows you to configure the iRMC of the managed server from the remote workstation via a Web interface Proceed as follows gt Start the Operations Manager refer to the manual ServerView Operations Manager The start window of the Operations Manager opens S ServerView User administrator Logout Fujitsu Welcome to ServerView Suite ServerList View servers status and configurations ServerList Administratio BTOWSE TOT neweerrers erehrerfern configuration tasks ServerBrowse Server Confiquratior Base Configuration Wizard Asset Management Save and view server configuration data Archive Manager Inventory Manager Event Management View and configure the contents of the alarm list Alarm Monitor Alarm Configuration Threshold Manager Monitoring Monitor server performance and power usage Performance Manager Power Monitor Update Management Manage software and firmware updates Update Manager Repository Manager Download Manager Configuration Security Manage ServerView s OpenDS directory service User Management Help View help text about the Operations Manager On Suite Links About Figure 249 Operations Manager Start window iRMC S4 391 Configuring via Server Configuration Manager gt Choose Server Configuration from the Administration menu of the Operations Manager start window This opens the following window S ServerView Adm
68. allows you to perform an online update of the BIOS on the managed server To do this you must provide the current BIOS image in a file BIOS Upload From File Browse Update File Apply Figure 91 BIOS Update Settings page BIOS Update from File Update File File in which the BIOS image is stored Browse Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the update file Apply Activates your settings and to start flashing the BIOS CAUTION If a BIOS update is currently in progress do not power off or restart the server iRMC S4 171 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS BIOS TFTP Update Settings The BIOS TFTP Update Settings group allows you to perform an online update of the BIOS on the managed server To do this you must provide the current BIOS image in a file on a TFTP server The BIOS is flashed when TFTP is started BIOS TFTP Update Settings TFTP Server 0 0 0 0 Update File bios bin Apply TFTP Test TFTP Start Figure 92 BIOS Update Settings page BIOS TFTP Update Settings TFTP Server IP address or DNS name of the TFTP server on which the file with the BIOS image is stored Update File File in which the BIOS image is stored Apply Activates your settings TFTP Test Tests the connection to the TFTP server TFTP Start Downloads the file containing the BIOS image from the TFTP server and to start flashing the BIOS CAUTIO
69. commands the iRMC S4 communicates with Agent which finally performs the action 02 05 System OS Shutdown Request This command initiates shutdown of the server s operating system Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group 02 Cmd Command Group Communication 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 05 Command Specifier Response Data BC 02 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 02 06 System OS Shutdown Request and Reset This command initiates the shutdown of the server s operating system and subsequently restarts the system Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group 02 Cmd Command Group Communication 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 06 Command Specifier Response Data BC 02 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first iRMC S4 433 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 02 08 Agent Connect Status This command checks whether the agent is active Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group 02 Cmd Command Group Communication 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 08 Command Specifier Response Data BC 02 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 01 Data Length Connect Status 00 Connection lost agent not connected 01 Connection re established agent connected 0209 Shutdown Request Cancelled This command cance
70. continues the verification with step 2 The iRMC authenticates itself at the directory service via LDAP with a user name and password Depending on its LDAP configuration settings the iIRMC continues as follows If ServerView specific LDAP groups with authorization settings in the SVS structure on the LDAP server are used the iRMC determines the user s permissions by using an LDAP query and checks whether the user is authorized to work on the iRMC Characteristics Extension of the directory server structure required Privileges permissions are configured centrally on the directory server If LDAP standard groups are used with authorization settings deposited locally on the iRMC the iRMC proceeds as follows 1 The iRMC uses an LDAP query to determine which standard LDAP group on the directory server the user belongs to 2 The iRMC checks whether a user group with this name is also configured locally on the iRMC If this applies the iRMC determines the user s permissions by means of this local group Characteristics No extension of the directory server structure required Privileges permissions are configured separately on each iRMC 60 iIRMC S4 Concept iIRMC S4 web Serial interface on Telnet interface Login Login Login Login SSH User name password iRMC S4 local user identifications User name password LDAP login Directory service Global user identifications Fig
71. deleted in case this limit is exceeded Refresh lt gt Figure 231 PrimeCollect page Schedule PrimeCollect archives 356 iIRMC S4 Lifecycle Management Schedule PrimeCollect archives The Schedule PrimeCollect archives group allows you to configure archive creation and download Schedule PrimeCollect archives Status No operation scheduled Perform archive creation amp download immediste V Activate Figure 232 PrimeCollect page Status Displays the current status of the archive creation and update process Perform archive creation amp download Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start activating the custom image immediately automatically at a fixed date or periodically immediate Performs archive creation and download immediately daily Performs archive creation and download once a day at the specified time weekly Performs archive creation and download once a week at the specified day and time monthly Performs archive creation and download once a month at the specified day and time yearly Performs archive creation and download once a year at the specified date once only Performs archive creation and download at the specified date never Never performs archive creation and download iIRMC S4 357 Lifecycle Management Activate Deactivate Enables disables the configuration Clicking Activate starts archive c
72. expresses the core aspect of this approach to the solution Functions for monitoring and recovery of systems are implemented directly in the hardware and firmware for platform management Objective The objective was to define a standardized abstract and message based interface between the central system controller Baseboard Management Controller BMC and intelligent platform management hardware The standardization committees combined the central characteristics of various platform management modules into standardized descriptions Definition The IPMI specification defines IPMI is a hardware level interface specification that is management software neutral providing monitoring and control functions that can be exposed through standard management software interfaces such as DMI WMI CIM SNMP etc As a hardware level interface it sits at the bottom of a typical management software stack see section IPMI and other management standards on page 27 Advantage The IPMI specifications ensure the independence of functions for inventory logging recovery and monitoring of a system by the system processor BIOS or operating system This means that a system can still be involved in platform management when it is shut down and turned off 26 iIRMC S4 IPMI technical background IPMI and other management standards IPMI is best used in conjunction with system management software running under the relevant op
73. files need to be uploaded at the same time After you have uploaded the files all current https connections will be closed and the https server will be automatically restarted This can take up to 30seconds and no IRMC S4 reset is required SSL Private Keyfile SSL Certificate file Upload SSL DSARSA certificate or DSA RSA private key upload via copy amp paste Browse Browse Note Alternatively you may paste the contents of the base64 PEM encoded X 509 SSL certificate or the base64 PEM encoded DSAJRSA private key into the textbox below for upload to the IRMC S4 Important Both files needs to be uploaded one after the other Important Do not upload your CA certificate with this method into the IRMC S4 Use upload from file instead Figure 103 Certificate Upload page display of the currently valid certificate iIRMC S4 1 85 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Restoring the default certificate CA certificate gt In the group Certificate Information and Restore click Default Certificate to restore the default certificate delivered with the firmware after you have confirmed that you wish to do so In the group Certificate Information and Restore click Default CA Certificate to restore the default CA certificate delivered with the firmware after you have confirmed that you wish to do so S ServerView Usec admin Logod FORTSU Server View R
74. functions eLCM update management eLCM image management Custom Image eLCM health management PrimeCollect For details see the manual ServerView embedded Lifecycle Management eLCM 22 iIRMC S4 Communication interfaces of the iRMC S4 1 3 User interfaces of the iRMC S4 The iRMC provides the following communication interfaces iRMC S4 web interface web interface The connection to the iRMC web server is established over a standard web browser e g Microsoft Internet Explorer Mozilla Firefox Among other things the web interface of the iRMC provides you with access to all system information and data from the sensors such as fan speeds voltages etc You can also configure text based console redirection and start graphical console redirection Advanced Video Redirection AVR In addition administrators can fully configure the iIRMC over the web interface Secure access to the iRMC web server can be provided with HTTPS SSL Operation of the iRMC over the web interface is described in chapter iIRMC web interface on page 121 Remote Manager Text based Telnet SSH interface via LAN You can call the Remote Manager from the ServerView Remote Management Frontend directly from a Telnet SSH client The alphanumeric user interface of the Remote Manager provides you with access to system and sensor information power management functions and the error event log In addition you can launch text c
75. iRMC S4 181 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Save Click Save to save the selected settings Save All Click Save All to save all the settings Import iRMC S4 Firmware settings in ServerView WinSCU XML format from file Config File Configuration file default iRMC_S4_settings bin in the ServerView WinSCU XML format from which you want to load the firmware settings onto the iRMC Browse Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the configuration file Upload Uploads the firmware setting in selected file 182 iRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates 7 7 4 Certificate Upload Load the DSA RSA Certificate and private DSA RSA Key The Certificate Upload page allows you to load a signed X 509 DSA RSA certificate from a Certificate Authority CA and or your private DSA RSA key onto the iRMC The iRMC is supplied with a predefined server certificate default i certificate If you want to access the iRMC over secure SSL TLS connections it is recommended that you replace the certificate with one signed by a Certificate Authority CA as soon as possible i Input format of the X 509 DSA RSA certificate and the private DSA RSA key The X 509 DSA RSA certificate and the RSA DSA must both be available in PEM encoded format ASCII Base64 iRMC S4 183 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates S ServerView Certificate Upload Not
76. iRMC S4 User Monday OVS controlled OVS controlled anisan Tuesday OFS controlled OFS controlled n CAS Configuration daole ai Wednesday OFS controlled OFS controlled Video Redirection JWS Thursday OFS controlled X O S controlled X hanah Friday OFS controlled OFS controlled aa E Lifecycle Management Saturday OFS controlled OFS controlled hh mm Mode 1 hh mm Mode 2 Everyday v pi js i Note Please make sure that you have enabled Enhanced Speed Step in the BIOS setup in order to use Power Consumption Control Figure 122 Power Consumption Configuration page Prerequisite The following requirements must be met in order to configure power consumption control The managed PRIMERGY server must support this feature The Enhanced Speed Step or the Processor Power Management option must be enabled in the Advanced Menu of the BIOS setup If you set the Power Limit power control mode in the Power Consumption Options group or in the Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration the Power Limit Options group is also displayed See page 210 208 iIRMC S4 Power Consumption Power Consumption Options The Power Consumption Options group allows you to select the power control mode and specify whether the power consumption should be monitored over time Power Control Mode Mode for controlling the power consumpti
77. icon from the right in the tool bar The local monitor is always switched on and cannot be switched if the Local Monitor Off Control option see page 328 is disabled The current status of the local monitor is indicated the AVR Video menu and displayed via the second icon from the right in the AVR Tool bar see section AVR Tool bar on page 106 performed on the AVR console cannot be seen on the monitor of the managed server Clicking this button will unlock the monitor of the managed server and change icon color to green CJ Indicates that the local monitor is locked switched off i e actions 86 iIRMC S4 Using AVR i e actions performed on the AVR console can be seen on the monitor of the managed server Clicking this button will lock the monitor of the managed server and change icon color to read w Indicates that the monitor of the managed server is unlocked switched on If the Local Monitor Off Control option see page 328 is disabled the monitor status cannot be switched 5 2 5 Redirecting the keyboard Keyboard redirection only works when the focus is on the AVR window gt f keyboard redirection appears not to be working simply click on the AVR window gt lf the keyboard does not respond check that the AVR window is not in view only mode How to switch to full control mode is described on page 84 Special key combinations AVR passes all normal key combinations
78. in to iRMC lt iRMC_S4 gt iRMC name or IP address of the iRMC you want to log into Example SSHv2 authenticated login on the iRMC For the following ssh call it is assumed that ssh keygen has been used to generate a public private RSA key pair as described under Example Generating an RSA key pair with ssh keygen on page 69 and that the public key User1 ssh id_rsa pub has been loaded onto the iRMC for an iRMC user user4 see page 71 You can then log in from your local computer under HOME User as follows on the iRMC RX300_S82 iRMC using the login user4 ssh user4 RX300_S82 i1 RMC iIRMC S4 77 Local user management for the iRMC S4 4 3 3 4 Example Public SSHv2 key The following shows the same public SSHv2 key in both RFC4716 format and in OpenSSH format Public SSHv2 key in RFC4716 format BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY Comment rsa key 20090401 AAAAB3NzaClyc2EAAAABJQAAAIBScBsgP9B 4qNa9 w8Ccv3kDVVU2boKCGLv4hx V6 AUFrF6sYdGey10Q7MkwSeax3NmoZBkvKROMNFZSqxkPCkd LyUi19US5 9Ar Jxj1hXUz1PPVzuBtPaRB7 bISTJVMUorNwrcN48b6AA0YBhKC4A0tOP10Gs fct F pGJ2iw END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY Public SSHv2 key in OpenSSH format ssh rsa AAAAB3NzaClyc2EAAAABJQAAAIBScBsgP9B 4qNa9 w8Ccv3kDVVUu2boKCGLv4hx V6 AUFrF6sYdGey1lQQ7MkwSeax3NmoZBkvkR9OANFZSqxkPCkd LyUi19US5 9Ar Jxj1hXUz1PPVzuBtPaRB7 bISTJVMUorNwrcN48b6AAo0YBhKC4A0tOP10Gws fc F pGJ2iw rsa key 20090401 78 iIRMC S4 5 Advanced Vid
79. information as to whether storage media are connected as Remote Storage Request Data CO NetFniLUN OEM 19 CMD Command Group Firmware 01 00 00 Response Data c4 19 Completion Code 01 00 No 01 Yes connected 00 00 438 iRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC If Request Data 1 is set to 2 the command returns information on the status and type of any Remote Storage connection s Request Data Response Data CO NetFniILUN OEM 19 CMD Command Group Firmware 02 00 00 Connection 0 01 Connection 2 c4 19 Completion Code 02 00 00 00 Invalid unknown 01 idle 02 Connection Attempt pending 03 Connected 04 Connection Attempts retries exhausted failed 05 Connection lost 06 Disconnect pending 00 Invalid unknown 01 Storage Server IPMI 02 Applet 03 None Not connected iRMC S4 439 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC CO 1A Set Video Display On Off This command allows you to switch the local console on or off Request Data co NetFniLUN OEM 1A Cmd Command Group Fan Test 00 Set Video Display On 01 Set Video display Off Response Data c4 1A Completion Code 12 1 2 6 BlOS specific commands F1 09 Get BIOS POST State This command provides information whether BIOS is in POST Request Da
80. interface or the ServerView Remote Management Front end referred to below simply as the Remote Management Front end be used This chapter describes operation of the iRMC from the Remote Manager and the various functions in detail The end of the chapter also provides a brief overview of SMASH CLP iIRMC S4 359 Requirements on the managed server 8 1 Requirements on the managed server Access via Telnet must be activated for the iRMC see the section Ports and Network Services Configuring ports and network services on page 258 Access via the Telnet protocol is deactivated by default for security reasons as passwords are transmitted in plain text Since the ServerView Operations Manager does not know the value of the management port the Remote Management Front end works with the default value Since a connection is not automatically established when the Remote Management Front end is started you can correct any nonstandard value for the management port after the Remote Management Front end has been started 360 iRMC S4 Operating Remote Manager 8 2 Operating Remote Manager Operation of Remote view is described on the basis of the example in figure 234 which shows an excerpt from the main menu of the Remote Manager 1 2 3 i4 ae i5 ic tE 3 il Enter Figure 234 Main Menu Information Power Management Enc Service system Processor RAID Management
81. italics In running text commands menu items and the names of buttons options files and paths are shown in italics lt text gt Indicates variables which must be replaced by current values Monospaced font Output from the system is shown in monospaced font Monospaced font Bold monospaced font Commands to be entered at the keyboard are shown in bold monospaced font Square brackets Indicate optional entries braces Indicate a list of alternatives separated by I Keyboard symbols Keys are shown as they appear on the keyboard If uppercase characters are to be entered explicitly this is indicated for instance by SHIFT A for A If two keys are to be pressed simultaneously this is indicated by a hyphen between the two keyboard symbols Table 2 Notational conventions If reference is made to passages elsewhere in this manual the title of the chapter or section is named and the page number given refers to the start of the section iIRMC S4 37 2 Logging on to the iRMC S4 for the first time The factory default settings of the iRMC allow you to log in to the iRMC S4 for the first time without the need for any configuration activities 2 1 Requirements On the remote workstation Windows Internet Explorer as of Version 10 x Linux Mozilla Firefox 3 x For console redirection Sun Java Virtual Machin
82. j IRMC 54 Update Note Changing the Time Zone in localtime mode has no effect on the iRMC clock Time Zone setting is still required for management interfaces like SNMP and WSMAN Power Management E Power Consumption Remote Image Mount Media Options Lifecycle Menagement Refresh Figure 98 iRMC S4 Time page 178 iIRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates iRMC S4 Time Options The iRMC S4 Time Options group allows you to configure the time settings for the iRMC IRMC S4 Time Options Time Mode System RTC v RTC Mode Localtime _ x Apply Figure 99 iRMC S4 Time page iRMC Time Options Time Mode Here you can select whether the iRMC gets its time settings form the managed server or from an NTP server System RTC The iRMC gets its time from the system clock of the managed server NTP Server The iRMC uses the Network Time Protocol NTP to synchronize its own time to an NTP server which serves as reference time source If you enable this option an additional group the NTP Network Time Protocol Configuration group is shown allowing you to configure the required NTP settings see below RTC Mode Here you can select whether starting from now iRMC time will be shown in UTC Universal Time Coordinated format or in Local Time format UTC Universal Time Coordinated iRMC time will be shown in UTC Universal Time Coordinated format Localtime iRMC time will be
83. modify the settings for this user User ID 1 null user is reserved for the standard and is therefore unavailable for user management on the iRMC 280 iRMC S4 User Management ServerView User admin Logout FUfiTSU System Information sios E inmc ss E Power Management E Power Consumption E Sensors E Event Log Server Management E Network Settings E Alerting User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtus Media Litecycle Management Third Party Licenses Logout Refresh FUJIT S4 Web User Management IRMC 4 User Information IPM SNMPv3 A 5 Enat E j Id Name Description LAN Channel Privilege Serial Channel Privilege Yes No 2 admin User 02 Description OEM OEM Delete Yes Yes 3 andreas fts123456 Administrator Administrator Delete Yes Yes 4 snmpuser snmpuser User User Delete Yes Yes 5 cognitas NewUser Description Administrator Administrator Delete New User Figure 171 User Management page Delete J Note To creste or modify a SNMPv3 user SNMP has to be enabled under Network Settings gt SNMP H AN rights reserved The table of configured users includes a Delete button after each user entry Click this button to delete the associated user after confirming this choice New User When you click this button the New User Configuration page opens see page 282 You can configure a new user here iRMC S4 281 Use
84. never Available Updates Select Status Category Component Current Version New Version Severity Reboot Required iit Not started SystemBoard 02939 RX300S8 V4 6 5 4 R1 7 0 V4 6 5 4 R1 13 0 recomment ded yes 4 4 Not started Tools PrimeUp 0 0 0 1 17 02 essential no Show F Not started PrimSupportPack Win FSC_SCAN 0 0 0 0 17 00 00 essential no i Start Update Process never y l Activate i Figure 224 Online Update group update check performed Start Update Process Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start the update process immediately at a fixed date or periodically immediate Starts the update process immediately after check Automatically starts an update process that directly follows an immediately initiated update check daily Starts the update process once a day at the specified time weekly Starts the update process once a week at the specified day and time monthly Starts the update process once a month at the specified day and time yearly Starts the update process once a year at the specified date and time iRMC S4 343 Lifecycle Management once only Starts the update process at the specified date and time never Never starts the update process Activate Starts an update check and or the online update according to the settings configured under Update Check and Start Update Process C
85. of the connection to the LDAP server gt Click Reset LDAP Status to reset the status display gt Click Apply to activate your settings gt Configure the settings for global email alerting in the Directory Service Email Alert Configuration group Directory Service Email Alert Configuration LDAP Email Alert Enable LDAP Alert Table Refresh 2 Hours Figure 200 Directory Service Email Alert Configuration LDAP Email Alert Enable Enables global email alerting LDAP Alert Table Refresh Hours Defines the interval at which the email table is regularly updated see the User Management in ServerView manual A value of O means that the table is not updated regularly gt Click Apply to activate your settings 312 iRMC S4 User Management 7 15 3 Centralized Authentication Service CAS Configuration Configuring the CAS Service il This view is not supported by all PRIMERGY servers with iRMC SSO is only supported for accessing the iRMC via the web interface SSO is not supported for accessing the iRMC via the Remote Manager Telnet SSH The Centralized Authentication Service CAS Configuration page allows you to configure the iRMC web interface for CAS based single sign on SSO authentication The first time a user logs in to an application within the SSO domain of the CAS service they are prompted for their credentials by the CAS specific login screen Once they have been successfully authenticate
86. on off times for the server The input fields of the Power On Off Time group allow you to specify the times at which the server is powered up down for the individual days of the week or for specified times during the day i Specifications in the Everyday field take priority The Trap fields also allow you to configure whether the iRMC sends an SNMP trap to the management console before a planned power on power off of the managed server and if so how many minutes before the event this should be done No traps are sent if you specify the value 0 Power On Off Time On Time 08 00 Sunday 05 00 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Everyday Minutes in advance Figure 120 Power Options page Power On Off Time iIRMC S4 205 Power Management 7 8 3 Power Supply Info Power supply and IDPROM data for the FRU components The Power Supply Info page provides you with information on the power supply specifications and the IDPROM data of the FRUs of the server The CSS Component column indicates for each of the components whether the CSS Customer Self Service functionality is supported S ServerView sar samh Logod FORTS gement iRMC S4 Web Server M Deutsch Hk SW1 RX300S8 Power Supply Information P Aa aaae Power Supply PSU1 IDPROM Information BIOS E iRMC S4 FRU rer FRU Product Name Serial Part Version Vendor spe
87. only shows a status in the Signal Status column if the ServerView agents and the ServerView RAID Manager are installed and running on the managed server Otherwise N A not available is displayed in the Signal Status column instead HDD or SSD Component Status is not shown Status Prefail is not supported for all HDDs or SSDs The entries with Designation HDD lt n gt or PCleSSD lt ns gt with n 0 1 2 are only displayed if the managed server supports agentless HDD monitoring 230 iIRMC S4 System Event Log and Internal Event Log 7 11 System Event Log and Internal Event Log The Event Log entry in the navigation area contains the links to the pages for viewing and configuring the IPMI event log system event log SEL and the iRMC internal event log An additional page allows you to configure syslog forwarding which forwards the entries of the SEL and or the internal event log to dedicated syslog servers The following pages are available System Event Log Content Show information on the SEL and the SEL entries on page 232 The internal event log contains entries providing information on audit events logon events AVR connection events etc and additional information e g IPv6 related information and LDAP user names Internal Event Log Show information on the internal event log and the associated entries on page 235 The IPMI SEL contains entries providing information on events like o
88. operating system is running 51 Configuring and using the serial interface of the IRMC S4 53 Configuring the serial interface using of the IRMC S4 53 Using the Remote Manager Serial interface a 55 Configuring the iRMC S4 over the iRMC S4 web interface 56 Configuring the LAN parameters 56 Configuring alerting Gate amp RS RAS EK RS ES Rae 57 Configuring text console redirection 57 User management for the iIRMC S4 59 User management concept for the iRMC 60 User permissions aaas eee ee ee es 62 Local user management for the iRMC S4 64 Local user management using the IRMG S4 web interface cooo ee a ee ee 64 Local user management via the Server Configuration Manager 65 SSHv2 public key authentication foriRMC S4 users 66 Creating public and private SSHv2 keys 67 Loading the public SSHv2 key onto the iRMC froma file 71 Configuring PuTTY and the OpenSSH client for using the public SORVA KOV aog a oe rk el eo a ed SA Yo Example Public SSHv2 key sa sa bee he ae ak ee 78 Advanced Video Redirection AVR 79 Requirements Check the AVR settings 80 Using AVR via a Java Applet 22852005 82 AVR WNUOW aes a da Ba a oe kee Gow a Sw 82 sing 2 low bandwidth o s a ke eo Od ee a a A 83 Parallel AVR SRSSIONS c cca a ta ed ee ke me a as 83 Local Monitor Off Control function
89. operations into separate tasks Optional time delays between the execution of consecutive commands must implemented outside the script For example you can achieve this as follows 1 Divide the script appropriately into separate scripts 2 Use the functional range of the client to insert time delays between sending the individual files 458 iIRMC S4 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration 12 2 1 4 Exporting importing configuration data from on the iRMC S4 The Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings page of the iRMC web interface allows you to save export the current iRMC configuration data in a configuration file pre As well you can import iRMC configuration data from an existing configuration file pre i e load configuration data onto the iRMC for details see section Save Configuration Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings on page 181 To import an iRMC configuration you can alternatively send the corresponding SCCI command file to the config URI of the iRMC via the HTTP POST operation iIRMC S4 459 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration 12 2 2 Scripted configuration of the iRMC This section describes provides information on the following topics SCCI commands supported by the iRMC Using various script languages for scripted configuration of the iRMC Generating encrypted passwords with the iRMC_PWD exe program 12 2 2 1 List of SCCI commands suppo
90. regardless of the actual video resolution on the monitor of the managed server This may reduce video quality OK Activates your settings and closes the dialog box The Start Video button is now enabled Cancel Closes the dialog box without activating your settings Exit Terminates your own AVR session 5 2 7 2 AVR window Keyboard menu The Keyboard menu allows you to handle special keys when redirecting the keyboard see section Redirecting the keyboard on page 87 JWiewer admin iRMCO3D89B 0 fps Mouse Options Media Power ActiveUsers Help d T Hold Right Ctrl Key Hold Right Alt Key Hold Left Ctrl Key Hold Left Alt Key Left Windows Key Right Windows Key Ctri Alt Del Context Menu Hot Keys Host Physical Keyboard gt SoftKeyboard Full Keyboard Support Windows Host Linux Host Figure 34 AVR window Keyboard menu 94 iRMC S4 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window You can select the following functions in the Keyboard menu Hold Right Ctrl Key Holds right key pressed Hold Right Alt Key Holds right Alt key pressed Hold Left Ctrl Key Holds left Ctrl key pressed Hold Left Alt key Holds left Alt key pressed Left Windows Key Holds down left Windows key if Hold Down is enabled Otherwise Press and Release is applied Right Windows Key Holds down right Windows key if Hold Down is enabled Otherwise Pr
91. remote storage gt Boot from the USB memory stick After completion of the boot operation the data in the USB memory stick is automatically copied to a RAM disk The autoexec bat file is then started automatically The FlashDisk menu opens sk will update iRMC FW gt Rel 7 02F Normal Normal Flash Inactive EEPROM Part If new Version is greater than Active EEPROM Recovery_L Recovery Flash EEPROM Lower Part 1 Recovery_U Recovery Flash EEPROM Upper Part 2 Initial Initial Flash after Motherboard Replacement Show FirmuarZ Release Notes Reboot Reboot System English Change Keyboard Layout German Exit Fujitsu Technology Solutions C 2013 7 iRMC Team Figure 255 FlashDisk menu i A firmware downgrade is only possible via recovery flash iIRMC S4 405 Updating firmware images Normal A normal flash is performed During a normal flash operation those areas of the EEPROM that contain the active firmware are checked to see whether they are up to date If one of these areas is not up to date then the corresponding area for the inactive firmware is updated if it is not already up to date Recovery _L A recovery flash for firmware image 1 low firmware image is carried out In the case of a recovery flash the flash is performed for all three areas of firmware image 1 without any version check Recovery _U A recovery flash for firmware image 2 high firmware image is carried
92. server are identical the Full Screen Icon in the AVR Tool bar is enabled see section AVR Tool bar on page 106 Fit to Client Resolution If screen resolution on the remote workstation is higher than screen resolution on the managed server the AVR window is automatically adjusted i This is the normal working environment GUI Languages Specifies the language in which the menus and dialog boxes of the AVR window are to be shown German English Japanese The selection preset with the GUI language that configured for the iIRMC web interface from which the AVR session was started Prompts the user of the concurrent AVR session to grant you Full access Depending on this user s decision you will be granted Full access or remain in Partial access mode Request Full Permission This option is only offered for selection if two AVR sessions are currently active and your session is the one that is not in Full access mode iIRMC S4 101 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Prompts the user of the concurrent AVR session to grant you Full access Depending on this user s decision you will be granted Full access or remain in Partial access mode For details see Requesting Full access when two AVR sessions are currently active on page 84 5 2 7 5 AVR window Media menu Via the Media you can start the Virtual Media wizard The Virtual Media wizard allows you to attach or detach media on the remote workstation a
93. shown in Local Time format iIRMC S4 179 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Time Zone Configuration In this group you can configure the time zone corresponding to the location where the PRIMERGY server is located Time Zone List of time zones Apply Applies the selected settings NTP Network Time Protocol Configuration The NTP Network Time Protocol Configuration group allows you to configure the required NTP settings if the NTP Server option has been enabled in the iRMC S4 Time Options group NTP Network Time Protocol Configuration NTP Server 1 pool ntp org NTP Serwer 2 192 168 0 33 Time Zone GMT yv Apply Figure 100 iRMC S4 Time page NTP Configuration NTP Server 1 IP address or DNS name of the primary NTP server NTP Server 2 IP address or DNS name of the secondary NTP server Time Zone Configure the Time Zone corresponding to the location where the PRIMERGY server is located Apply Activates the settings of this group 180 iRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates 7 7 3 Save Configuration Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings The Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings page allows you to save the current firmware settings and a number of other settings for the iRMC in a file Additionally you can load the firmware settings onto the iRMC again Configure User Accounts permission In all other cases Configure iRMC S4 settings permissi
94. some examples of how to use curl to send a configuration file to the iRMC For details on the curl command line options please refer to the curl documentation HTTP Access with Basic Authentication default and the default iRMC S4 admin account curl basic u admin admin data Config pre http lt iRMC IP address gt config HTTP Access with Digest Authentication and the default iRMC admin account curl digest u admin admin data Config pre http lt iRMC IP address gt config HTTPS Access with no certificate check k and Digest authentication and the default iRMC admin account curl digest k u admin admin data Config pre https lt iRMC IP address gt config HTTPS Access with an LDAP user account Please note that for LDAP users you have to specify Basic authentication curl basic k u LDAPuser LDAPpassword data Config pre https lt iRMC IP address gt config iIRMC S4 461 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration 12 2 2 The fo IP_AD USER_ PASSW PLES Const Set o Set o 3 Scripting with Visual Basic VB Script llowing VB script sends a configuration file to the iRMC DRESS lt iRMC IP address gt AME admin ORD admin AME ConfigFile pre ForReading 1 bjJFSO CreateObject Scripting FileSystem0bject bjFile objFSO OpenTextFile FILE_NAME ForReading On Er Set x xml Ht USER_ xml ht form xml
95. start page of the online documentation for the ServerView Suite on the Fujitsu Technology Solutions manual server You access the start page of the online documentation via the following link http manuals ts fujitsu com gt Inthe selection list on the left select x86 Servers gt On the right click PRIMERGY ServerView Links under Selected documents This opens the start page of the ServerView link collection 3 Via the ServerView Suite DVD 2 gt Inthe start window of the ServerView Suite DVD 2 select the option Select ServerView Software Products gt Click Start This takes you to the page with the software products of the ServerView Suite gt On the menu bar select Links This opens the start page of the ServerView link collection 1 10 Documentation for ServerView Suite The documentation for the ServerView Suite can be downloaded free of charge from the Internet You will find the online documentation at http manuals ts fujitsu com under the link x86 servers 36 iIRMC S4 Notational conventions 1 11 Notational conventions The meanings of the symbols used in this manual are as follows a Warning This symbol is used to draw attention to risks which may represent a health hazard or which may lead to data loss or damage to the hardware iJ This symbol is used to highlight important information and tips gt This symbol indicates an action which you must carry out Text in
96. state error status etc Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group Memory 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 10 Command Specifier Timestamp Response Data BC F5 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first System Status For details see below Signaling For details see below Notifications For details see below POST Code i The Timestamp is only relevant for evaluating the Notifications Byte System Status Bit 7 System ON Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 SEL entries available Bit 3 Bit 2 Watchdog active Bit 1 Agent connected BitO Post State 442 iRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC Signaling Bit 7 Localize LED Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit3 CSS LED Bit2 CSS LED Bit1 Global Error LED BitO Global Error LED Notifications Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 SEL Modified New SEL Entry SEL Modified SEL Cleared SDR Modified Nonvolatile IPMI Variable Modified ConfigSpace Modified New Output on LocalView display iIRMC S4 443 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC F5 12 Get EEPROM Version Info This command returns information on the current versions bootloader firmware and SDR stored in the EEPROM s Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group Memory 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte firs
97. the following information is required Auth User Name User name for authentication on the mail server Auth Password Password for authentication on the mail server Confirm Password Confirm the password entered Send FQDN with EHLO HELO Enables disables sending the FDQN with EHLO HELO Secure SSL Depending on the configured network port the iRMC will directly establish an SSL connection SMTPS legacy port 465 or check for the presence of the STARTTLS keyword any other configured network port If STARTTLS is present in the response from the SMTP server the iRMC switches to TLS on the existing network connection If STARTTLS is not present the mail will be sent unencrypted over the existing connection Email is sent SSL encrypted iIRMC S4 275 Alerting Configure alerting Verify SSL Certificate The SSL certificate from the SMTP server is verified against the stored CA certificate in the iIRMC e g the SMTP server certificate has to be issued signed by this CA gt Click Apply to activate your settings Secondary SMTP Server Configuration Configure secondary mail server The Secondary SMTP Server Configuration group allows you to configure the secondary server SMTP server Secondary SMTP Server Configuration SMTP Server 0 0 0 0 SMTP Port 25 Auth Type None z Send FQDN with EHLO HELO Y Secure SSL 7 Verify SSL Certificate Apply Figure 169 Email A
98. the managed server The customer specific asset tag allows you to assign the server an inventory number or other identifier of your choice With Windows based systems this customer specific asset tag is provided automatically by the WMI Windows Management Instrumentation It can then be evaluated by in house tools or used for integration in enterprise management systems such as CA Unicenter Asset Tag Configuration System Asset Tag asset tag added by a baker via R SCUx Apply Figure 60 System Overview page Asset Tag Configuration System Asset Tag You can enter the asset tag here gt Click Apply to accept the asset tag 136 iRMC S4 System Information Information on the server System Information System Information lists information on the managed server System Information System Type PRIMERGY RX300 8 Chassis Type Rx300S8R4 Serial YLNTOOOO29 BIOS Yersion V4 6 5 4 R0 92 0 for D2939 B1x System GUID 03000200 0400 0500 0006 000700080009 Figure 61 System Overview page System Information Operating System Information Operating System Information lists information on the operating system of the managed server and whether the ServerView agents are available or the managed server ServerView Agentless Service are available on the managed server Operating System Information System Name SW1 RX100S8 System Description Server System O S Windows Server 2012 Stand
99. the update check immediately automatically at a fixed date or periodically immediate Starts the update process immediately 348 iRMC S4 Lifecycle Management after preparation Automatically starts an update process that directly follows an immediately initiated update preparation daily Starts the update process once a day at the specified time weekly Starts the update process once a week at the specified day and time monthly Starts the update process once a month at the specified day and time yearly Starts the update process once a year at the specified date and time once only Starts the update process at the specified date and time never Never starts the update process Include BIOS and iRMC Firmware Updates i This option affects the Prepare Offline update process Specifies whether the UserProfile xml includes excludes the BIOS and iRMC Firmware tasks on prepare offline update So the ISO image always contains the update files but the update tasks are either included or excluded iRMC S4 349 Lifecycle Management Activate Starts the preparation and or the offline update according to the settings configured under Prepare Offline Update and Start Update Process Prepare Start Update Resulting behavior Offline update Process immediate never Preparing the offline update is started immediately Update process is not started automatically immedia
100. up to 1000 MBit s y is available depending on the server hardware 2 a o ani or the system Figure 7 Ports for the iRMC S4 indicated by wrench symbol 44 iIRMC S4 Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S4 3 1 1 2 Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC and the system The LAN controller of the PRIMERGY server requires a separate IP address for the iRMC in order to ensure that data packets are reliably transferred to the iRMC and not to the operating system The IP address of the iIRMC must be different from that of the system operating system 3 1 1 3 Access from a different subnet If the remote workstation accesses the iRMC of the managed server from a different subnet and DHCP is not used you must configure the gateway 3 1 2 Configuring the LAN interface Configuration tools You can configure the iRMC s LAN interface in a number of ways Depending on the type of the PRIMERGY server using the UEFI setup utility see page 46 iRMC web interface see section Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters on page 250 using the Server Configuration Manager see chapter Configuring iRMC S4 using the Server Configuration Manager on page 387 iIRMC S4 45 Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S4 3 1 3 Configuring the LAN interface using the UEFI setup utility You can configure the iRMC s LAN interface using the UEFI setup utility gt Call the UEFI
101. v2c Permission Permission for the SNMP community Currently only read only is supported fixed preset value gt Click Apply to store the configured settings iRMC S4 269 Alerting Configure alerting 7 14 Alerting Configure alerting The Alerting entry contains the links to the pages you use to configure alerting for the iRMC SNMP Trap Alerting Configure SNMP trap alerting on page 271 Email Alerting Configure email alerting on page 273 270 iIRMC S4 Alerting Configure alerting 7 14 1 SNMP Trap Alerting Configure SNMP trap alerting The SNMP Trap Alerting page allows you to view and configure the settings for SNMP trap alerting Traps are sent regardless if SNMP is enabled or not They are sent via net snmp interface to support SNMPv1 V2c and SNMPV3 traps Forwarding of SNMP traps to up to seven SNMP servers is supported For each user you can configure if a user is allowed to use SNMP see section IRMC S4 User local user management on the iRMC on page 280 ServerView SNMP Trap Alerting Figure 165 SNMP Trap Alerting page SNMP Community Name of the SNMP community gt Click Apply to accept the community name SNMP user Preconfigured SNMPv3 user for SNMPv3 trap destination iIRMC S4 271 Alerting Configure alerting engineID The engineID is used for sending SNMPv3 traps The engineID can be c
102. via Virtual Media either using the Installation Manager or exclusively using the Windows installation CD DVDs The two procedures correspond in terms of the handling of the virtual storage media However you are advised to install Windows via the Installation Manager for the following reasons The Installation Manager itself identifies the required drivers and copies these to the system Allthe Installation Manager functions are available to you during installation This means that you can for example configure the entire system including the server management settings Installations without the Installation Manager have to be controlled via the keyboard since the mouse cursor cannot be synchronized during the installation process In contrast if you install using the Installation Manager then all configuration and installation steps can be performed using the mouse 414 iRMC S4 General procedure If you install without the Installation Manager then all the settings required for mouse cursor synchronization must subsequently be performed manually Installation using the Installation Manager does not take significantly longer than installation using the operating system CD DVDs Installing Linux without the Installation Manager using the Linux installation CD DVD If you know which drivers are required by the system then you can start the Linux installation by booting from the Linux installation CD DVD
103. 100 100 231 23 Connected Computer is booting SAC started and initialized Use the ch command for information about using channels Use the 7 command for general help SAC EVENT The CMD command is now available SACH Figure 11 Windows Server SAC console Linux You must configure a Linux operating system in such a way that it handles console redirection after the POST phase Once it has been configured you have unrestricted access from the remote workstation iRMC S4 51 Configuring text console redirection via LAN Settings required The settings may differ between program versions You should check the version of your operating system If the version is different from the versions for which the settings are described below please refer to the documentation of your operating system SuSE and RedHat Add the following line to the end of the file etc inittab xx 12345 respawn sbin agetty lt baud rate gt ttyS0O RedHat Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file etc grub conf console ttyS0O lt baud rate gt console tty0 SuSE Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file boot grub menu st console ttyS0O lt baud rate gt console tty0 52 iIRMC S4 Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S4 3 3 Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S4 The serial interface of the iRMC allows you to use the terminal Too petiole wikia ena ove
104. 13 02 28 45 PM Info 230081 IRMC 4 Browser http connection user admin login from 172 17 167 194 Security Tue 06 Aug 2013 10 20 17 AM Info 2300B1 iRMC S4 Browser http connection user admin login from 172 17 167 181 Security Tue 08 Aug 2013 10 20 03 AM Info 230083 IRMC 4 Browser http connection user admin auto logout Security Tue 06 Aug 2013 10 20 03 AM Info 230083 IRMC 4 Browser http connection user admin auto logout Security Tue 06 Aug 2013 10 08 03 AM Info 2300B8 iRMC S4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session finished from 172 17 167 194 Security Tue 06 Aug 2013 10 02 11 AM Info 230087 iRMC 4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session started from 172 17 187 194 Security Tue 06 Aug 2013 10 01 40 AM Info 2300B1 IRMC S4 Browser http connection user admin login from 172 17 167 194 Security eleloe cleeelocjoclooes Tue 06 Aug 201309 57 20AM Info 230081 iRMC 4 Browser http connection user admin login from 172 17 167 53 Security Figure 139 InternalEvent Log Content page iIRMC S4 235 System Event Log and Internal Event Log Internal Event Log Information The Internal Event Log Information group informs you of the number of entries in the internal event log It also indicates the time when the last entries were added or deleted Internal Event Log Information Erase Time Wed 17 Apr2013 02 25 13 PM Event Log Modus Circular Buffer Ring Buffer Fill Level 93 Number of Entries 374 Clear Internal Even
105. 2 key onto the iRMC from a file see page 71 3 Configuring the program PuTTY or ssh for SSHv2 access to the iRMC see page 73 66 iIRMC S4 Local user management for the iRMC S4 4 3 3 1 Creating public and private SSHv2 keys You can create public and private SSHv2 keys with the program PuTTYgen or with the OpenSSH client program ssh keygen Creating the public and private SSHv2 keys with PuTTYgen Proceed as follows gt Start PuTTYgen on your Windows computer The following window appears when PuTTY gen is started 2 PuTTY Key Generator File Key Conversions Help Key No key Actions Generate a public private key pair D m Generate E Load an existing private key file Save the generated key Parameters Type of key to generate SSH 1 RSA SSH 2 RSA O SSH 2 DSA Number of bits in a generated key 1024 Figure 15 PuTTYgen Creating new private and public SSHv2 keys gt Under Parameters select the key type SSH 2RSA and click Generate to start generation of the keys The progress of the generation operation is then displayed under Key see figure 16 on page 68 iIRMC S4 67 Local user management for the iRMC S4 PuTTY Key Generator ie File Key Conversions Help Key Please generate some randomness by moving the mouse over the blank area CO Figure 16 PuTTYgen Creating a new key pair progress bar gt Move the mouse pointer over the blank area
106. 3 Remote Manager Service Processor menu The sub menu contains the following functions Configure IP Parameters Configure the IPv4 IPv6 address settings of the iRMC in a guided dialog Please refer to section Network Interface Settings Configure Ethernet settings on the iIRMC on page 251 for details in the individual settings List IP Parameters Display the IP settings Toggle Identify LED Switch the PRIMERGY identification LED on off Reset iRMC S4 Reset the iRMC The connection is closed Warm reset Only the interfaces are re initialized Reset iRMC S4 Reset the iRMC The connection is closed Cold reset The entire iRMC is re initialized Table 19 Service Processor menu It is recommended that you reboot the server after a Reset iRMC S4 Cold Reset or Reset iRMC S4 Warm Reset see page 201 378 iIRMC S4 Service Processor 8 12 RAID Management The following menu appears if you choose RAID Management from the main menu RAID Management Menu 1 gt Controller information C2 Physical device information 3 gt Logical device information 4 Array configuration information 59 BBU status nter selection or tH to quit Figure 244 Remote Manager Service Processor menu The sub menu contains the following functions Controller Information Provides information on each RAID controller on the managed server Physical Device Information Prov
107. 330238 JWXBM13330028 Hardware version 0306 Details 0306 Details 0306 Details 0306 Details Figure 79 RAID Information RAID enclosures page ETERNUS JX60 Details Clicking on Details opens a new page which provides detailed information on the corresponding RAID enclosure 158 iIRMC S4 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems ServerView E System Information E RAID Information Controller Enclosures Physical Disks Logical Drives Bios E iRMC S4 E Power Management Power Consumption E Sensors Event Log Server Management E Network Settings E Alerting E User Management E Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS E Virtual Media Third Party Licenses Refresh Locate Status OK Vendor FUJITSU Product JX60 Port number 0 Device number 1 Enclosure number 1 Logical ID 5146308000181400 SAS address 51463080001B143E Part number CA05967 1610 B0 Serial number JWXBM13260292 Firmware version V03 06 No Status Designation Partnumber Serial number Hardware version 1 OK PSU CANS967 1609 BBOT1324000726 O2AIS4F OK PSU 1 CA05967 1609 BBQT1331000578 O2A S4F 3 OK PSU 2 CA05967 1609 BBQT1334000742 O2A S4F 000o 4 OK PSU CA05967 1609 BBOT1334000743 02A S4F 41 OK FANOFEMO 0 FEMO Low o 9 9 9 9 QO o 9 9 9 9 9 2 OK FANT FEMO 1 FEMO Low 3 OK FANO FEM1 2 FEM1 Low 4 OK FANTFEM1 3 FEMI Low 5 OK FANOPSUO 4 PSUO Low OK FAN1PSUO PSUO
108. 4 Browser http connection user admin login from 172 17 167 53 Security Figure 141 System Event Log Content page System Event Log Content Display Critical Display Major Display Minor Display Info If you wish you can choose one or more severity levels other than the default values here gt Click Apply to activate your settings for the duration of the current session iIRMC S4 237 System Event Log and Internal Event Log 7 11 3 System Event Log Configuration Configure IPMI SEL and internal event log On the System Event Log Configuration page you can configure the IPMI system event log SEL and the internal event log You can configure for each of the event logs the entries which are displayed by default on the System Event Log Content page see page 232 and on the Internal Event Log Information page see page 235 respectively whether IPMI SEL and internal event log are organized as a ring buffer or a linear buffer ServerView User admin Logout FUJITSU PRIMERGY RX100 S8 FUJITSU ServerView iRMC S4 Web Server Deutsch Flakes SW1 RK100S8 System Event Log Configuration a Default System Event Log display filtering E irme s4 bisptey criticat 7 Woisplay Major E A Display minor E G visptay info E E css enly 7 Show Resolutions IRMC 4 Information iRMC S4 Time Ori Ou Configuration Ring Buffer L Linear Buffer Certificate Upload B Generate Certificat
109. AS service the user is granted access to the iRMC web interface as well as to any other service within the SSO domain without being prompted for login credentials again e DNS DHCP The iRMC provides support for automatic network configuration It has a default name and DHCP support is set by default so that the IRMC S4 gets its IP address from the DHCP server The iRMC name is registered by the Domain Name System DNS Up to five DNS servers are supported If DNS DHCP is not available the iRMC also supports static IP addresses e Power supply The iRMC is powered by the standby supply of the system e Alert management The alert management facility of the iRMC provides the following options for forwarding alerts alerting Platform Event Traps PET are sent via SNMP Direct alerting by email In addition the iRMC provides the ServerView agents with all the relevant information e Read filter and save the system event log SEL You can view save and delete the contents of the SEL by using the iRMC web interface or by using the Telnet SSH based interface Remote Manager of the iIRMC S4 e Read filter and save the internal event log iEL You can view save and delete the contents of the iEL by using the iRMC web interface or by using the Telnet SSH based interface Remote Manager of the iIRMC S4 20 iIRMC S4 Functions of the iRMC S4 e UEFI support Unified Extensible Firmware In
110. Asset Tag see section System Information Information on the managed server on page 371 Power Management Power the server up or down see section Power Management on page 373 Enclosure Information Request information on the current system status e g check error and event messages from the error log and event log temperature fan etc see section Enclosure Information System event log and status of the sensors on page 374 Table 12 Main menu of the Remote Manager iIRMC S4 367 Main menu of the Remote Manager Service Processor Configure the iRMC e g update firmware or change IP address see section Service processor IP parameters identification LED and iRMC S4 reset on page 378 RAID Managerment Information on RAID controllers physical and logical devices array configuration and BBU status see section RAID Management on page 379 Change password Change the password see section Change the password on page 371 Console Redirection EMS SAC Text console redirection see section Console Redirection EMS SAC Start text console redirection on page 380 Start a Command Line shell Start a command line shell see section Start a Command Line shell Starta SMASH CLP shell on page 380 Console Logging Redirect output of messages to the text console see section Console Logging Redirec
111. C instead of the server name Add Serial Number The last 3 bytes of the MAC address of the iIRMC are appended to the DHCP name of the iRMC Add Extension The extension specified in the Extension entry field is appended to the DHCP name of the iRMC iRMC S4 name iRMC name passed to DHCP for the iRMC in place of the server name Depending on the related options the iRMC name is used as part of the DNS name Extension Name extension for the iRMC DNS name Shows the configured DNS name for the iRMC gt Click Apply to store the configured settings iIRMC S4 267 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters 7 13 5 SNMP Generic Configuration The SNMP Generic Configuration page allows you to configure an SNMP service on the iRMC which supports SNMP v1 v2c and SNMPv3 on the following SNMP MIBs SNMP MIB 2 SNMP STATUS MIB SNMP OS MIB SNMP SC2 MIB SNMP RAID MIB When the SNMP service is enabled information provided by these MIBs can be used by any system running an SNMP Manager SNMPv3 provides a higher level of security than SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c ServerView User admin Logout FUSITSU PRIMERGY RX2520 M1 FUJITSU ServerView iRMC S4 Web Server deutsch BSE SNMP Configuration Figure 164 SNMP Configuration page SNMP Enabled Enables SNMP service on the iRMC SNMP Port Port on which the SNMP service is listening normally UDP 161 268 iIRMC S4
112. CSS blink GEL on 8 CSS blink GEL blink iIRMC S4 449 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC F5 DF Reset Nonvolatile Cfg Variables to Default This command forces all non volatile IPMI settings to be set to default values Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group BMC 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first DF Command Specifier 43 4C 52 AA CLR Oxaa Security Code Response Data BC F5 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first F5 EO Reset ConfigSpace variables to default This command forces all Configuration Space variables to be set to default values Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group BMC 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first EO Command Specifier 43 4C 52 AA CLR Oxaa Security Code Response Data BC F5 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 450 iRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC F5 F8 Delete User ID The system supports up to 16 users This command allows individual iIRMC S4 users to be deleted CAUTION The system can no longer be managed if all iRMC users are deleted Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group BMC 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first F8 Command Specifier User ID 1 16 Response Data BC F5 Completio
113. Certificate The S MIME certificate upload from file group allows you to load an S MIME certificate from a local file In conjunction with S MIME the iRMC only supports encryption Signing is not supported S MIME certificate upload from file there is no certificte assigned to this user Certificate File Browse Upload Figure 178 User Management User lt name gt Configuration page S MIME certificate upload from file Browse Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the file containing the SSHv2 public key Upload Uploads the selected S MIME certificate After the S MIME certificate has been uploaded the S MIME certificate upload from file group is displayed as follows S MIME Certificate Subject The Super Duper Admin Issuer The Super Duper Admin Email Address Administrator superduper org Certificate File Browse Upload View Certificate Delete Figure 179 User Management User lt name gt Configuration page S MIME certificate has been uploaded from file iRMC S4 289 User Management View Certificate Displays the S MIME certificate until the next refresh cycle or manual refresh of the iRMC web interface S MIME Certificate Details Version 3 Serial Number 7e 07 f4 d7 21 69 7f 84 45 0e 50 b6 12 06 10 65 Signature Algorithm sha1WithRSAEnoryption Public Key 2048 bit RSA Issued From Common Name CN The Super Duper Admi
114. Communication protocols used by the iRMC S4 1 5 iIRMC Communication protocols used by the The communication protocols and ports used by the iRMC are shown in table 1 Remote side of Communication iRMC side of the Configurable Enabled by the connection direction connection default port no protocol RMCP gt 623 UDP no yes lt 623 UDP HTTP port gt 80 TCP yes yes lt 80 TCP HTTPs port gt 443 TCP yes yes amp 443 TCP Telnet gt 3172 TCP yes no lt 3172 TCP SSH gt 22 TCP yes yes lt 22 TCP SNMP gt 161 UDP no no general mess Z 161 UDP SNMP Trap gt 162 UDP no yes LDAP gt 389 TCP UDP yes no lt 389 TCP UDP LDAP SSL gt 636 TCP UDP yes no lt 636 TCP UDP Email SMTP gt 25 TCP yes no lt 25 TCP CIM gt 5988 CIM XML lt 5989 CIM XML gt 80 WS MAN lt 80 WS MAN Table 1 Communication protocols and ports used by the iRMC iIRMC S4 25 IPMI technical background 1 6 IPMI technical background The iRMC makes the BMC functions available over the IPMI interface Intelligent Platform Management The Intelligent Platform Management initiative is a response to the increasing complexity of modern server systems A number of manufacturers have joined this initiative in order to come up with a new solution for monitoring these server systems The term Intelligent Platform Management
115. ConfBMCAcctUserPassword 1273 ConfAlarmEmailSMTPAuthPassword 197A ConfLdapiRMCgroupsUserPasswd 502 ConfBmcRadiusSharedSecret 1A52 ConfBmcRemoteFdlmageUserPassword 1A62 ConfBmcRemoteCdlmageUserPassword 1A72 ConfBmcRemoteHdIlmageUserPassword 1980 ConfBMCLicenseKey iRMC_PWD command line output options b Creates the output file as a WinSCU BATCH file f lt Output File gt Specify the output file name Default iRMC_pwd txt Default in Batch mode iRMC_pwd pre Example You want to generate a pre file that sets changes the username to admin and the password to SecretPassword for the existing user with the oid 2 To achieve this enter the following command iRMC_PWD o 2 u admin p SecretPassword b iRMC_PWD will generate a pre file with the contents shown in figure 260 on page 466 iIRMC S4 465 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration iRMC_PWD o 2 u admin p SecretPassword b lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 standalone yes gt lt CMDSEQ gt lt ConfBMCAcctUserName gt lt CMD Context SCCI OC ConfigSpace OE 1451 OI 2 Type SET gt lt DATA Type xsd string gt admin lt DATA gt lt STATUS gt 0 lt STATUS gt lt CMD gt lt ConfBMCAcctUserPassword gt lt CMD Context SCCI OC ConfigSpace OE 1452 OI 2 Type SET gt lt DATA Type xsd string Encrypted 1 gt N2BZd30LHAgc11pnHCAV9P ItwRue4qBB31IU7Xsh lt DATA gt
116. Country Remote Session Policy Remote Sessions Active PRIMERGY_iRMC_EMBEDDED_AGENT YLNEOO0049 Connected Enabled Warranty GERMANY Allow 0 Figure 67 AIS Connect page AIS Connect Status AIS Connect Management The AIS Connect Management group allows you to enable disable AIS Connect If AIS Connect currently is in Contract Mode you also have the option to switch the embedded AIS Connect agent to the Service Mode in which the agent ignores all hardware triggered alarms AIS Connect Management Disable AIS Connect Disable Service Mode Send Analysis Files Now Figure 68 AIS Connect page AIS Connect Management Enable AIS Connect Disable AIS Connect Enables disables AIS Connect Enable Service Mode Disable Service Mode Enables disables the Service Mode Send Analysis Files Now Sends the AIS Connect analysis file to the Technical Support of Fujitsu Technology Solutions 144 iRMC S4 System Information Information on the server AIS Connect Configuration The AZS Connect Configuration group allows you to configure your AIS Connect settings AIS Connect Configuration Use Proxy Country GERMANY Y Apply Test Connection Figure 69 AIS Connect page AIS Connect Configuration Use Proxy Here you can select whether an HTTP proxy server should be used You can configure the proxy server settings in the Network Settings group on the Proxy Settings page see section Proxy
117. D pe 2g i ol jg g S s 2 ae 212 Bla 2 o Sis alo cli d d 2 E Eie sie ojl 0 9 S ia lt O O JO gt Open the Backup Restoration of BIOS Single Parameter Settings page Edit Backup Restoration of BIOS Single Param Settings xX X Open the BIOS Update Settings page KIXI XTX Perform BIOS update Open the iRMC S4 Information page Reboot iRMC S4 xX X Load license key onto the iRMC X Set Miscellaneous Options X Open the Save iRMC S4 Time page XIXIXIX Change iRMC Time Options X Open the Save iRMC S4 FW Settings page xX X Select Include User Settings x Select all other Settings X Import iRMC settings in WinSCU XML format xX X Open edit the Certificate Upload page X Open edit the Generate a self signed RSA Cert page X Open iRMC S4 Firmware Update page Set firmware selector x x X lt Perform Firmware Update from File Update firmware via TFTP iRMC S4 TFTP Settings X x x lt x lt x lt Table 5 Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface iRMC S4 125 Required user permissions Event Log Table 5 Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface Functions in the iRMC web interface Permitted with Required IPMI privilege jj iRMC specific level permission 3 Zla 2Qi os 5 28 l alje is 2 o 3
118. Deployment Maintenance Information Help RH Configuration Bese A MS Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 2008 Server 6 Installation Info Applications 1 Se Summary Bootdisk Controller raid controller PartitionSize 32000 MB OperatingSystem Type Windows Server 2008 Enterprise R2 Components x64 R2 ProductKey Timezone UserName Organisation ComputerName Admin Passwd not set DHCP true SNMP Privileges 4 Community public Trap Destination 127 0 0 1 Save the Configuration to File ETIT a Note that this file on the server is used as a workfile and will be overwritten It should not be used for permanent storage Back Save Startinstallation Cancel Figure 258 Installation Manager Installation Info page If you have configured the local CD ROM DVD ROM drive of the managed server as the installation source proceed as follows at the remote workstation gt Clear your currently active virtual connections For more detailed information on clearing virtual media connections see page 119 iIRMC S4 421 Installing the operating system gt Remove ServerView Suite DVD 1 from the DVD ROM drive at the remote workstation Insert the Windows installation CD DVD in this DVD ROM drive i Close the application if autostart is active Connect the CD ROM DVD ROM drive containing the Windows installation CD DVD as virtual storage medium In the Installation Info page of the Installation Manager click Start install
119. Figure 74 Driver Monitor page Driver Monitor Status Displays the driver monitoring summary status Monitored Components Displays the monitored driver components Reset Resets of the status of all driver components 152 iIRMC S4 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems 7 5 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems The RAID Information entry and the related pages are only displayed if the following requirements are met Out of band enabled RAID Controllers are available on the managed server The server is powered on and the system is currently not in the BIOS POST phase The RAID Information entry contains the links to the following pages RAID Controller Information on RAID controllers and associated batteries on page 154 Physical Disks Information on RAID physical disks on page 160 Physical Disks Information on RAID physical disks on page 160 Logical Drives Information on RAID logical drives on page 162 These pages which are described in detail below only display information on RAID systems For managing RAID systems ServerView RAID is still needed iIRMC S4 153 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems 7 5 1 and associated batteries RAID Controller Information on RAID controllers For each RAID controller on the managed server the RAID Controller page provides information on the RAID controller and the status of the associat
120. High Firmware Image SDRR Version 3 45 ID 0350 RX100S8 iRMC 4 Time Save Configuration Certificate Upload a ED Generate Certificate iRMC S4 Update E Power Management Active Session Information E Power Consumption I iman 1P User User User Session Session Session Address Name id Type Type Privilege Shell E Event Log 172 417 167 181 admin 2 BMC User HTTP OEM Web GUI Server Management E Network Settings E Alerting License Key E User Management E Console Redirection KVM Your temporary license key is still valid for 698899 Days 23 Hours Video Redirection JWS MEDIA Your temporary license key is still valid for 698899 Days 23 Hours Virtual Media eLCM You do have a valid permanent license key installed Litecycte Management Please enter any license key into the area below Logout Miscellaneous iRMC S4 Options Default Language English z Temperature Units Degree Celsius z Color Schema Style Guide Version2 2 x show video Redirection Java Web Start in Navigation show Logout in Navigation T Enable automatic Apply Apply Figure 93 iRMC S4 Information page 174 iIRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Running Firmware Under Running Firmware you can view information on the firmware and the SDRR version of the iRMC and restart the iIRMC Running Firmware Firmwa
121. LDAP Enabled option is activated or Always use SSL Login option is activated S ServerView PRIMERGY RX300 S8 Server View Remote Management iRMC S4 Web Server Deutsch Ha Login required to continue Login required to continue sw1 rx300s8 E System Information Bios a iRMC 4 UserName E Power Management Password SOS E Power Consumption p ia Sensors Secure SSL 7 Event Log Serer Management Login E Network Settings Alerting User Management E Console Redirection Logout Refresh internet Protected Mode On Fa r R10 7 Figure 55 Login screen for the iRMC web interface LDAP access configured The user name and password are always SSL protected when they are transmitted If you activate the Secure SSL option all communication between the web browser and the iRMC is carried out over HTTPS gt Type in the data for the default administrator account User name admin Password admin For reasons of security it is recommended that you create a new administrator account once you have logged in and then delete the default administrator account or at least change the password for the account see User lt name gt Configuration User configuration details on page 283 gt Click Login to confirm your entries The web interface opens showing the System Information page see page 133 iRMC S4 123 Re
122. Linux distribution you are using you can obtain OpenSSH from http Avww openssh org You will find a detailed description of the operands in the OpenSSH OpenSSH manual pages under ttp Avww openssh org manual html Proceed as follows gt Call ssh keygen to generate an RSA key pair ssh keygen t rsa ssh keygen logs the progress of the key generation operation ssh keygen queries the user for the file name under which the private key is to be stored and for the passphrase for the private key ssh keygen stores the resulting private and public SSHv2 keys in separate files and displays the fingerprint of the public key Example Generating an RSA key pair with ssh keygen HOME benutzerl ssh keygen t rsa Generating public private rsa key pair Enter file in which to save the key HOME benutzerl ssh id_rsa 9 Enter passphrase empty for no passphrase Enter same passphrase again Your identification has been saved in HOME benutzerl ssh id_rsa Your public key has been saved in HOME benutzerl ssh id_rsa pub The key fingerprint is ee 99 d7 ac 8f 8e c7 2F 2c 9b 81 80 3f 84 28 7d benutzerl mycomp 001010 9 iRMC S4 69 Local user management for the iRMC S4 Explanation 1 ssh keygen requests the file name under which the SSHv2 key is to be saved If you press Enter to confirm without entering a file name ssh keygen uses the default file name id_rsa ssh keygen requests yo
123. MATIONAL 001 MINOR 010 MAJOR 011 CRITICAL 1xx Unknown Bit 3 0 reserved read as 0000 Data length ofthe whole text Converted SEL data requested part n 16 MaxResponseDataSize 1 String Terminator trailing O character 446 iRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC F5 45 Get SEL Entry Text This command translates a given System Event Log SEL entry into ASCII text Request Data Response Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group iRMC 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first 45 Command Specifier Record ID of SDR LS Byte first BC F5 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first Next Record ID Actual Record ID Record type Timestamp Severity Bit 7 0 No CSS component 1 CSS component Bit 6 4 000 INFORMATIONAL 001 MINOR 010 MAJOR 011 CRITICAL 1xx Unknown Bit 3 0 reserved read as 0000 Data length Converted SEL data iIRMC S4 447 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC F5 BO Set Identify LED This command allows you to switch the Identify LED blue of the server on and off In addition you can set and read the GPIOs that are directly connected to the Identify LED You can also switch the Identify LED on and off using the Identify switch on the server Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group B
124. MC 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first BO Command Specifier Identify LED 0 Identify LED off 1 Identify LED on Response Data BC F5 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first F5 B1 Get Identify LED This command returns information on the status of the Identify LED blue of the server Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group BMC 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first B1 Command Specifier Response Data BC F5 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first State of Identify LED only bit 0 is relevant 448 iIRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC F5 B3 Get Error LED This command returns information on the status of the server s Global Error LED red and CSS LED yellow The Global Error LED indicates the most serious error status of the components The CSS LED indicates whether the customer himself can rpair the fault Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group BMC 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first B3 Command Specifier Response Data BC F5 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first State of Error LED 0 CSS off GEL off 1 CSS off GEL on 2 CSS off GEL blink 3 CSS on GEL off 4 CSS on GEL on 5 CSS on GEL blink 6 CSS blink GEL off 7
125. ManagementLANPort gt lt IPNominal Speed gt 0 lt IPNominal Speed gt lt i RMC gt lt ManagementControllers gt AANKAN 476 iRMC S4
126. Mouse menu Show mouse cursor Displays hides the mouse pointer of your remote workstation when using the AVR Mouse Calibration Used for calibrating the relative mouse mode This option is only enabled if Mouse Mode Relative Mouse Mode has been selected In relative mouse mode the mouse pointer of the managed server follows the mouse pointer of the remote workstation in a decelerated manner Show Host Cursor Shows an additional mouse pointer additional to the mouse pointer of the managed server If hardware acceleration of the mouse pointer is set to the maximal value and the Matrox G200e driver is installed the hardware mouse pointer of the iRMC is activated Only one mouse pointer is normally displayed in this mode In this case the Show Host Cursor option can be used to display a second mouse pointer which refers to the managed server iIRMC S4 99 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Mouse Mode Specifies the mouse mode Absolute mouse mode Relative mouse mode or Hide mouse mode In Hide mouse mode the mouse pointer of the remote workstation is not displayed il Default setting Absolute mouse mode Please do always use the Absolute mouse mode Only in case of an older operating system e g RedHat 4 the Absolute mouse mode might not work For the LSI WEBBIOS the Hide mouse mode Relative must be used 5 2 7 4 AVR window Options menu The Options menu allows you to enable disable keyboard mou
127. N If a BIOS update is currently in progress do not power off or restart the server 172 iRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates 7 7 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates The iRMC S4 entry contains the links to the following pages IRMC S4 Information Information on the iRMC on page 174 IRMC S4 Time Time options for the iRMC S4 on page 178 Save Configuration Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings on page 181 Certificate Upload Load the DSA RSA Certificate and private DSA RSA Key on page 183 Generate a self signed Certificate Generate self signed RSA Certificate on page 190 IRMC S4 Firmware Update on page 192 iIRMC S4 173 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates 7 7 1 iRMC S4 Information Information on the iRMC The iRMC S4 Information page provides you with the following options View information on the firmware and the SDRR version of the iRMC set the firmware selector and load a firmware image and restart the iRMC View information on the active iRMC sessions Load license key onto the iRMC Make settings for the layout of the web interface ServerView FUJITSU ServerView iRMC S4 Web Server Sw1 Rx100S8 iRMC S4 Information E System Information Running Firmware amp Bios E irme s4 Firmware Version 97 61b Base 97 61 b iRMC S4 Information Firmware Date Sep 12014 14 32 23 CEST Firmware Running
128. NS response gt Click Apply to store the configured settings DNS Name The DNS Name group allows you to configure a host name for the iRMC and thus use dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows DHCP servers to autonomously pass on the IP address and system name of a network component to DNS servers to facilitate identification DNS Name Vv Register DHCP Address in DNS via DHCP Server Register full domain name FQDN via DHCP in DNS T DNS Update Enabled M Use iRMC S4 name instead of server hostname M Add Serial Number m Add Extension iRMC S4 name IRMC Extension iRMC DNS name IRMCA2FA42 Apply Figure 163 DNS Configuration page DNS Name Register DHCP Address in DNS via DHCP Server This option is disabled if IPv6 addressing is used Enables disables the transfer of the DHCP name to the DHCP server for the iRMC and the DNS registration via DHCP server Register full domain name FQDN via DHCP server in DNS This option is disabled if IPv6 addressing is used Enables disables the transfer of the FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name to the DHCP server for the iRMC and the DNS registration via DHCP server DNS Update Enabled Enables disables update of DNS records via Dynamic DNS il Only insecure DNS is supported 266 iRMC S4 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters Use iRMC S4 name instead of server hostname The iRMC name specified in the iRMC S4 Name entry field is used for the iRM
129. OK FAN1PSU1G PSU1 Low 6 Temperature sensors in FUJITSU ETERNUS JX40 1 on LSI MegaRAID SAS 9286CV 8e 0 Warning Critical No Status Designation Location Temperature le Level 1 ok Sensor LED panel 26 C 45 C 2 ok Sensorct Backplane lett 28 C 60 C 65 C Qo 3 OK Sensor 2 Backplane center 28 C eo c 65 C 4 ok Sensors Backplane right 24 C sorc 65 C 5 Ok Sensor Processor SAS chip TH1 42 C 7O C 75 C 6 OK Sensor 5 Processor board TH2 29 C 70 C 76 C Figure 78 RAID enclosures details ETERNUS JX40information Locate Turns on the identify LED of the RAID enclosure iIRMC S4 157 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems RAID enclosure ETERNUS JX60 E System Information RAID Information Controller Enclosures Physical Disks Logical Drives Bios iRMC 54 E Power Management Power Consumption Sensors Event Log Server Management E Network Settings E Alerting E User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media Third Party Licenses Refresh Enclosure s on controller FTS PRAID EP420e 0 Port Chain Vendor o o FUJITSU 4 o FUJITSU o o FUJITSU 4 o FUJITSU Product ETERNUS JX60 ETERNUS JX60 ETERNUS JX60 ETERNUS JX60 Part number CA05967 1610 B0 CA0N5967 1610 B0 CA05967 1610 B0 CA0N5967 1610 B0 Serial number JWXBM13260292 JWXBM 13260094 JWXBM13
130. Permissions group is not displayed if you have selected Permissions retrieved via LDAP under Permissions assigned from in the CAS Generic Configuration group CAS User Privilege and Permissions Privilege Level User v Configure User Accounts F Configure iRMC 4 Settings Video Redirection Enabled oO Remote Storage Enabled Oo Apply Figure 205 CAS User Privilege and Permissions Privilege Assign a privilege group to the user here User Operator Administrator OEM Refer to section User permissions on page 62 for information on the permissions associated with the privilege groups In addition to the IPMI specific permissions you can also individually assign users the following channel independent permissions Configure User Accounts Permission to configure local user access data iIRMC S4 317 User Management Configure iRMC S4 Settings Permission to configure the iRMC settings Video Redirection Enabled Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection AVR in View Only and Full Control mode Remote Storage Enabled Permission to use the Virtual Media functionality 318 iRMC S4 Console Redirection Redirecting the console 7 16 Console Redirection Redirecting the console The following pages are available for console redirection BIOS Text Console Configure and start text console redirection on page 319 Advanced Video Redirec
131. R session 2 is prompted to grant AVR session 1 Full access a Virtual Console Sharing Privile Give Permission to user admin with IP address 192 168 0 108 Allow Virtual Console Allow only Video 5 seconds remaining Figure 26 Virtual Console Sharing Privileges dialog box Give Permission to user lt user gt This dialog box which counts down from 28 seconds offers for selection the following options which can be enabled by clicking OK 84 iIRMC S4 Using AVR Allow Virtual Console AVR session 1 is granted Full access In AVR session 1 this is indicated as follows Full Virtual Console access granted by admin user with IP address 192 168 0 108 Figure 27 INFORMATION dialog box Full access granted Allow only Video AVR session 1remains in partial Partial access mode default In AVR session 1 this is indicated as follows Partial access only video granted by admin user with IP address 192 168 0 108 Figure 28 INFORMATION dialog box Partial access granted Exiting the Full access session If two AVR sessions are currently active and you exit the one that is in Full access mode the following dialog box opens asking you to select the next master session i e the session with Full access Virtual Console Sharing Privileges Select the next Master Session admin 192 168 0 175 OK 7 seconds remaining
132. RMC and the ServerView Agentless Service as of ServerView Operations Manager 7 0 allows for enhanced out of band management of PRIMERGY servers Power management Irrespective of the status of the system you have the following options for powering the managed server up or down from the remote workstation using the iRMC web interface using the Remote Manager and the command line interface CLP witha script 16 iIRMC S4 Functions of the iRMC S4 Power consumption control The iRMC allows comprehensive power consumption control on the managed server In addition you can specify the mode minimum power consumption or maximum performance that the iRMC uses to control power consumption on the managed server You can switch between these modes as required Customer Self Service CSS Summary tables for the server components sensors and the power supply on the iRMC web interface provide information in a separate column as to whether the server component affected is a CSS component or not In addition error list of the system event log SEL shows for every event whether it has been triggered by a CSS component Text console redirection You can start a Telnet SSH session to the iRMC from the ServerView Remote Management Front end This calls the Remote Manager via which you can start a text console redirection session Basic functions of a BMC The iRMC supports the basic functions of a BMC such as voltag
133. RMC web interface is called Show Video Redirection Java Web Start in Navigation Adds the Video Redirction JWS link to the navigation area This allows you to directly start video redirection Java Web Start see Video Redirection Starting AVR using Java on page 329 Show Logout in Navigation This option is only available if the iIRMC information page is displayed in the Styleguide Version 2 2 color scheme Adds the Logout link to the navigation area This allows you to logout via the navigation area Enable Automatic Apply All settings are enabled at the moment they are set The Apply buttons within the individual pages of the iRMC are hidden until the Enable Automatic Apply option is deselected again Apply Applies the selected option iIRMC S4 177 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates 7 7 2 iRMC S4 Time Time options for the iRMC S4 The iRMC S4 Time page allows you to configure the time settings for the iRMC ServerView JITSU ServerView iRMC S4 Web Server Deutsch GESI iRMC S4 Time hig tg ote iRMC 4 Time Options System Overview System Components Time Mode System RTC lt SARTA RTC Mode Locsitime System Report Network Inventory Driver Monitor i BIOs Configuration peaa Time Zone IRMC S4 Information Time Zone Berlin lt IRMC S4 Time Save Configuration Certincete Upices AES Generate Certificate
134. Reason Power on Remote control via Remote Manager Last Power Off Reason Power off Clock or timer Figure 114 Power On Off page Power Status Summary 198 iIRMC S4 Power Management Boot Options The Boot Options group allows you to configure the behavior of the system each time it is booted You can set whether the BIOS is to interrupt the boot process for the system if errors occur during the POST phase The options set here only apply to the next boot operation After this the default mechanism applies again Boot Options Error Halt Settings Continue Boot Device Selector No Change Boot Type PC compatible legacy Next Boot Only Apply Figure 115 Power Management Boot Options page Error Halt Settings Specifies the desired BIOS behavior Continue Continue the boot process if errors occur during the POST phase Halt on errors Interrupt the boot process if errors occur during the POST phase Boot Device Selector Storage medium you wish to boot from The following options are available No change The system is booted from the same storage medium as previously PXE SCSI The system is booted from PXE iSCSI over the network Harddrive The system is booted from hard disk CDROM DVD The system is booted from CD DVD Floppy The system is booted from floppy disk BIOS Setup The system enters BIOS setup when booting iRMC S4 199 Power Management
135. S4 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters 7 13 2 Ports and Network Services Configuring ports and network services The Ports and Network Services page allows you to view and modify the configuration settings for ports and network services ServerView User admin Logout UIT SI eviews IRMC 54 Web Server Bautech Bas Ports and Network Services a Sakia Ports and Network Services Settings sos BH irmC s4 E Power Management j Web based access E a Session timeout 300 Seconds HTTP Port 80 HTTPS Port 443 Server Management Force HTTPS E Enable ssiv3 E Enable TLS 1 0 7 L Saraso Enable TLS 14 1 DNS Enable TLS 4 2 7 SNMP Enable Auto Refresh 7 Refresh every 120 Seconds Alerting Note The refresh time is less than the session timeout Your session will not timeout User Management Q Note One of the security protocols SSL TLS must be enabled If all sre cleared default will sutomatically be set Default is TLS 1 0 I Console Redirection Video Redirection HTMLS p Text based access virtual Medis Telnet Port 2172 Session Drop Time 10 Minutes Lifecycle Management SSH Port 22 Refresh Telnet Enabled F SSH Enabled P IPMI over LAN IPMI over LAN Enabled rem CIM Enabled p Figure 159 Ports and Network Services page Configuration is not supported fo
136. SCSI The system is booted from PXE iSCSI over the network Hard Drive The system is booted from hard disk CDROM DVD The system is booted from CD DVD Floppy The system is booted from floppy disk Bios Setup The system enters BIOS setup when booting Boot Type Determines the boot mode in which the system will be started at the next boot Depending on the server operating system the following options are available for selection 104 iRMC S4 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window PC compatible legacy The system is booted in legacy BIOS compatibility mode Extensible Firmware Interface Boot EFI The system is booted in UEFI boot mode only on 64 bit operating systems Next Boot Only The configured settings apply to the next boot only 5 2 7 7 AVR window Active Users menu The Active Users menu shows the users currently using the AVR The green bullet indicates your own session Video Keyboard Mouse Options Media Power x 000 0G admin 111 111 114 111 user1 222 222 22 222 100 r l Figure 44 AVR window Active Users menu 5 2 7 8 AVR window Help menu Beyond showing general information on JViewer the Help menu displays in the Server Information dialog box the information defined under System Information in the System Overview page of iRMC web interface see section System Overview General information on
137. SSL Port Secure LDAP port of the primary LDAP server Backup LDAP Server LDAP directory server which is maintained as the backup server and used as the directory server if LDAP Server 1 fails LDAP Server IP address or DSN name of the Backup LDAP server LDAP Port LDAP port of the Backup LDAP server LDAP SSL Port Secure LDAP port of the Backup LDAP server iRMC S4 303 User Management Domain Name Complete DNS path name of the directory server Base DN Base DN is automatically derived from Domain Name Groups directory as sub tree from base DN Pathname of the organizational unit OU which as a subtree of Base DN Group DN Context contains the OUs SVS or iRMCgroups Department name This option is only displayed if the option ServerView LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on LDAP Server has been enabled The department name is used in the directory service in order to determine the user permissions and alert roles A user may have different permissions for the department X server than for the department Y server gt Click Apply to activate your settings gt Configure the iRMC local user groups data in the LDAP User Group Information group The LDAP User Group Information group is only displayed if the option Standard LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on iRMC has been enabled LDAP User Group Information LDAP User Group Name LDAPusergroup2 User Shell Text Access SMASH CLP v A
138. SW1 RX30058 E System Information BIOs E iRMC 4 E Power Management Fan Check Time 23 00 Disable FAN Test _ E Power Consumption E Sensors Fans Temperature Voltages System Fans Power Supply Component Status speed __ Normal Fai Shutdown nae E Event Log Select No Designation RPM Soren Ronio ra Status Component Server Management E Network Settings D 1 Fanisys 1260 97 Continue 90 FAN on running Yes Asing m 2 Fanzsys 1380 101 Continue 90 FANon tunning Yes E User Management Console Redirection D 2 Fanssys 1440 103 Continue 90 FAN on running Yes Video Redirection IWS virtual Media D 4 Fanasys 1440 98 Continue 90 FANon running Yes tagas D 5 Fanssys 1440 400 Continue 90 FAN on running Yes PER O 6 FAnpsui 2800 100 Continue 90 FANon running Yes mj 7 FANPSU2 2160 100 Continue 90 FAN on running Yes Select All Deselect All Continue z after selected fan fails Shutdown Delay 90 Seconds Apply To Selected Fans i Note An activated fan fail reaction requires installed and running ServerView Agents Figure 130 Fans page Fan Test Test fans The Fan Test group allows you to specify a time at which the fan test is started automatically or to start the fan test explicitly Fan Test performs the fan test with a speed near to the currently required speed Thus the fan test is not acoustically noticeable Fan Check Time Enter
139. Server Type Novell eDirectory Y Authorization Typ Senerview LDAP Groups win Aumorization Settings on LDAP Sener Standard LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on IRMC Primary LDAP Server LDAP Server LDAP Port 339 LDAP SSL Port 636 Backup LDAP Server LDAP Server LDAP Port 339 LDAP SSL Port 636 Bass DN w Groups directory as sub tree from bese DN User Search context Aoo Figure 194 Global Directory Service Configuration Specifications for Novell eDirectory Open LDAP OpenDS Open DJ Primary LDAP Server LDAP directory server that is to be used LDAP Server IP address or DSN name of the primary LDAP server LDAP Port LDAP port of the primary LDAP server LDAP SSL Port Secure LDAP port of the primary LDAP server 308 iRMC S4 User Management Backup LDAP Server LDAP directory server which is maintained as the backup server and used as the directory server if LDAP Server 1 fails LDAP Server IP address or DSN name of the Backup LDAP server LDAP Port LDAP port of the Backup LDAP server LDAP SSL Port Secure LDAP port of the Backup LDAP server Department Name This option is only displayed if the option ServerView LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on LDAP Server has been enabled Department name The directory service needs the department name in order to determine the user permissions A user may have different permissions for the department X s
140. ServerView Suite link collection Via the link collection Fujitsu Technology Solutions provides you with numerous downloads and further information on the ServerView Suite and PRIMERGY servers For ServerView Suite links are offered on the following topics e Forum e Service Desk e Manuals e Product information e Security information e Software downloads e Training i The downloads include the following Current software versions for the ServerView Suite as well as additional Readme files Information files and update sets for system software components BIOS firmware drivers ServerView agents and ServerView update agents for updating the PRIMERGY servers via ServerView Update Manager or for locally updating individual servers via ServerView Update Manager Express The current versions of all documentation on the ServerView Suite You can retrieve the downloads free of charge from the Fujitsu Technology Solutions Web server For PRIMERGY servers links are offered on the following topics e Service Desk e Manuals e Product information e Spare parts catalogue iIRMC S4 35 Documentation for the ServerView Suite Access to the link collection You can reach the link collection of the ServerView Suite in various ways 1 Via ServerView Operations Manager gt Select Help Links on the start page or on the menu bar This opens the start page of the ServerView link collection 2 Via the
141. Settings Configuring proxy settings on page 262 Country AIS Connect RP country Apply Activate your settings Clicking Apply saves your settings to the persistent memory of the i iRMC Your settings are therefore available after a page refresh or after the iRMC web interface was closed and opened again or in case of a power loss Test Connection Tests the connection to the Service System of Fujitsu Technology Solutions iIRMC S4 145 System Information Information on the server AIS Connect Remote Session The AIS Connect Remote Session group allows you to do the following Enabling or disabling the policy for the remote session Disconnecting any remote session Forcing the embedded AIS Connect agent to immediately poll This is useful for getting a quick response when you are in Warranty Mode AIS Connect Remote Session Deny Remote Sessions Disconnect Remote Sessions Force Poll Figure 70 AIS Connect page AIS Connect Configuration Allow Remote Sessions Deny Remote Sessions Allows denies a remote session by enabling disabling the policy for the remote session Disconnect Remote Sessions Disconnects a remote session if there is any Force Poll Forces the embedded AIS Connect agent to immediately poll 146 iRMC S4 System Information Information on the server 7 4 4 System Report The System Report page provides information on service incidents concernin
142. SoftKeyboard Displays the SoftKeyboard virtual keyboard To display the SoftKeyboard in your preferred language proceed as follows 1 Move the mouse pointer on SoftKeyboard item A list of the available Softkeyboard languages is shown 2 Select your preferred language from the list The SoftKeyboard is displayed for the selected language SoftKeyboard English United States esc F1 F2 rs F4 FS F6 F7 F8 F9 rt0 ra1 r2 psc sik brk Trle s ls fe Lz ele fe Jose ins nm Jour ta falwie r tfyfufifo rfifilr det end pan caps a s a rfo nfifs Ha fom ent swt 2 xfe v o n m shift a ctrl win alt cm alt win ctrl lt v le Figure 38 AVR window Keyboard menu SoftKeyboard Full Keyboard Support If enabled allows you to use via SoftKeyboard all function keys of the managed server s physical keyboard 98 iIRMC S4 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window 5 2 7 3 AVR window Mouse menu The Mouse menu allows you to configure the settings for redirecting the mouse Video Keyboard Options Media Power Control Active Users Help 4z Z Show mouse cursor Alt c mE w x O Mouse Calibration Alt T E Show Host Cursor Absolute mouse mode O Relative mouse mode Hide mouse mode Figure 39 AVR window Mouse menu You can select the following functions in the
143. System Share type of the network share is CIFS SMB Common Interface File System NFS Network File System The virtual media is attached to the server only when a virtual media session is started Server IP address or DNS name of the server hosting the remote images remote image server for short Share Name Name of the network share the remote image server belongs to Image Name Name of path to the remote image User Name User name required for accessing the network share Password Enter the password for the user Confirm Password Reenter the password for confirmation Domain Domain of the user Apply Activates your settings Connect Connects the remote image to the managed server 336 iRMC S4 Virtual Media Disconnect Clears the remote image connection Restart Service Restarts the Remote Image Mount service e g in case of a failure Connecting the remote image to the managed server Suppose you have configured the Remote CD DVD Image Options as follows Remote CD DVD Image Options Share Type CIFS SMB Common Internet File System v Serwer 111 11 111 11 Share Name abe Image Name Frojects Image iso User Name Usert Password ssesseesee Confirm Password sessessee Domain COG Apply Connect Restart Service Figure 219 Remote CD DVD Image Options are configured To connect to the remote image to the managed server proceed as follows gt C
144. User Guide English FUJITSU FUJITSU Software ServerView Suite Remote Management IRMC S4 integrated Remote Management Controller Edition August 2015 Comments Suggestions Corrections The User Documentation Department would like to know your opinion of this manual Your feedback helps us optimize our documentation to suit your individual needs Feel free to send us your comments by e mail to manuals ts fujitsu com Certified documentation according to DIN EN ISO 9001 2008 To ensure a consistently high quality standard and user friendliness this documentation was created to meet the regulations of a quality management system which complies with the requirements of the standard DIN EN ISO 9001 2008 cognitas Gesellschaft fur Technik Dokumentation mbH www cognitas de Copyright and Trademarks Copyright 2015 Fujitsu Technology Solutions GmbH All rights reserved Delivery subject to availability right of technical modifications reserved All hardware and software names used are trademarks of their respective manufacturers Contents 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 31 1 Silalel Slide 3 1 1 3 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 PET ACS coroane ces oie ee ha Sie oe Si Purpose and target groups of the manual Functions of the iRMC S4 overview User interfaces of the iRMC S4 Font panel LEDs controlled by the iRMC
145. Video Redirection HTML5 link in the tree structure of the iRMC web interface The default browser opens showing you the display on the managed server Dr cken Sie STRG ALTTENTE um sich anzumelden 16 53 Mittwoch 29 Juli Figure 47 Default Browser displaying AVR redirection using HTML5 The HTML5 page is divided into several groups KVM settings In this group you can handle the redirection via HTML5 Server IP IP address of the server the iRMC resides on iRMC S4 109 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Keyboard Layout Defines how the keystrokes on the physical keyboard are interpreted You have two options English US German Stop KVM Stops the video redirection Ctrl amp Alt amp Del Executes Ctrl amp Alt amp Del on the server Record Video Records the redirected session Media Redirection In this group you can to attach or detach media on the remote workstation as virtual media devices CD Image Displays the selected ISO image Browse Opens a dialog to navigate to the directory of the storage medium that you want to make available as virtual medium from your remote workstation Start Media Redirection Starts media redirection and connects the provided storage medium as Virtual Media Supported Browsers The HTMLS5 redirection function is supported by the following browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer as of version 11 Mod
146. Video Redirection Options i This function is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers The Video Redirection Options group allows you to specify various options that apply for the duration of the AVR session Video Redirection Options HTMLS5 Viewer Enabled 7 Default Mouse Mode Absolute Mouse Mode w Local Monitor Off Control Enabled v AVR Title USER BMC_NAME Current AVR Title sdmin iRMC02D89B Apply Figure 212 Video Redirection Options HTMLS Viewer Enabled When this option is enabled The button in the Video Redirection group changes from Start Video Redirection Java Web Start to Start Video Redirection HTMLS The node Video Redirection JWS in the navigation tree changes to Video Redirection HTML5 Both elements open a browser window containing the AVR via HTML5 interface Default Mouse Mode Defines the default mouse mode Absolute Mouse Mode Relative Mouse Mode or Other Mouse Mode Depending on the server operating system you must make the following settings Windows Absolute mouse mode Hide mouse mode Relative or Relative mouse mode Linux Absolute mouse mode Hide mouse mode Relative or Relative mouse mode i Default setting Absolute mouse mode iIRMC S4 327 Console Redirection Redirecting the console Local Monitor Off Control The current status of the local monitor is indicated the AVR Video menu and displayed via the se
147. a m a MEM D 78 82 Continue N A Logout C 10 MEME 35 78 82 Continue OK Refresh o 11 MEM F 78 82 Continue N A O 12 MEMG 78 82 Continue N A m 18 MEMH 78 82 Continue N A O 14 psutiniet 35 57 61 Continue OK C i5 Psuziniet 32 57 61 Continue OK O t Psu 64 102 107 Continue OK Cr Ow PSU2 60 4102 1407 Continue OK O 18 BBU 50 55 Continue N A m 49 RAID Controller 105 115 Continue N A D 20 HDD Continue N A Select All Deselect All Continue T after reaching oritioal temperature Apply To Selected Sensors i Note An activated temperature fail reaction requires installed and running ServerView Agents Figure 131 Temperature page You can use the options or buttons to select individual temperature sensors or all the temperature sensors and specify whether the server is to be shut down if the critical temperature is reached at the selected sensors 222 iIRMC S4 Sensors Check status of the sensors Select all Selects all temperature sensors Deselect all All selections are cancelled gt Select the sensors for which you wish to define the behavior in the event that the critical temperature is reached gt Define the behavior in the event that the critical temperature is reached using the list at the bottom of the work area Choose continue if the server is not to be shut down if the critical temperature is reached at the selected sensors Choose Shutdown and Power off if the server is to be shut down
148. age 383 When you select s Start a Command Line shell from the main menu the following window appears Shell Menu 1 Start SMASH CLP shell Enter selection or 0 to quit ii Figure 245 Remote Manager Start a SMASH CLP shell menu gt Choose 1 Start a SMASH CLP shell to start the SMASH CLP shell 380 iRMC S4 Console Logging 8 15 Console Logging Redirect message output to the text console serial The Console Logging item in the main menu allows you to redirect message output logging to the text console serial interface When you select 1 Console Logging from the main menu the following window appears Console Logging Menu 1 Change Logging Run state 2 Clear Console Logging buffer 3 Replay Console Fast mode 4 Replay Console Continuous mode Enter selection or 0 to quit E Figure 246 Remote Manager Console Logging menu The sub menu contains the following functions Change Logging Run state Show and change the logging run state For a more detailed description see Console Logging Run State Menu on page 382 Clear Console Logging buffer Clear the console logging buffer Replay Console Fast mode Show the console log in fast mode Replay Console Continuous mode Show the console log in continuous mode Table 21 Console Logging menu iRMC S4 381 Console Logging Console Logging Run State Menu
149. agement LAN option available pdbsm b62m00 10 E PDBSM RX104 J pdbsm rx204 S pdbsm tx155 8 Possm Tx303 Groups Fertig l Figure 251 Operations Manager Server Configuration window Server list 2 tab gt On the right hand side of the window specify the details on the selected server and confirm your entries by clicking GO The first dialog of the Server Configuration manager opens iRMC S4 393 10 Firmware update This chapter provides you with information about the following topics iRMC S4 firmware overview Creating a memory stick for updating the firmware Updating firmware images Emergency flash flash tools AN Li CAUTION When updating downgrading the firmware note that the problem free operation of the firmware can only be guaranteed if the runtime firmware and the SDR Sensor Data Record both belong to the same firmware release The current firmware versions are present on the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or can be downloaded manually from the Download section of the Fujitsu Technology Solutions web server You can obtain the up to date version of the ServerView Suite DVD 2 at two monthly intervals Besides the possibility of performing a firmware update you can also downgrade the firmware to the previous version Before updating or downgrading the firmware read the supplementary documentation supplied with the new firmware carefully in p
150. ager in some cases also map standard IPMI related commands and configuration items such as standard IPMI user configuration or IPv4 network configuration This implements an abstraction level between the IPMI BMC layer and higher software levels 452 iIRMC S4 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration The SCCI is a generic application programming interface API defined by Fujitsu for different Server Management Controller hardware as well as Server Management software e g ServerView Agents It can be easily extended to cover new commands or new configuration items For an architectural overview of the SCCI see the online help of the ServerView agents The iRMC supports remote configuration and limited scripting via the config URL in the iRMC S4 Benefits of remote iRMC configuration via web based access Remote configuration of the iRMC via web based access provides the following benefits Uses HTTP POST operation for uploading files onto the iRMC No special tool is required Any generic tool or scripting environments supporting authenticated HTTP POST operations can be used Sample scripts can be found on the ServerView Suite DVD 2 Uses built in authentication and authorization methods of the iRMC Web server Supports HTTP 1 1 Basic and Digest authentication based on RFC 2617 with local iRMC user accounts Features optional built in strong encryption with standard HTTPS based access
151. ah amar System Hang No er Critical 080069 Watchdog EM isl AN cae Hard System Hang No x lt HRR Critical 020000 PSU Power unit primary power lost System Power No y M aa Major oOcoooc BIOS POST CPU has been changed POST Errors No Figure 138 System Event Log Content page System Event Log Content Display Critical Display Major Display Minor Display Info CSS only If you wish you can choose one or more severity levels other than the default values here Show Resolutions If you choose this option a proposal for solution will be displayed for each SEL entry of severity level Critical or Major gt Click Apply to activate your settings for the duration of the current session 234 iRMC S4 System Event Log and Internal Event Log 7 11 2 Internal Event Log Show information on the internal event log and the associated entries The Internal Event Log Information page provides information on the internal event log and displays the associated entries The internal event log comprises audit events login events AVR connection events etc and additional information e g IPv6 related information and LDAP user names S ServerView User admin Logout Internal Event Log Information E System Information sios E iRMC 4 Erase Time Wed 17 Apr 2013 02 25 13 PM E Power Management Event Log Modus Circular Buffer Ring Butter Fill Level 68 Number of Entries 275 E Power Consumption
152. anced Video Redirection AVR on page 324 This opens the AVR window gt Inthe menu bar in the AVR window choose Media Virtual Media Wizard or click one of the three Virtual Media icons in the tool bar ey Zico Media Power Active Users Help Virtual Media Wizard 3 ay T Figure 49 AVR window Media Virtual Media Wizard The Virtual Media dialog box opens iRMC S4 113 Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation 6 1 2 Virtual Media dialog box Depending on the settings made in the Virtual Media page of iRMC web interface the Virtual Media dialog box displays from 0 up to 4 panels for each of the following three media types Floppy Key Media Floppy Images Default No Floppy Key Medium is displayed CD DVD Media ISO images CD DVD Media ISO images CD DVD drives i e physical CD DVD Default 2 CD DVD Media ISO images are displayed Hard disk USB Key Media Hard disk USB Key images Physical drive fixed drive Default 1 Hard disk USB Key Medium is displayed i Physical storage devices must be mounted on Linux systems 114 iRMC S4 Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation Floppy Key Media CD Image tsclient J Neuer Ordnerilocsysupd img OD 4 Mh Hard disk USB Key Media I HD USB Image PhysicalDri
153. ancel Update Check Start Update Process Resulting behavior immediate after check Update check is started immediately Subsequently update process is automatically started All available update components are installed No user interaction scheduled after check Scheduled update check All available update components are installed No user interaction immediate never Update check is started immediately Update process is not started automatically scheduled never Scheduled update checks none of which is followed by an automatically started update process never immediate Based on the result of a separately performed update check the update process is started immediately This allows you to explicitly select deselect one or more of the components offered for selection by the former update check before starting the update process never scheduled Based on the result of a separately performed update check the update process is started immediately This allows you to explicitly select deselect one or more of the components offered for selection by the former update check before starting the update process Table 9 Online update settings 3 daily weekly monthly yearly once only Cancels the update check 344 iRMC S4 Lifecycle Management Online Update Logs The Online Update Logs group informs you if a log file of the online upda
154. and powered down if the critical temperature is reached at the selected sensors Shutdown and Power off is executed when the critical temperature is reached regardless of whether ServerView agents are running on the managed server gt Click Apply to the selected Sensors to activate your settings for the selected temperature sensors iRMC S4 223 Sensors Check status of the sensors 7 10 3 Voltages Report voltage sensor information The Voltages page provides information on the status of voltage sensors assigned to the server components S ServerView User admin Server View Remote Management iRMC S4 Web Server Deutsch H SW1 RX300S8 Voltages System information Voltage Sensor Information Bios iRMC s4 y A ar Current Minimum Maximum Nominal p Power Management No Designation fera Value Value Value Units Status D ilar ad Qo BATT 3 0V 348 201 3 60 300 Volt OK Sensors Fans o gt z STBY142V 14482 1128 1296 1200 Vot OK Temperature Sek Oo STBY 5V 510 463 5 42 500 Volt OK oltages Power Supply 4 stevsav 330 3 02 3 57 330 Volt OK Component Status Bi Event Log 5 wanisvstay 179 1 87 1 93 180 Vot OK Server Management irnmcisvstay 147 1 39 1 61 150 Volt OK E Network Settings i Alaiting 7 wWniovstay oss 093 1 08 100 Volt OK User Management MAIN 12V a 131 1290 1200 Volt OK Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS MAIN 5V 5 00 463 5 42 500 Volt OK Virtual Media
155. and Print Screen buttons and or the keys of your keyboard The entered combination is displayed in the Add Macro dialog box Clicking on Clear All or Clear you can remove all keys or the rightmost key from the display by clicking on Clear All or Clear respectively 96 iIRMC S4 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window 4 5 6 Click OK to activate the new hotkey The new hot key is now displayed in the User Defined Macros dialog box User Defined Macros amp N E W Add Delete Close Figure 37 AVR window Keyboard menu Add Hot Key User Defined Macros 2 To remove a hotkey select the corresponding entry B in the example shown in figure 37 on page 97 and click Delete Click Close to close the User Defined Macros dialog box Host Physical Keyboard Language used on the keyboard of the managed server The following options are available Auto Detect default value English United States English United Kingdom French French Belgium German Germany German Switzerland Japanese Spanish Italian Danish Finnish Norwegian Norway iRMC S4 97 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Portuguese Portugal Swedish Dutch Netherland Dutch Belgium Turkish F Turkish Q If you select AutoDetect the AVR assumes that keyboard language is the same on the managed Server and the remote workstation
156. ard 07S Version 6 2 Build 9200 System IP 172 17 167 83 System Location Unknown edit ete snmp snmpd conf System Contact Root lt root localhost gt configure ete snmp snm ServerView Agentless Service Version 7 00 03 17 System Up Time 0 Days 2 Hours 18 Minutes Apply Figure 62 System Overview page Operating System Information If neither a ServerView agent nor the ServerView Agentless Service is running you can edit all fields of the Operating System Information group otherwise these fields are not editable If the ServerView agents are running all values are set by the ServerView agents The values can be manually adjusted but only in band If the ServerView Agentless Service is running the values are set except the values for System Location and System Contact which cannot be accessed by the ServerView Agentless Service The values for System Location and System Contact can be set manually iIRMC S4 137 System Information Information on the server System FRU IDPROM Information Information on the FRUs Field Replaceable Units is listed under System FRU IDPROM Information FRUs are system components that can be released and removed from the system The CSS Component column indicates for each of the components whether the CSS Customer Self Service functionality is supported System FRUADPROM Information Board FRU FRU Progo Serial Part sock ape Manufacturer z Name or Nam
157. articular the Readme files iIRMC S4 395 iRMC S4 firmware overview 10 1 iRMC S4 firmware overview The iRMC S4 uses two different firmware images The two firmware images each are stored on a 32 MB EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Firmware image 1 low FW image Firmware image 2 high FW image The firmware of the iRMC S4 is not executed in the EEPROM but is instead loaded into SRAM memory on startup and executed there This means that it is possible to update both active and inactive firmware images online i e with the server operating system Windows or Linux running If an error occurs while loading the firmware from one of the images the firmware is automatically loaded from the other image i Information on the iRMC S4 firmware and EEPROM can be found Inthe iRMC S4 web interface page iRMC S4 Information see page 173 or Using the flash tool see page 408 Active and passive firmware image One of the two firmware images is active running at any given time while the other is inactive The firmware image that is active depends on the so called firmware selector see page 397 396 iRMC S4 iRMC S4 firmware overview Firmware selector The firmware selector specifies the iRMC S4 firmware to be executed Every time the iRMC S4 is reset and restarted the firmware selector is evaluated and processing branches to the corresponding firmware T
158. at the specified day and time monthly Executes the custom image once a month at the specified day and time iIRMC S4 353 Lifecycle Management yearly Executes the custom image once a year at the specified date and time once only Executes the custom image at the specified date and time never Never executes the custom image Activate Starts the download and or the execution of the selected custom image according to the settings configured under Download Custom Image and Execute Custom Image Download Custom Image Execute Custom Image Resulting behavior immediate never Download of the custom image is started immediately Custom image is not executed automatically scheduled never Scheduled download of the custom image is enabled immediately Custom image is not executed automatically immediate after download Download of the custom image is started immediately Subsequently execution of the custom image is automatically started No user interaction scheduled after download Scheduled download of the custom image in combination with subsequent automatically started execution No user interaction never immediate Execution of the custom image is started immediately This requires that a custom image is already available on the iIRMC SD card and offered for selection never scheduled Execution of the custom image is started
159. ation All the installation files are copied to the managed server The Installation Manager opens a confirmation dialog page when the copy operation is complete and prompts you to remove all the storage media from the removable media drives before the managed server is rebooted Before rebooting the system you must in particular shut down all current virtual media connections To shut down all current virtual media connections proceed as follows gt Start Virtual Media see page 113 The Virtual Media dialog box is displayed with the currently connected virtual storage devices gt Safely remove the storage device i e ensure that no more applications programs are accessing the storage media gt Click all Disconnect buttons to remove all the virtual storage connections On the confirmation dialog page click Ok to reboot the managed server Once the managed server has rebooted you can monitor the entire installation by means of the AVR 422 iRMC S4 Installing the operating system 11 4 2 Installing Linux on the managed server after configuration il The mouse can be used but not synchronized during Linux installation Whenever you change a virtual storage medium you must remove the virtual media connection for the currently connected medium and then connect the new medium as a virtual storage medium After configuration has been completed the Installation Manager displays the following dial
160. ation BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView Win SCU XML format Restoration Fite CZ Keine Dstei auspewshit Eo wa Figure 85 Backup Restoration of BIOS Single Parameter Settings page 164 iRMC S4 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS 7 6 1 1 Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format The Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format group allows you to back up single BIOS parameter settings in ServerView WinSCU XML format and to save the backup to a file Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format Backup Status Operation successful Backup Filename Edit Filename Request BIOS Parameter Backup Save Backup to File Clear Status Figure 86 Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format Backup Status Only displayed if a backup is currently in process or has been completed Displays the status of the current backup process Successful completion is indicated by Operation Successful You can clear the status display by clicking the Clear Status button which is only available if a status is currently displayed Backup Filename This input field is disabled grayed out by default Initially it displays the file name that is dynamically generated by the iRMC Edit Filename Enables the Backup Filename field thus allowing you to enter a file na
161. ator up to OEM highest permission level The permission groups correspond to the IPMI privilege level Certain permissions e g for Power Management are associated with these groups or privilege levels Adding the iRMC to the ServerView Operations Manager server list requires LAN channel privilege Administrator or OEM see the manual ServerView Operations Manager 62 iIRMC S4 User permissions Permissions to use special iRMC S4 functions In addition to the channel specific permissions you can also individually assign users the following permissions Configure User Accounts Permission to configure local user identifications Configure iRMC Settings Permission to configure the iRMC settings Video Redirection Enabled Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection AVR in View Only and Full Control mode Remote Storage Enabled Permission to use the Virtual Media functionality Preconfigured user ID The firmware of the iIRMC provides a default administrator ID for the IRMC which possesses all permissions Administrator ID admin Password admin Both the administrator ID and the password are case sensitive in the case of local users It is urgently recommended that you create a new administrator account as soon as possible once you have logged in and then delete the default administrator account or at least change the password for the account see section User Management on page 280
162. ave confirmed that you wish to do so Certificate Creation Proceed as follows to create a self signed certificate gt Enter the requisite details under Certificate Creation gt Click Create to create the certificate When generating the new certificate all the existing HTTPS connections are closed and the HTTPS server is automatically restarted This can take up to five minutes depending on the key length No explicit reset of the iRMC is required iRMC S4 191 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates 7 7 6 iRMC S4 Firmware Update The iRMC S4 Firmware Update page allows you to update the iRMC firmware online To do this you must provide the current firmware image either locally on a remote workstation or on a TFTP server Here you can also see information on the iRMC firmware and set the firmware selector S ServerView Y TX140 52 ServerView iRMC S4Web Server ohlas E System Information A AA System Overview System Components Firmware Image Booter Version Firmware Version Firmware Date Description Status Network Inventory B Bios Low Firmware Image 1 18 0 37 7 00 F Jul 28 2013 08 08 37 CEST EVALUATION COPY NOT FOR SALE Running E iRMC 4 High Firmware Image 1 18 0 34 0 36 F 26232 May 5 2013 22 45 00 CEST EVALUATION COPY NOT FOR SALE Inactive IRMC S4 Information iRMC 4 Time Firmware Selector Auto Firmware Image with highest Fi Save Configuration Certificate Upload Apply Generat
163. band and out of band management The term in band management is used when the operating system is running on the managed server The term out of band management is used when the operating system is not running on the managed server for instance if the hardware is faulty As different interfaces are available in an environment with IPMI compatible systems you can manage IPMI compatible systems either in band or out of band IPMl over LAN PMl over LAN is the current name for the specification of the LAN interface in the IPMI standard This specification stipulates how IPMI messages can be sent to or from the BMC of a managed system encapsulated in RMCP Remote Management Control Protocol data packets These RMCP data packets are transferred via an Ethernet LAN connection using the UDP User Datagram Protocol under IPv4 Internet Protocol Version 4 The RMCP protocol has been specified to support the management of system statuses in which the operating system is not running The RMCP is a simple inquiry response protocol The interface for such a connection is provided on an onboard LAN controller assigned to the BMC The interface can only be provided by an on board LAN controller not by an inserted LAN card 30 iIRMC S4 IPMI technical background Of the two ports that RCMP uses under UDP the BMC communicates with the LAN controller via port 623 primary RMCP Port
164. bonding enabled 1 Once bonding is activated the currently used LAN port here Management LAN becomes the active port which is now displayed in the Active Port field The second LAN port here onboard shared LAN becomes the backup port 2 If the currently active port here Management LAN fails link down the second port here onboard shared LAN becomes active 254 iIRMC S4 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters i Restrictions Blade servers do not support network bonding mode for the iIRMC They use an automatic failover mechanism between two shared LAN ports to ensure redundant network feature IPv4 Enabled IPv4 addressing is always enabled for the iRMC and cannot be disabled IPv6 Enabled Enables disables IPv6 addressing for the iRMC If IPv6 addressing is enabled the Pv6 configuration group will be displayed see below You cannot disable IPv6 addressing if the iRMC is currently accessed via IPv6 IPv4 configuration The IP v4 configuration group allows you to configure the IPv4 settings for the iRMC IP Address IPv4 address of the iRMC in the LAN This address is different from the IP address of the managed server If you are working with a static address DHCP Enable option not i activated then you can enter this here Otherwise if the DHCP Enable option is activated the iRMC only uses the field to display the address Subnet Mask Subnet mask of the iRMC in the LAN
165. cess Reset LDAP Status Figure 191 Microsoft Active Directory Status of the connection to the LDAP server gt Click Reset LDAP Status to reset the status display iIRMC S4 305 User Management gt Click Apply to activate your settings gt Configure the settings for global email alerting in the Directory Service Email Alert Configuration group Directory Service Email Alert Configuration LDAP Email Alert Enable LDAP Alert Table Refresh 2 Hours Apply Figure 192 Directory Service Email Alert Configuration LDAP Email Alert Enable Enables global email alerting LDAP Alert Table Refresh Hours Defines the interval at which the email table is regularly updated see the User Management in ServerView manual It is strongly recommended that you specify a value gt 0 A value of O means that the table is not updated regularly gt Click Apply to activate your settings 306 iRMC S4 User Management 7 15 2 3 Configuring iRMC for Novell eDirectory OpenLDAP OpenDS Open DJ After you have confirmed you choice of Novell or OpenLDAP by clicking Apply the following variant of the Directory Service Configuration page is shown The Directory Service Configuration page has an identical structure for Novell eDirectory OpenLDAP and OpenDS OpenDu ServerView User Management IRMC St User LDAP Configuration CAS Configuration Console Redirection Viceo Restrection
166. cific css E Power Management Name Manufacturer htormation or Model Number Number Information Information Component Power On Off PSU1 DELTA Board DPS 800NBA DCOD1222032069 A3C40121107 SBF Yes Power Options Power Supply Info E Power Consumption Output Standby Nominal Minimum Maximum Ripple Minimum Maximum k Number Power Voltage Voltage Voltage and noise Current Current E Sensors E Event Log 4 No 412 00 V 41 76 12 24V 120 mv 4 00 A 65 00 A Sorar Management 2 Yes 120v 184 1238 V 120 mv 0 00 A 200A E Network Settings E Alerting e Total Peak Peak Inrush Inrush Input Input Input AIC Dropout eases Menagemant Capacity Capacity Holdup Current Interval Range 1 Range 2 Frequency Tolerance E Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS 800 w 800 w O sec 30A 10 ms 100 240 V 90 264V 47 63 Hz 10 ms E Virtual Media Logout Power Supply PSU2 IDPROM Information Refresh FRU ay ra FRU Product Name Serial Part Version Vendor specific css Name Information or Model Number Number Information Information Component PSU2 DELTA Board DPS S00NBA DCOD1222032134 A3C40121107 SBF Yes Output Standby Nominal Minimum Maximum Ripple Minimum Maxi mum Number Power Voltage Voltage Voltage and noise Current Current 4 No 12 00 V W176 12 24V 120 mv 1 00 A 65 00 A 2 Yes 12 00 V 11 64 12 36 V 120 mv 0 00 A 200A Total Peak Peak Inrush Inrush Input Input Input AIC Dropout Capacity Capacity Holdup Current Interval Range 1 Range 2 Frequency Tolerance 800 w 800 w Osec 30A 10
167. cond icon from the right in the AVR Tool bar see section AVR Tool bar on page 106 Enables disables the Local Monitor Off Control function of the iRMC Enabled Enables the Local Monitor Off Control function In full access mode of an AVR session you can switch the local monitor of the server on and off from the remote workstation Disabled Disables the Local Monitor Off Control function i e the local monitor is always switched on and cannot be switched off Automatic Off when AVR is started This option only takes effect if the Local Monitor Off Control function is enabled If you enable the Automatic Off when AVR is started option the local monitor is automatically switched off for the duration of the session when an AVR session is started After the AVR session is closed the local monitor is automatically switched on again if no concurrent session with enabled Local Monitor Off control is active il Parallel AVR sessions Even if you switch on the local monitor during your AVR session the local monitor is automatically switched off again if a new concurrent AVR session is started The local monitor is switched on again automatically when all AVR sessions have been closed AVR Title Title of your choice which will be displayed in the AVR title bar i The following predefined variables can be used in the AVR title USER Z ZBMC NAME BMC_IP CHASSIS_TYPEZ SYSTEM_TYPE SYSTEM_SERIAL SYSTEM_NAMEZ
168. ctivates deactivates the numeric keys on the right of your keyboard corresponds to the Num key on your keyboard Caps Caps Lock key corresponds to the Caps Lock key on your keyboard Scroll Scroll key corresponds to the Scroll key on your keyboard SoftKeyboard virtual keyboard The SoftKeyboard also known as virtual keyboard see figure 31 provides you with a functional representation of the keyboard All key combinations are available when you use the SoftKeyboard This means that you can use the SoftKeyboard as a fully functional replacement for a real keyboard You activate the SoftkKeyboard in the AVR window from the Keyboard menu see page 91 88 iIRMC S4 Using AVR SoftKeyboard English United States esc F1 r F3 F4 F5 F6 r F8 F9 F10 ras ra2 psc sik brk Eek e maie e e en ee nr ttt shift jz ix cjvjbjnjm shift a ctrl win ar i win ctr lt v Figure 31 SoftKeyboard keyboard layout English US Secure Keyboard If you are connected to the iRMC web interface over an HTTP connection your keystrokes and mouse clicks can be configured to be encrypted in real time before transferred to the managed server see section AVR window Options menu on page 100 5 2 6 Redirecting the mouse The mouse pointer on the managed server is moved synchronously with the mous
169. d by the CAS service the user is granted access to the iRMC web interface as well as to any other service within the SSO domain without being prompted for login credentials again S ServerView nin PRIMERGY TX140 S2 Server View Remote Management iRMC S4 Web Server E Deutsch Bas Centralized Authentication Service CAS Configuration E System Information CAS Generic Configuration System Overview System Components CAS Enabled is Enable SSL HTTPS E iRMC 4 Verify SSL Certificate E Power Management Always Display Login Page t Power Consumption D Sensors CAS Network Port 3470 E Event Log CAS Server Server Management CAS Login URL eas login E Network Settings ad CAS Logout URL cas logout Alerting E User Management IRMC 4 User LDAP Configuration CAS Configuration ar Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Note When Always Display Login Page is disabled and the CAS server is unreachable please manually enter login after the Ip address of your IRMC S4in your browser CAS Validate URL casivalidate Assign permissions from Local assigned permissions v Virtual Media CAS User Privilege and Permissions Logout Privilege Level User Refresh Configure User Accounts Configure iRMC 4 Settings Video Redirection Enabled Remote Storage Enabled Apply Central Authentication Se
170. d passwords with iRMC_PWD exe on page 464 Encrypted 1 must be set in the lt DATA gt tag to indicate that the data to be written is encrypted Examples Transferring the string Hello World lt DATA Type xsd string gt Hello World lt DATA gt Transferring a password as clear readable text lt DATA Type xsd string gt My Readable Password lt DATA gt Transferring an encrypted password lt DATA Type xsd string Encrypted 1 gt TpV1TJwCyHEIsC8tk24ci 83JUR91 lt DATA gt 456 iIRMC S4 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration Transferring the IPv4 address 192 23 2 4 lt DATA Type xsd string gt 192 23 2 4 lt DATA gt CAUTION The xsd string data type is restricted to readable strings IP addresses and MD5 based user passwords For all other data the xsd hexbinary data type must be used Do not directly specify the characters 4 6 U etc in strings unless they are actually needed by the using application Both SCCI and the ConfigSpace interface do not store any character encoding information Thus any non US ASCII characters will be interpreted internally by the using application and therefore should be avoided If you do actually need to specify special characters make sure that you edit and save your file in UTF 8 format including the correct BOM Command Status Status After the configuration settings are transferred the Status contains t
171. de for the managed server It depends on the servers capabilities which options are actually available PSU Redundancy I I Spare PSU System operation is guaranteed for 1 PSU fail in the case of 2 PSUs in total PSU Redundancy 2 1 Spare PSU System operation is guaranteed for 1 PSU fail in the case of 3 PSUs in total PSU Redundancy 3 1 Spare PSU System operation is guaranteed for 1 PSU fail in the case of 4 PSUs in total AC Redundancy 2 2 2 AC sources 2 of the 4 PSUs are each connected to a separate AC source This ensures that the system can continue operation even if a power line or a single PSU fails AC Redundancy I 1 2 AC sources Each PSU of 2 PSUs in total is connected to a separate AC source This ensures that the system can continue operation even if a power line or a single PSU fails 226 iRMC S4 Sensors Check status of the sensors 7 10 5 Component Status Check status of the server components The Component Status page provides information on the status of the server components The CSS Component column indicates for each of the components whether the CSS Customer Self Service functionality is supported When the server chassis is opened components with an LED can be easily identified by clicking the corresponding Jdentify button in the Components Status page S ServerView Sw1 RX300S8 E System Information E Power Management Power Consumption E Sensors Fans Temperature
172. dicate the possible statuses of the system components OK Component status is okay Component slot is empty Warning The status of the component has deteriorated Fault The component has a fault od dt DIES Table 6 Status of the system component iRMC S4 139 System Information Information on the server ServerView System Component Information System Overview System Components AIS Connect System Report Network Inventory E User Management E Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media System CPU Information Signal CPU CPU Cores L L2 13 Max cru css Mer aroa one Status Frequency Threads Cache Cache Cache TDP Name Component Qo CPU Processor detected OK 0306C3 3400 4 8 256KB 1024KB 8192 KB 80 Watt Intel R Xeon R CPU E3 1240 va 3 406Hz No System Memory Information Actual Maximum Contig Component Module Module Module Module CSS eta feae e e oa e E Sms eean m 1 omm2a Emptysiot Normal Yes E 2 ommi ok Nomai Ok 26B 1600 1600 DDRS SDRAM UDIMM_138V45V NoYes omm2B Emptystot Normal ves F 4 DMMB EmptySlot Normal Yes E Lifecycle Management Logout Refresh Figure 65 System Component Information page On PRIMERGY servers with support for TPM Trusted Platform Module this page indicates whether TPM is enabled or disabled System CPU Information This group provides inf
173. dvanced Video Redirection Screenshot Make Screenshot Video Redirection Start Video Redirection HTMLS Video Redirection Options HTMLS Viewer Enabled 7 Default Mouse Mode Absolute Mouse Mode w Local Monitor Off Control Enabled AVR Title SUSER BMC_NAME Current AVR Title sdmin iRMC02D898 Apply 7 J Note If you change HTMLS viewer settings all active video redirection sessions will be stopped Figure 209 Advanced Video Redirection page 324 iRMC S4 Console Redirection Redirecting the console Creating an ASR screenshot The ASR Screenshot page allows you to take a screenshot of the current VGA screen on the managed server video screenshot and store it in the firmware of the iRMC view the screenshot stored in the iRMC firmware delete the screenshot stored in the iRMC firmware Screenshot View Screenshot Preview Screenshot Make Screenshot Delete Screenshot Figure 210 Creating an video screenshot A video screenshot is automatically created in case of a SEL entry for OS critical stop A maximum of one video screenshot is stored in the firmware of the iRMC namely the most recently created screenshot The following actions are available by clicking on one of the buttons displayed View Screenshot This only appears if a video screenshot has been stored The scree
174. e iRMC S4 Update i Power Management Power Consumption Sensors Default Internal Eventiog display filtering oisptsy criticat 7 Woisptay major 7 A Display minor 7 D Disptay info ia m IPMI SEL content Ring Buffer Linear Buffer Internal Event Log SEL Configuration Apply Syslog Configuration ia Selves Mandgetacnt Helpdesk Information E Network Settings E Alerting Helpdesk apoe User Management E Console Redirection Apply Video Redirection JWS E Virtual Medie Add Service Notice Lifecycle Management Refresh Submit Note The Service Notice which will be stored in the Internal Event Log of the iRNC S4 Figure 142 Event Log Configuration page 238 iIRMC S4 System Event Log and Internal Event Log Default System Event Log display filtering In this group you can configure which entries are displayed by default Display Critical Display Major Display Minor Display Info CSS only Here you select one or more severity levels for which event log entries should be displayed by default on the on the System Event Log Content page see page 232 Show Resolutions If you choose this option the cause of the entry and a proposal for resolution will be displayed for each SEL entry of severity level Critical Major or Minor Ring Buffer The event log is organized as a ring buffer Linear Buffer The event log is o
175. e using the ServerView Update Manager using ServerView Update Manager Express or ASP Update using the operating system flash tools If a new version of the bootloader is available both firmware images will be automatically flashed within the same update process Downgrading the firmware to the previous version Besides the possibility of performing a firmware update you can also downgrade the firmware to the previous version The simplest way to downgrade the firmware is to store the previous version firmware image as the inactive firmware image in the EEPROM of the iRMC S4 In this case you only have to set the firmware selector to this previous version image see page 193 and subsequently restart the IRMC S4 to activate the firmware You can also downgrade the firmware by applying the methods described il in the following sections In these cases you perform a firmware update based on the firmware of the previous version Special requirements to perform the downgrade are pointed out separately in the following sections 10 3 1 Update via the iRMC web interface The iRMC S4 Firmware Update page allows you to update the firmware of the iRMC by providing the firmware image either locally on the remote workstation on a network share or on a TFTP server see section iIRMC S4 Firmware Update on page 192 iRMC S4 401 Updating firmware images 10 3 2 Update using the ServerView Update Manager Using the Se
176. e You may upload the contents of a base64 PEM encoded X 509 certificate and the matching DSA RSA private key into the iRMC 4 E System Information System Overview System Components Network Inventory View Certificate View CA Certificate Default Certificate Default CA Certificate Bios E iRMC s4 IRMC S4 Information IRMC S4 Time Save Configuration Certificate Upload Generate Certificate IRMC S4 Update E Power Management Note You may upload the contents of the base64 PEM encoded X 509 CA certificate from local file After you have uploaded the files all current https connections will be closed and the https server will be automatically restarted This can take up to 30seconds and no iRMC S4 reset is required CA Certificate file I Browse Upload E Power Consumption E Sensors E Event Log Server Management E Network Settings E Alerting User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection IWS Virtual Media Note You may upload the contents of the base64 PEM encoded X 509 certificate and the base64 PEM encoded DSA RSA private key from local files Important Both files need to be uploaded at the same time After you have uploaded the files all current https connections will be closed and the https server will be automatically restarted This can take up to 30seconds and no iRMC S4 reset is required SSL Private Key f
177. e monitoring event logging and recovery control Headless system operation The managed server does not require a mouse monitor or keyboard to be connected The benefits of this include lower costs far simpler cabling in the rack and increased security Identification LED To facilitate identification of the system for instance if it is installed in a fully populated rack you can activate the identification LED from the iRMC web interface Global error LED A global error LED informs you of the status of the managed system at all times and at the same time shows the CSS Customer Self Service status Power LED The power LED informs you whether the server is currently switched on or off iIRMC S4 17 Functions of the iRMC S4 e S5LED The S5 LED informs you on the power status of the server e CIM support The iRMC supports CIM XML WS Man and SMASH CLP System Management Architecture for Server Hardware Command Line Protocol e LAN On some systems the LAN interface of the fitted system NIC Network Interface Card on the server is reserved for the management LAN On other systems you have the option of configuring this LAN interface to reserve it for the management LAN set it up for shared operation with the system or make it completely available to the system The ports marked with a wrench symbol are assigned to the iRMC see figure 7 on page 44 e Network Bonding Network bondin
178. e ByteArray BinaryStream SaveloFile FileName adSaveCreateOverWrite Script Echo Antwort amp BinaryStream Read End Function Set xmlHttp CreateObject Msxml2 XMLHTTP xmlHttp Open GET http amp IP_ADRESSE amp ADDONS False USER_NAME PASSWORD xmlHttp Send If InStr xmlHttp GetResponseHeader Content Type xml gt 0 Then SaveBinaryData FILE_NAME xmlHttp ResponseBody Else Wscript Echo ADDONS amp not found on amp IP_ADRESSE End If 468 iRMC S4 iRMC system report 12 3 2 Information Sections 12 3 2 1 List of supported System Report sections in the XML Section SubSection Remarks Limitations System BIOS Only BIOS version string from ConfigSpace Processor Memory Fans Temperatures PowerSupplies Voltages IDPROMS SensorDataRecords PCIDevices Only PCI Vendor and Device Id of cards in slots no on board device information SystemEventLog InternalEventLog BootStatus ManagementControllers Only iRMC S4 Table 26 List of supported System Report sections in the XML 12 3 2 2 Summary section The generated XML contains as first section a summary section with some information about the date and time of the record creation the current IRMC s IP addresses as well as summary about the number Critical Major and Warning Minor entries in the SystemEventLog section and it has an inventory list of available sections
179. e Certificate IRMC 4 Update iRMC S4 Firmware Update from File Power Management Power Consumption Flash Selector Aute inactive Firmware 13 E Sensors Update File Browse iRMC_7 O0F exe Event Log Sener Management Apply Network Settings E Alerting IRMC S4 TFTP Settings E User Management Console Redirection TFTP Server Video Redirection IWS Update File rom ima_ene Eae Flash Selector Auto inactive Firmware x Logout YER Apply TFTP Test TFTP Start Refresh Figure 109 iRMC S4 Firmware Update page 192 iIRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Firmware Image Information Under Firmware Image Information you can view information on the firmware version and the SDRR version of the iRMC and set the firmware selector Firmware Image Information Firmware Image Booter Version Firmware Version Firmware Date Description Status Low Firmware Image 41 16 0 37 7 00 F Jul 29 2013 08 05 37 CEST Running High Firmware Image 1 16 0 34 0 36 F 26232 May 5 2013 22 46 00 CEST Inactive Firmware Selector Auto Firmware Image with highest Fi Apply Figure 110 iRMC S4 Firmware Update Firmware Information Firmware Selector You use the firmware selector to specify which firmware image is to be activated the next time the iRMC is rebooted You have the following options Auto FW Image with highest FW version The fir
180. e Information Number Number Component or Model Other Info PRIMERGY 526361 Chassis FSC Product RX100 S5 YKZPOQQXX K1160 VXXX 0225 No i PRIMERGY 526361 MainBoard FSC Product RX100 5 YK2Foo00 K4180 hoo 0225 No g 526361 wGS01 MainBoard FSC Board D2542 5554Y010016746001C4J0A1 D2542 B10 6s04 No PSU DELTA Board ere AFDCO731000255 56 04350 111 2 No Figure 63 System Overview page System FRU IDPROM Information Current Overall Power Consumption il This option is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers Current Overall Power Consumption Current Minimum Peak Average Current Maxi mum Power Power Power Power Power teowak reo wat sowat 17 wot joe wen Figure 64 System Overview page Current Overall Power Consumption Under Current Overall Power Consumption you can see all the measurements current minimum maximum and average power consumption for the server in the current interval A graphical display also shows the current power consumption of the server compared with the maximum possible power consumption 138 iRMC S4 System Information Information on the server 7 4 2 System Component Information Information on the server components The System Component Information page provides information on the CPU and the main memory modules The CSS Component column indicates for each of the components whether the CSS Customer Self Service functionality is supported The following status icons in
181. e Version 1 6 or higher In your network You must have a DHCP server in your network If you want to log in with a symbolic name rather than an IP address at the iRMC web interface the DHCP server in your network must be configured for dynamic DNS DNS must be configured Otherwise you must ask for the IP address iIRMC S4 39 iRMC S4 factory defaults 2 2 iRMC S4 factory defaults The firmware of the iRMC provides a default administrator ID and a default DHCP name for the iRMC Default administrator ID Administrator ID admin Password admin i Both the administrator ID and the password are case sensitive For reasons of security it is recommended that you create a new administrator account once you have logged in and then delete the default administrator account or at least change the password for the account see section User Management on page 280 Default DHCP name of the iRMC S4 The default DHCP name of the iRMC uses the following pattern IRMC lt SerialNumber gt The serial number corresponds to the last 3 bytes of the MAC address of the iRMC You can take the MAC address of the iRMC from the label on your PRIMERGY server After you have logged in the MAC address of the iRMC can be found as a read only entry above the fields on the page Network Interface see page 251 40 iIRMC S4 Logging into the iRMC S4 web interface 2 3 Logging into the iRMC S4 web interface gt O
182. e iRMC DNS Settings M DNS Enabled M Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP DNS Domain an575 qala Fiansvs caab SSS ONS Search Path ONS Server 1 172 17 128 3 ONS Server 2 721714285 OOOO O O DNS Server 3 DNS Retries 2 DNS Timeout 5 Seconds Apply Figure 162 DNS Configuration page DNS Settings DNS Enabled Enables disables DNS for the iRMC Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP If you activate this option the IP addresses of the DNS servers are obtained automatically from the DHCP server In this event up to three DNS servers are supported If you do not enable this setting you can enter up to three DNS server addresses manually under DNS Server 1 DNS Server 3 DNS Domain If the option Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP is disabled specify the name of the default domain for requests to the DNS server s DNS Search Path List of partially qualified domain names separated by one or more space characters The DNS search list can have a maximum length of 256 characters The DNS Search Path field is used to specify the domains to be searched when looking up a host name that does not have a domain name component DNS Server 1 3 If the Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP option is disabled you can enter the names of up to five DNS servers here iIRMC S4 265 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters DNS Retries Number of DNS retries DNS Timeout Timeout in seconds for a D
183. e iRMC supports the following common text modes 40x25 80x25 80x43 80x50 Refer to the Help system for your operating system for information on the display settings Keyboard settings If the keyboard language settings on the remote workstation are different from those on the managed server AVR keyboard language settings have to be same as on the managed server i Mapping is possible between the following languages Auto Detect default value English United States English United Kingdom French French Belgium German Germany German Switzerland Japanese Spanish Italian Danish Finnish Norwegian Norway Portuguese Portugal Swedish Dutch Netherland Dutch Belgium Turkish F Turkish Q Not all keys can be mapped If one key doesn t work please use the Softkeyboard see page 88 iIRMC S4 81 Using AVR 5 2 Using AVR via a Java Applet You have the following options to start AVR gt Click the Start Video Redirection Java Web Start button on the Advanced Video Redirection AVR page of the iRMC web interface see page 324 or if displayed gt Click the Video Redirection JWS link in the tree structure of the IRMC web interface The Advanced Video Redirection window AVR window opens showing you the display on the managed server 5 2 1 AVR window Menu bar AVR view Spec
184. e log file Offline Update Logs i There is no any log file to save ee Figure 228 Online Update page Online Update Logs Save Opens a confirmation dialog which offers to store the log file The Save button is disabled if no log file is available iIRMC S4 351 Lifecycle Management 7 18 4 Custom Image Handling custom images The Custom Image page allows you to specify a URL from which you can download ISO images onto the iRMC SD card The download itself can be initiated manually or scheduled by a timer The downloaded images are subsequently displayed for selection ServerView User admin Logout FOTS SW1 RX10058 Custom Image E system ritomation ARA System Overview System Components Custom Image URL AIS Connect Ben System Report jsi Network Inventory Use Proxy Z Driver Monitor _ E Download Custom Image immediste iRMC s4 Pr ee FE a NEPE Execute Custom Image never gt os a J T Sn ee Server Management gi g E Network Settings tis Custom Image Logs 2 user Management F B Console Redirection There is no log file to save BIOS Text Console Video Redirection Sam Video Redirection HTMLS epa Note Activating Execute Custom Image will cause a system reboot B Lifecycie Management Updste Settings Online Update Offline Update Custom Image PrimeCollect Refresh
185. e on the remote workstation You configure the mouse redirection settings in the AVR window under Mouse Mode in the Mouse menu see page 99 The settings for the mouse pointer synchronization are supported only for the operating system which runs the managed server If the software which controls the mouse is active sometimes the mouse pointer cannot be synchronized iIRMC S4 89 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window 5 2 7 Menus and toolbar of the AVR window The menu bar of the AVR window contains the following menus The Video menu allows you to configure the AVR settings and to control the AVR see page 91 The Keyboard menu allows you to enable a SoftKeyBoard and select the Keyboard language Beyond that the Keyboard menu allows you to handle special keys when redirecting the keyboards see page 94 The Mouse menu allows you to configure your mouse settings see page 99 The Options menu allows you to enable disable keyboard encryption resize window size to fit your needs and set the language German English Japanese in which the menus and dialog boxes of the AVR window are to be shown see page 100 Additionally the Options menu allows you to request full permission Full access mode if your AVR session is the one of two currently active AVR sessions which runs in Restricted access mode The Media menu allows you to use the Virtual Media function see page 102 The Power Control menu allows you to power t
186. e private DSA RSA key from local files Proceed as follows gt Save the X 509 DSA RSA certificate and the private DSA RSA key in corresponding local files on the managed server gt Specify the files Private Key File and Certificate File by clicking on the associated Browse button and navigating to the file which contains the private key or the certificate gt Click Upload to load the certificate and the private key onto the iRMC When you upload the certificate and private key all the existing HTTPS connections are closed and the HTTPS server is automatically restarted This process can take up to 30 seconds No explicit reset of the iRMC is required gt Click View Certificate to make sure that the certificate has been loaded successfully 188 iRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Entering the DSA RSA certificate private DSARSA key directly You do this using the group SSL DSA RSA certificate or DSA RSA private upload via copy amp paste Do not use this method to load a root certificate onto the IRMC Always load a root certificate using a file see page 188 SSL DSARSA certificate or DSA RSA private key upload via copy amp paste Note Alternatively you may paste the contents of the base64 PEM encoded X 509 SSL certificate or the base64 PEM encoded DSARSA private key into the textbox below for upload to the IRMC S2 Important Both files needs to be uploaded one after the other Imp
187. ect Restart Service 4 Virtual Media Remote Image Mount Media Options Remote Floppy Image Options Logout Share Type CIFS SMB Common Internet File System v Server Share Name Image Name UserName Password aaaaaaaaaanaaaaaanaa D Note Please make sure that the selected image is not in use by another process on the host Refresh Confirm Password Domain Apply Connect Restart Service Ci Note Please make sure that the selected image is not in use by another process on the host Remote Hard Disk Image Options Share Type CIFS SMB Common Internet File System Server Share Name Image Name UserName Confirm Password Domain Apply Connect Restart Service Note Please make sure that the selected image is not in use by another process on the host X Figure 218 Remote Image Mount page iRMC S4 335 Virtual Media Remote CD DVD Image Options Remote Floppy Image Options Remote Hard Disk Image Options These groups each allow you to configure the options for mounting the remote images of the corresponding type and to establish clear the connect to the remote image Additionally you can restart the Remote Image Mount service e g in case of a failure Share Type Share type of the network share where the ISO images are located The following modes are offered for selection CIF S SMB Common Interface File
188. ect Connected to Host CD DVD Device 0 O CD DVD Media Connect CD DVD CD Imag Browse hitsclient D __ VirtMedialmagefile iso Hard disk USB Key Media I HDUSB Image Connect Hard disk USB Key PhysicalDrive0 C Fixed Drive fa il gt 4 Figure 52 Virtual Media dialog box The provided storage medium is displayed gt Click the corresponding Connect button to connect the provided storage medium as Virtual Media The selected storage medium is made available as a virtual medium and displayed in the corresponding panel of the Virtual Media dialog box iRMC S4 117 Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation Display in the Storage Devices dialog Windows Virtual Media x a CD DVD Media II Connected to Host CD DVD Device 1 Op Hard disk USB Key Media HDUSB Image Connect Hard disk USB Key PhysicalDrive0 C Fixed Drive Ki i l m Hard disk USB Key Media II HDIUSB Image Connect Hard disk USB Key PhysicalDrive0 C Fixed Drive 4 Hl gt Status Target Drive Connected To Read Bytes Virtual Floppy 2 Not Connected na Fmd Virtual CD DVD 1 D 34 KB Virtual CD DVD 2 tsclienttD ___VirtMediailmage 0 KB cl Virtual HardDisk 4 Not Connected nia E ose Figure 53 Virtual Med
189. ection JWS Remote Storage Text Console SOL IRMC 2 SSH Access Local Monitor iRMC 2 Telnet Access Local Monitor is currently On Refresh Enable Local Monitor Off Automatic Local Monitor Off when AVR is started Apply Figure 214 AVR window with two active AVR sessions iRMC S4 329 Console Redirection Redirecting the console Disconnect If you click Disconnect a confirmation dialog box appears in which you can close the AVR session to the left of the button You can only close AVR sessions of other users with the Disconnect button To close your own session choose Exit from the Extras menu in the AVR window see page 91 The following window appears if the managed server is powered down a JViewer admin ms123irmc 0 fps eR Video Keyboard Mouse Options Media Power Active Users Help o 2 000 08 00 w 150 Bo LALT LCTRL RALT RCTRL Num Caps Scroll Figure 215 AVR window when the server is powered down Video Redirection Starting AVR using HTML5 You start AVR in the Video Redirection group Video Redirection Start Video Redirection HTML5 Figure 216 Advanced Video Redirection page Starting Video Redirection 330 iIRMC S4 Console Redirection Redirecting the console gt Click Start Video Redirection HTML5 to start an AVR session The default browser starts with the Advanced Video Redirection see section
190. ection Video Redirection WS Virtual Media Logout Refresh ServerView Remote M ement iRMC S4 Web Server Current SSH SSL Certificate Version 3 Serial Number 68 Signature Algorithm sha1wWithRSAEncryption Public Key 1024 bit RSA Issued From Common Name CN Organization 0 City or Locality L Country C State or Province ST Email Address email Address Val Valid From Apr 22 14 56 41 2009 GMT Valid To Apr21 14 56 41 2014 GMT Issued To Common Name CN iRMC Organization O Fujitsu Technology Solutions Country C DE State or Province ST Bavaria Email Address email Address serverview ts fujitsu com View Certificate View CA Certificate Default Certificate Default CA Certificate CA Certificate upload from file Note You may upload the contents of the base64 PEM encoded X 509 CA certificate from local file After you have uploaded the files all current https connections will be closed and the https server will be automatically restarted This can take up to 30seconds and no IRMC S4 reset is required CA Certificate file Browse Upload SSL Certificate and DSA RSA private key upload from file ServerView Root CA Fujitsu Technology Solutions GmbH Munich DE Bavaria Seren iew ts tujitsu com Note You may upload the contents of the base64 PEM encoded X 509 certificate and the base64 PEM encoded DSA RSA private key from local files Important Both
191. ed You have the following options Auto inactive firmware The inactive firmware is automatically selected Low Firmware Image The low firmware image firmware image 1 is selected High Firmware Image The high firmware image firmware image 2 is selected Apply Activates your settings TFTP Test Tests the connection to the TFTP server TFTP Start Downloads the file containing the firmware image from the TFTP server and starts updating the iRMC firmware 196 iRMC S4 Power Management 7 8 Power Management The Power Management entry contains the links to the power management pages for your PRIMERGY server Power On Off power the server up down on page 198 Power Options Configuring power management for the server on page 203 Power Supply Info Power supply and IDPROM data for the FRU components on page 206 iIRMC S4 197 Power Management 7 8 1 Power On Off power the server up down The Power On Off page allows you to power the managed server on and off You are informed of the server s current power status and are also able to configure the behavior of the server during the next boot operation ServerView User admin Logout FUJITSU Y TX140 S2 FUJITSU ServerVi iRMC S4 Web r H iRMCFDAF9B Power On Off i System Information Power Status Summary 5 BIOs BIOS Updste Power Status Fower Off ro an Power On Counter 4 Days 7 Hours 50 Minutes p Last
192. ed battery S ServerView E System Information System Overview System Components Network Inventory E RAID Information Controller Physical Disks Logical Drives BIOS iRMc S4 E Power Management Power Consumption E Sensors Event Log Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtus Media Logout Refresh Normal TEU 9 505V Status Type Voltage Temperature 28 C Firmware package OK RAID CHI SAS 6G 1GB 03116C 23 9 0 0029 Physical Logical Temperature daks Wives 74 C 2 RAID controller FTS RAID Ctrl SAS 6G 1GB D3116C 0 Status Product package OK RAID Cti sas ec 1GB 03116 23 9 0 0028 73 C disks 14 drives 3 RAID controller FTS RAID Ctrl SAS 6G 1GB D3116C 1 Firmware Te t Physical Logical Nomai TRU 9 475V Status Type Voltage Temperature 20 C Figure 75 RAID Information Controllers page Battery on controller FTS RAID Ctrl SAS 6G 1GB D3116C 1 154 iIRMC S4 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems Details Clicking on Details opens a new page which provides detailed information on the RAID controller Battery S ServerView Video Redirection JWS Virtus Media Logout Refresh BBU status Norms Ports 8 Protocol SAS600 Physical disks 8 Logical drives 2 Vendor Fujitsu Technology Solutions Product RAID Ct
193. ed description see the manual ServerView embedded Lifecycle Management eLCM Online Update Configuring and starting the online update The Online Update group allows you to configure and start both the update check and the online update itself i Update settings cannot be changed while an update is being executed Online Update Update Check immediste V Start Update Process never v Activate Figure 223 Online Update page Online Update group Update Check Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start the update check immediately at a fixed date or periodically immediate Starts the update check immediately daily Starts the update check once a day at the specified time weekly Starts the update check once a week at the specified day and time monthly Starts the update check once a month at the specified day and time yearly Starts the update check once a year at the specified date and time once only Starts the update check at the specified date and time 342 iRMC S4 Lifecycle Management never Never starts the update check Once the update check process has successfully completed the Available Updates list is displayed in the Online Update group There you can select deselect the components which you want to be updated il Updates displayed with Severity essential cannot be deselected Online Update Update Check
194. edirection JWS BIOS Version V4 8 5 4 R2 8 0 for D3229 A1x E Virtual Media System GUID 03000200 0400 0500 0008 000700080009 Lifecyole Management E Console Redirection Operating System Information Logout System Name SW1 RX100S8 System Description Server System O S Windows Server 2012 Standard O S Version 6 2 Build 9200 System IP 172 17 167 83 System Location Unknown edit ete snmp snmpd conf Refresh System Contact Root lt root localhost gt configure eto snmp snm ServerView Agentless Service Version 7 00 03 17 System Up Time O Days 2 Hours 18 Minutes Apply i When ServerView agents are installed System Location and System Contact will be ovenmitten with the next O S start System FRUADPROM Information FRU Name Product Name Serial Part Version Vendor specific CSS or Model Number Number Information Information Component Chassis FUJITSU Product PRIMERGY RX100 8 YLNE000049 26361 K1420 V301 0350 No FRU Manufacturer formation MainBoard FUJITSU Board D3229 41928448 26361 D3229 A12 WGS03 6351 No PSUSTD Chicony Board POWERSUPPLY 300W 6147001011310V000114 26113 E614 V70 01 REVO1 No Current Overall Power Consumption Figure 58 System Overview page 134 iIRMC S4 System Information Information on the server System Status
195. ellCacheSize Unit KByte gt 256 lt Level1CacheSize gt lt Level2CacheSize Unit KByte gt 1024 lt Level 2CacheSi ze gt lt Level3CacheSize Unit KByte gt 8192 lt Level 3CacheSi ze gt lt CPU gt lt Processor gt 12 3 2 5 Memory The information generated is retrieved by decoding the memory SPD data as well as evaluating the memory status and configuration sensors and is compliant with the CDiagReport h implementation Sample Output see below lt Memory Schema 2 gt lt Modules Count 4 gt lt Module Name DIMM 2A CSS true gt lt Status Description empty gt 0 lt Status gt lt Module gt lt Module Name DIMM 1A CSS true gt lt Status Description 0k gt 1 lt Status gt lt Approved gt false lt Approved gt lt Size Unit GByte gt 2 lt Size gt lt Type gt DDR3 lt Type gt iIRMC S4 471 iRMC system r eport lt BusFrequency Unit MHz gt 1600 lt BusFrequency gt Checksum true gt lt SPD lt lt lt lt AsString 4C NAAAAAAKAADAAAA A lt SP lt ConfigStatus Description Normal gt 0 lt Confi lt Modul 12 3 2 6 Fans Size 256 Re Checksum gt lt Data gt 33879 lt vision 1 2 Data gt lt Calculated gt 33879 lt Calculated gt Checksum gt oduleManufact oduleManufact Date gt odulePartNumb ModulePartNum oduleRevision oduleSerialNu oduleType gt UDI Buf feredRegist DataWi th gt 72 lt D D gt e gt er g
196. ely necessary that all systems participating in the SSO domain reference the Central Management Station CMS via the same addressing representation An SSO Domain comprises all systems where authentication is performed using the same CAS service Thus for example if you have installed the ServerView Operations Manager by using the name my cms my domain you must specify exactly the same name for configuring the CAS service for an iRMC If instead you specify only my cms or another IP address of my cms SSO will not be enabled between the two systems CAS LoginURL Login URL of the CAS service CAS Logout URL Logout URL of the CAS service CAS Validate URL Validate URL of the CAS service Assign permissions from Defines the iRMC privilege and permissions for users who are logged in to the iRMC via SSO Local assigned permissions The privilege and permissions defined under CAS User Privileg and Permissions apply to the user 316 iRMC S4 User Management Permissions retrieved via LDAP The authorization profile defined in the LDAP directory service applies to the user The Permissions retrieved via LDAP option is only available if LDAP is enabled see option LDAP Enabled on page 295 CAS User Privilege and Permissions The CAS User Privilege and Permissions group allows you to define the iRMC privileges and permissions a user is granted if they are logged in at the iRMC via SSO The CAS User Privilege and
197. emote Management iRMC S4 Web Server M Deutsch Ha Ssw1 1x300s8 Default Certificate Restore E System Information System Overview System Components BIOS S iRMC s4 IRMC 4 Information IRMC 4 Time Save Configuration Certificate Upload Generate Certificate Do you really want to restore the default SSH SSL certificate provided with the firmware IRMC 4 Update E Power Management F Power Consumption Sensors E Event Log Servet Management E Network Settings Alerting E User Management E Console Redirection Video Redirection WS Virtual Media Logout Refresh Figure 104 Certificate Upload page Restoring the default CA certificate 186 iIRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Loading a CA certificate from a local file Use the CA Certificate upload from file group to load a CA certificate from a local file CA Certificate upload from file Note You may upload the contents of the base64 PEM encoded X 509 CA certificate from local file After you have uploaded the files all current https connections will be closed and the https server will be automatically restarted This can take up to 30seconds and no iRMC S2 reset is required CA Certificate file TOWSE Upload Figure 105 Loading a CA certificate from a local file Proceed as follows gt gt Save the CA certificate in a local file on the managed serve
198. eo Redirection AVR A valid KVM license key is required to use the Advanced Video Redirection function Java caching must not be disabled Otherwise AVR cannot be started Java caching is enabled by default Advanced Video Redirection AVR allows you to control the mouse and keyboard of the managed server from your remote workstation and to show the current graphical and text output from the managed server The AVR Java applet allows you to use the Virtual Media function see chapter Virtual Media Wizard on page 111 This chapter provides information on the following topics Checking the AVR settings Using AVR via a Java applet Using AVR via HTML5 iIRMC S4 79 Prerequisites 5 1 Check the following important settings before using AVR Requirements Check the AVR settings Graphics mode settings on the managed server AVR supports the following graphics modes Resolution Refresh rates Maximum in Hz color depth bits 640 x 480 VGA 60 75 85 32 800 x 600 SVGA 56 60 72 75 85 32 1024 x 768 XGA 60 70 75 85 32 1152 x 864 60 70 75 32 1280 x 1024 UXGA 60 70 75 85 16 1280 x 1024 UXGA 60 24 1600 x 1200 UXGA 60 65 16 1680 x 1050 60 16 1920 x 1080 60 16 1920 x 1200 60 16 Table 3 Supported display settings i Only VESA compliant graphics modes are supported 80 Prerequisites Supported text mode Th
199. er SEE login as admin A admin 111 11 11 11 s password KEK AKAKAATAAAKA TATE a TAHA a a a a a a a Welcome to PRIMERGY Remote Manager Firmware Revision 5 222 V3 1046P3 SDRR 3 09 ID 0263 RxX30056 Firmware built Oct 29 2010 08 55 42 o o o E E E E E E a EERRERRRRERERRRERERRRERRRREERERRERRERRERR System Type PRIMERGY RX300 56 System ID L6TOOO04S System Name RX300562 111 11 11 11 System OS Windows Server 2008 R2 Datacenter Edition x64 System Status Power Status On Main Menu 1 System Information 2 Power Management 3 Enclosure Information 4 Service Processor ic Change password ir Console Redirection EMS SAc is Start a Command Line shell il Console Logging Enter selection or 0 to quit i Figure 235 Remote Manager Main menu window with system information iIRMC S4 365 Logging in i iRMC S4 Remote Manager DER login as admin ladmin msi23irme s password TEKARKKAKKARKKATKKAKARTKAKATKKAKAKKAKKARKARAKARKRAKAE Welcome to PRIMERGY Remote Manager Firmware Revision 7 0F 1 00 SDRR 3 17 ID 0342 TxX14052 Firmware built Jul 29 2013 08 05 37 CEST TRAAAAAAAKAAAAAAA AAA AAA ATTA TATA TAREE RATT PRIMERGY TX140 32 FKIO113000032 unknown unknown System Status OK Identify LED is OFF Power Status Off asset Tag System Asset Tag Main Menu System Information Power Management Enclosure Information
200. erall Power Consumption Current Mini mum Peak Average Current Maxi mum Power Power Power Power Power 20 wat 240 wet 250 wat 247 wa cco we Figure 127 Power Consumption History Current Power Consumption Power History Options You specify the parameters for displaying the power consumption under Power History Options Power History Options Power Monitoring Units Watt Power History Period 1 year Enable Power Monitoring Apply Delete History Figure 128 Power Consumption History Power History Options Power Monitoring Units Electrical power units Watt BTU h British Thermal Unit hour 1 BTU h corresponds to 0 293 Watt 216 iRMC S4 Power Consumption Power History Period Period for which the power consumption is charted The following intervals can be selected 1 hour Default Measurements for the last hour 60 values Since one measurement is generated every minute this shows all the measurements of the last hour 12 hours Measurements for the last 12 hours One measurement is shown for each five minute period every 5th measurement 144 values in all I day Measurements for the last 24 hours One measurement is shown for each 10 minute period every 10th measurement 144 values in all 1 week The measurements for the last week One measurement per hour is shown every 60th measurement 168 values in all 2 weeks The measurements for the last month O
201. erating system Integration of the IPMI functionality into the management functionality offered by a management application and the operating system results in a powerful platform management environment An overview of the relationship between IPMI and the management software stack is shown by figure 2 STANDARD Remote I F e g RPC SNMP 3 Applicatons E Applications Remote Access PP STANDARD SAV I F fo e g DMI MI CIM SS STANDARD SAY I F a 20 SP Interface e g DMI CI WM aa a o mmwc 4 IPMI IF Code sra ene i M PMI IF IPMI HAW I F a Baseboard Management amp Controller Figure 2 IPMI in the management software stack source IPMI specification see section References on page 33 IPMI IPMB and ICMB The IPMI initiative resulted in three central standards IPMI Intelligent Platform Management Interface Specification describes the higher level architecture the current commands event formats data packets and properties that are used in IPMl based systems IPMB Intelligent Platform Management Bus is an I2C based write only bus which provides a standardized connection between various modules in a common housing IPMB can also be used as a standardized interface for remote management modules iIRMC S4 27 IPMI technical background ICMB Intelligent Chassis Management Bus Not currently implemented in the ServerView remote management e
202. erver than for the department Y server Base DN The Base DN is the fully distinguished name of the eDirectory or Open LDAP server and represents the tree or subtree that contains the OU Organizational Unit SVS or iRMCgroups This DN forms the starting point for LDAP searches Groups directory as sub tree from base DN Pathname of the OU which as a subtree of Base DN Group DN Context contains the OU SVS User Search Context Starting point for searching Users A User Search Context rule is evaluated when searching for iRMC users It returns a valid LDAP distinguished name DN which serves as the base context for searching users LDAP group scheme Scheme for an LDAP group LDAP member scheme Scheme for an LDAP user gt Click Apply to activate your settings iRMC S4 309 User Management gt Configure the iRMC local user groups data in the LDAP User Group Information group The LDAP User Group Information group is only displayed if the option Standard LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on iRMC has been enabled LDAP User Group Name LDAPusergroup2 User Shell Text Access SMASH CLP Figure 195 Microsoft Active Directory LDAP User Group Information For details see section Standard LDAP groups with authorization settings on the iRMC S4 on page 297 gt Click Apply to activate your settings gt Configure the LDAP access data in the Directory Service Access Configuration group
203. es to allow the BIOS to automatically detect this memory component RAM DIMM iIRMC S4 141 System Information Information on the server 7 4 3 AIS Connect Configuring and using AIS Connect The AZS Connect page allows you to configure the embedded AIS Connect functionality of the iRMC AIS Connect AutolmmuneSystems enables a PRIMERGY server to be remotely monitored and in some cases also be controlled by the Service System of Fujitsu Technology Solutions where a service technician will control the further workflow AIS Connect functionality includes Enabling the iRMC embedded AIS agent to send auto calls to the Technical Support of Fujitsu Technology Solutions Allowing the Technical Support of Fujitsu Technology Solutions to retrieve PrimeCollect archives from the iRMC Allowing the Technical Support of Fujitsu Technology Solutions to retrieve System Report data from the iRMC Allowing the Technical Support of Fujitsu Technology Solutions to connect to the iRMC web interface of the iRMC Sending PrimeCollect archives requires a valid eLCM license key see License Key on page 176 AIS Connect establishes a connection between the embedded AIS Connect client AIS agent running on the iRMC and the Service System of Fujitsu Technology Solutions This connection which allows a technician to connect from remote to the iRMC even if the iRMC is not accessible directly via LAN is used for transferr
204. ess and Release is applied Ctrl Alt Del Applies the key combination Ctrl Alt Del Context Menu Opens the appropriate context menu of the application or the operating system running on the managed server Hot Keys Allows you to define and apply your own hotkeys To apply an already defined hotkey proceed as follows 1 Click Hot Keys To define hotkeys you can also use the hotkey icon in the AVR Tool bar see section AVR Tool bar on page 106 2 Inthe list of the already defined hotkeys which is displayed below the Add Hot Key item click the desired hotkey To define a new hotkey proceed as follows 1 Click Hot Keys Add Hot Key The User Defined Macros dialog box opens which displays the already defined user defined macros here A B iIRMC S4 95 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window User Defined Macros Figure 35 AVR window Keyboard menu Add Hot Key User Defined Macros 1 2 Click Add to define a new user defined macro The Add Macro dialog box opens Add Macro Add User Defined Macro Place the cursor in the text box and press the key event combination to define a Macro Tab Alt F4 Print Screen Clear All Figure 36 AVR window Keyboard menu Add Hot Key Add Macro 3 Enter your favored combination of up to six keys by using the Windows Tab Alt F4
205. ewest last Dump Internal Eventlog raw newest last View Internal Eventlog Information Clear Internal Eventlog Change Internal Eventlog mode Temperature Voltages Current Fans Power Supplies Memory Sensor Door Lock CPU Sensors Component Status Lightpath List All Sensors e Service Processor Configure IP Parameters List IP Parameters Toggle Identify LED Reset iRMC Warm reset Reset iRMC Cold reset e RAID Management Controller information Physical device information Logical device information Array configuration information BBU status iRMC S4 363 Overview of menus e Change password e Console Redirection EMS SAC e Start a Command Line shell e Console Logging 364 iRMC S4 Logging in 8 4 Logging in When connecting to the iRMC you are required to enter your login credentials user name and password As soon as a connection to the iRMC S4 has been established the main menu window of the Remote Manager Telnet SSH window is displayed at the terminal client at the remote workstation Depending on whether ServerView agents have already been started at some point on the system the main window is shown with or without system information When logging in over an SSH connection If the host key of the managed server is not yet registered at the remote workstation the SSH client issues a security alert with suggestions on how to proceed iRMC S2 Remote Manag
206. ext SCCI OC ConfigSpace OE 3800 OI 0 Type SET gt lt DATA Type xsd hexBinary Len 1 gt 04 lt DATA gt lt CMD Context SCCI OC ConfigSpace OE 3801 OI 0 Type SET gt lt DATA Type xsd hexBinary Len 1 gt 00 lt DATA gt lt CMD gt lt CMDSEQ gt The Context parameter is used internally to select the provider of the operation Currently SCCI is the only supported provider 454 iIRMC S4 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration Parameters of SCCI provider specific commands The following SCCl provider specific commands are available Operation Code 0C Hex value or string specifying the command operation code The iRMC only supports a limited set of SCCI commands For a list of supported commands see table SCCI commands supported by the iRMC on page 460 Operation Code Extension 0E Hex value for extended operation code Default OE 0 For ConfigSpace Read Write operations this value defines the ConfigSpace ID Object Index 01 Hex value selecting an instance of an object Default Ol 0 Operation Code Type Type For configuration settings the values GET read operation and SET write operation are supported Default Type GET SET operations require data For specifying the appropriate data type use the Data DATA parameter described below Cabinet Identifier CA Allows you to select an extension cabinet and use its cabinet ID number i
207. f a command display the version of a command or request help lt target gt lt target gt specifies the address or the path of the object to be manipulated by the command i e the target of the command This can be a single managed element such as a hard disk a network adapter Network Interface Card NIC or the management program Management Assistance Program MAP itself Targets can however also be services such as a transport service Several managed elements which can be managed by the management program can be subsumed under a single lt target gt for instance the entire system Only one lt target gt may be specified for each command lt properties gt lt properties gt describe the properties of the target of the command which are required to execute the command Thus lt properties gt identify the properties of the target s class that are to be retrieved or modified by the command User data in the CLP overview Data within the CLP is structured hierarchically The command cd allows you to navigate within this structure Hierarchy of the CLP commands An overview of the CLP command hierarchy is shown in table 23 on page 385 384 iRMC S4 Command Line Protocol CLP JOSUaS alus uondussep osuo d upes osuo adAposuss osuo snyeys osuo Buipeai osuo SIOSUBS 30 lt W gt Un lt u gt plAep nay osjwao snip osjwao lt w gt unj lt u gt winu Jo SUSS osu
208. f scripts e Support for the LocalView service panel If PRIMERGY servers are equipped with a ServerView local service panel this module allows you to determine what module is faulty and whether you can replace the faulty module yourself e Local user management The iRMC has its own user management function which allows up to 16 users to be created with passwords and to be assigned various rights depending on the user groups they belong to e Global user management using a directory service The global user IDs for the iRMC are stored centrally in the directory service s directory This makes it possible to manage the user identifications on a central server They can therefore be used by all the iRMCs that are connected to this server in the network The following directory services are currently supported for iRMC user management Microsoft Active Directory Novell eDirectory OpenLDAP OpenDS e CAS based single sign on SSO authentication The iRMC supports Centralized Authentication Service CAS configuration which allows you to configure the iRMC web interface for CAS based single sign on SSO authentication iIRMC S4 19 Functions of the iRMC S4 The first time a user logs in to an application e g the IRMC web interface within the SSO domain of the CAS service they are prompted for their credentials by the CAS specific login screen Once they have been successfully authenticated by the C
209. for the IRMC S4 on page 59 Network Interface Settings MAC Address The MAC address of the iRMC is displayed here LAN Speed i This option is disabled not visible if network bonding is enabled LAN speed The following options are available Auto Negotiation 1000 MBit s Full Duplex depending on the server hardware 100 MBit s Full Duplex 100 MBit s Half Duplex 10 MBit s Full Duplex 10 MBit s Half Duplex If Auto Negotiation is selected the onboard LAN controller assigned to the iRMC autonomously determines the correct transfer speed and duplex method for the network port it is connected to Max Transmission Unit MTU Maximum packet size in bytes of the TCP IP data packages that will be accepted by the TCP IP connection Default 3000 Bytes 252 iIRMC S4 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters LAN Port i This option is disabled not visible if network bonding is enabled The LAN interface of the installed system NIC network interface card can be set up as shared LAN for shared operation with the system or as a service LAN for exclusive use as a management LAN Bonding Enabled Enables disables network bonding for the iRMC Network bonding for the iRMC is designed for redundancy in the event of Ethernet network adapter failures Thus iIRMC network management traffic is protected from loss of service which occurs due to failure of a single physical
210. further questions on remote management for PRIMERGY servers contact the service and support partners responsible for you Other information http www ts fujitsu com iIRMC S4 15 Functions of the iRMC S4 1 2 Functions of the iRMC S4 overview The iRMC supports a wide range of functions that are provided by default With Advanced Video Redirection AVR and Virtual Media the iIRMC also provides two additional advanced features for the remote management of PRIMERGY servers To use AVR virtual Media and embedded Lifecycle Management eLCM you require a valid license key which can be purchased separately Standard functions of the iRMC S4 Browser access The iRMC features its own web server which can be accessed by the management station from a standard web browser Security SSL SSH Secure access to the Web server and secure graphical console redirection including mouse and keyboard can be provided over HTTPS SSL An encrypted connection protected using SSH mechanisms can be set up to access the iRMC using the Remote Manager The Remote Manager is an alphanumeric user interface for the iIRMC ServerView Integration The ServerView agents detect the iRMC and automatically assign it to the relevant server This means that it is possible to start the iRMC web interface and text console redirection using the ServerView Remote Management Front end directly from ServerView Operations Manager Communication between the i
211. g 00 No error program successfully terminated 01 Arguments missing or not correct 02 Firmware upload selector value out of range 0 2 03 Firmware boot selector value out of range 0 5 04 Firmware image file missing 05 Firmware image file could not be opened 06 Communication with BMC not possible 07 Incorrect completion code of the IPMI command 08 The system has no iRMC S4 09 SDR ID of the system and the flash image file are not the same 10 Cannot allocate memory buffer 11 File transfer failed 12 IPMI call failed response data size is 0 13 HTI interface is not available 14 HTI interface detection failed other detection error 15 HTI interface detection failed SCSBB2 sys driver not available 16 Connecting to HTI failed 17 Flash process failed 18 Error completion code of F5 OB Start TFTP Flash OxCB Data not present TFTP Server could not provide the requested image file 19 Error completion code of F5 OB Start TFTP Flash 0xD3 Destination unavailable TFTP Server is not reachable 20 Unknown completion code of F5 0B Start TFTP Flash 21 Wrong file size of the firmware image file 22 Seek error with the firmware image file 23 GetFullPathName failed 24 Cannot load image because flash status is 0x04 image download in progress 25 Cannot load image because flash status is 0x08 flash in progress
212. g server hardware software directly out of band from the iRMC Information is provided on the following items BIOS Processor Memory Temperature sensors Power supplies Voltage sensors IDPROMS PCI devices System Event Log Internal Event Log Boot status Management controllers Alternatively you can download and automatically evaluate the generated XML file by using a CURL or Visual Basic script see section Scripted download and automatic evaluation of the iIRMC report on page 467 iIRMC S4 147 System Information Information on the server ServerView User admin Logout FUJITSU PRIMERGY TX140 S2 FUJITSU iRMC S4 Web Se Deutsch E System Information System Overview System Components View in Browser Save System Report BIOS iRMc S4 E Power Management E Power Consumption E Sensors E Event Log Server Management E Network Settings Alerting E User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtual Medis Third Party Licenses Logout Refresh 2 reportxml T Alle Downloads anzeigen X Figure 71 System Report page View in Browser Displays the XML file containing the report information Save Stores a report xml file containing the report information in the local download directory For each report file stored a button report xml is displayed at the bottom of the Sytem Report page You can open a report file by clicking the corresponding button Usi
213. g for the iRMC is designed for redundancy in the event of Ethernet network adapter failures Thus iRMC network management traffic is protected from loss of service which occurs due to failure of a single physical link The iRMC supports the active backup mode i e one port is active until the link fails then the other port takes over the MAC and becomes active e SNMPv1 v2c v3 support You can configure an SNMP service on the iRMC which supports SNMPv1 v2c v3 GET requests on SNMP SC2 MIB Sc2 mib SNMP MIB 2 SNMP OS MIB and SNMP STATUS MIB When the SNMP service is enabled information on devices such as fans temperature sensors etc are available via the SNMP protocol and can be viewed on any system running an SNMP Manager e Command line interface CLP In addition to the Remote Manager the iIRMC also supports SMASH CLP as standardized by the DMTF Distributed Management Task Force 18 iIRMC S4 Functions of the iRMC S4 e Simple configuration interactive or script based The following tools are available for configuring the iRMC iRMC web interface Server Configuration Manager UEFI BIOS Setup It is also possible to carry out configuration with the Server Configuration Manager or IPMIVIEW using scripts This means that it is possible to configure the iRMC when the server is first configured via ServerView Installation Manager It is also possible to configure a large number of servers on the basis o
214. g the AVR session Low bandwidth In the case of a reduced data transfer rate you can configure a lower bandwidth bits per pixel bpp in terms of color depth for your current AVR session iIRMC S4 21 Functions of the iRMC S4 e Virtual Media The Virtual Media functionality makes a virtual drive available which is physically located on a remote workstation or made available centrally on the network using the Remote Image Mount functionality The virtual drives available with Virtual Media are simply managed in much the same way as local drives and offer the following options Read and write data Boot from Virtual Media Install drivers and small applications Update BIOS from remote workstation BIOS update via USB Virtual Media supports the following device types to provide a virtual drive on the remote workstation CDROM DVD ROM Memory stick Floppy image CD ISO image DVD ISO image Physical Harddisk Drive HDD ISO image The Remote Image Mount functionality provides ISO images centrally on a network share in the form of a virtual drive e Embedded Lifecycle Management eLCM The embedded Lifecycle Management eLCM solution allows you to control lifecycle management of PRIMERGY servers with a few mouse clicks centrally from the iRMC web interface without the need of handling with physical devices eLCM comprises the following
215. g to up to three syslog server configured below Syslog server addresses The Syslog server addresses group allows you to configure the parameters for up to three syslog servers Syslog server addresses Syslog Serwer 1 Serwer 1 Port 514 Protocol TCP O UDP I Ll sev Syslog Server 2 Serwer 2 Port 514 Protocol TCP O UDP etl sev Syslog Server 3 Server 3 Port 514 Protocol TCP O UDP I iel sev Figure 147 Syslog Configuration page Syslog server addresses Server 1 2 3 IP address or DNS name of the respective syslog Server Server 1 2 3 Port Input port at which syslog Server 1 2 3 receives the forwarded events 242 iRMC S4 System Event Log and Internal Event Log Protocol Protocol TCP or UDP used for transferring the events to the corresponding syslog server IEL Events of the internal event log are to be forwarded to the corresponding syslog server SEL Events of the System Event Log SEL are to be forwarded to the corresponding syslog server Syslog filtering options The Syslog filtering options group allows you to filter the forwarded events by various criteria Syslog filtering options Filtering scope Basic X Message severity INFORMATIONAL MINOR MAJOR CRITICAL Apply Figure 148 Syslog Configuration page Syslog filtering options Basic settings Syslog filtering options Filtering scope Extended Fan Senso
216. ge 302 For eDirectory Open LDAP and OpenDS DJ refer to section Configuring iRMC for Novell eDirectory OpenLDAP OpenDS Open DJ on page 307 296 iIRMC S4 User Management 7 15 2 1 Standard LDAP groups with authorization settings on the iRMC S4 If Standard LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on iRMC has been enabled in the Directory Service Configuration page some additional settings are required which allow you to administer LDAP groups on the iRMC These LDAP groups are used to define iRMC privileges and permissions for users who belong to standard LDAP groups on the directory server Directory Service User Group Information Id Name LAN Channel Privilege Serial Channel Privilege 1 LDAPusergroup1 User User Delete New Group Figure 183 Microsoft Active Directory Directory Service User Group Information Delete Deletes the corresponding user group information New Group Opens the New LDAP User Group group which allows you to define a new LDAP group the iRMC permissions for a new LDAP group New LDAP User Group LDAP User Group Name User Shell Text Access Remote Manager v LAN Channel Privilege User Serial Channel Privilege User Configure User Accounts Configure iRMC S4 Settings Video Redirection Enabled Remote Storage Enabled Apply Figure 184 Microsoft Active Directory New LDAP User Group LDAP User Group Name Name of the new LDAP user gr
217. ge opens This page allows you to configure the basic settings for the new user This page is described in section New User Configuration Configuring a new user on page 282 Modifying the configuration of a user gt On the User Management page click the name of the user whose configuration parameters you want to change The User lt name gt Configuration page opens showing the settings for the selected user Here you can change the configuration parameters for the new user This page is described in section User lt name gt Configuration User configuration details on page 283 Deleting users gt On the User Management page click on the Delete button in the same line as the user to be deleted 4 3 2 Local user management via the Server Configuration Manager i Prerequisite The current ServerView agents must be installed on the managed server User management on the iRMC requires Configure User Accounts permission User management via the Server Configuration Manager largely conforms to user management using the iRMC web interface In chapter Configuring iRMC S4 using the Server Configuration Manager on page 387 is described how to start the Server Configuration Manager For details on the individual Configuration Manager dialogs please refer to the online help of the Server Configuration Manager iIRMC S4 65 Local user management for the iRMC S4 4 3 3 SSHv2 public key authenticati
218. gement Logout Refresh Figure 77 RAID Information RAID enclosures page ETERNUS JX40 156 iIRMC S4 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems Details Clicking on Details opens a new page which provides detailed information on the corresponding RAID enclosure ServerView FUJITSU ETERNUS JX40 E System Information E RAID Information A FUJITSU ETERNUS JX40 1 on LSI MegaRAID SAS 9286CV 8e 0 Controller O Locate OK Enclosures Status Physical Disks Vendor FUJITSU Product JX40 Port number 0 Logical Drives eios Device number 60 E iRMC 4 Enclosure number 1 E Power Management Logical ID 500000E0D0F Fo500 Power Consumption SAS address S00000E0D38027FE Serial number WkK12090174 Sensors Part number CA07217 C871 Event Log Hardware version AA Server Management Firmware version VO2LO6 Network Settings Alerting 2 Power supplies in FUJITSU ETERNUS JX40 1 on LSI MegaRAID SAS 9286CV 8e 0 User Management Console Redirection No Status Designation Partnumber Serial number Hardware version Video Redirection JWS anaid 1 ok Psu CA059541100 FA09350317 osco Lifecycle Management 2 ok Psuct CA059541100 FA09350318 osco Logout 4 Fans in FUJITSU ETERNUS JX40 1 on LSI MegaRAID SAS 9286CV 8e 0 Refresh No Status Designation Location Speed 4 OK FANOPSUO Q PSUO Low 2 OK FANIPSUO 1 PSUO Low 3 OK FANOPSU1 PSU1 Low 000o 4
219. gin option has been deactivated Append Base DN to Principal User DN Bind DN OU DN Enhanced User Login Fj Apply Test LDAP access Figure 197 Enhanced User Login If you select Enhanced User Login and activate it with Apply an additional field User Login Search Filter appears containing the standard login search filter amp objectclass person cn s Bind DN OU DN Enhanced User Login User Login Search filter G objectclass personXen s Apply Test LDAP access Figure 198 LDAP search filter for Enhanced User Login 311 iRMC S4 User Management At login the placeholder s is replaced by the associated global login You can modify the standard filter by specifying another attribute in place of cn All global logins are then permitted to log into the iRMC which meet the criteria of this search filter Test LDAP Access Checks the access data to the LDAP directory server and shows the LDAP status as the result see figure 191 This test only checks the basic access data Is the LDAP server present Is the user configured but does not fully authenticate the user Directory Service Access Configuration LDAP Status LDAP Server invalid LDAP Auth UserName LDAPuserName LDAP Auth Password faaaaaaaaananananana Confirm Password Apply Test LDAP access Reset LDAP Status Figure 199 eDirectory OpenLDAP Status
220. gt Open a web browser on the remote workstation and enter the configured DNS name see page 264 or IP address of the iRMC Different login screens appear depending on whether LDAP access to a directory service has been configured for the IRMC LDAP Enabled option see page 295 If no login screen appears check the LAN connection see section Testing the LAN interface on page 47 LDAP access to the directory service is not configured for the iIRMC LDAP Enabled option is not activated and Always use SSL Login option see page 295 is not activated Windows Security x The server at IRMC S4 iRMCA2FA42 requires a username and password vy credentials ms Figure 54 Login screen for the iRMC web interface LDAP access not configured and the Always use SSL login option is not selected gt Type in the data for the default administrator account User name admin Password admin Both the User name and the Password are case sensitive For reasons of security it is recommended that you create a new administrator account once you have logged in and then delete the default administrator account or at least change the password for the account see User lt name gt Configuration User configuration details on page 283 gt Click OK to confirm your entries 122 iIRMC S4 Logging into the iRMC web interface LDAP access to the directory service is configured for the iIRMC
221. guration Manager 387 Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the ServerView Installation Manager 2 02 02 eee eee 389 Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the Windows Stat Menu oa cc ea we oD RHE ae ee ee ee HS 389 Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the Operations Man gef i i sk we a a ditis 391 Firmware update 2 2 02 02 eee eee ee 395 iRMC S4 firmware overview 5 396 Setting up the USB memory stick 398 Updating firmware images 002 2065 401 Update via the iIRMC web interface 401 Update using the ServerView Update Manager 402 iIRMC S4 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 4 10 5 11 11 2 11 3 11 4 1 11 4 2 12 12 1 Tala 12 1 2 12 1 2 1 12 1 2 2 12 1 2 3 12 1 2 4 2125 12 1 2 6 12 1 27 12 2 12 2 1 12 2 1 1 1221 2 12 2 1 3 12 2 1 4 Online update using ServerView Update Manager Express or ASP 402 Update using the operating system flash tools 403 Update via the FlashDisk menu 405 Emergency lashi o 2 cche2 he eee ew RE SB eo eS 407 Flash OCIS 6c ee es bee se Gee ee See Se 408 Remote installation of the operating system via iRMC S4 413 Installing the operating system via iRMC S4 general procedure 414 Connecting a storage medium as Virtual Media 416 Booting the managed server from ServerView Suite DVD 1 and configuring it with the Installation Manager
222. guring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration lt CMDSEQ gt lt ConfCabinetLocation gt lt CMD Context SCCI OC ConfigSpace OE 200 OI 0 gt lt DATA Type xsd string gt s lt DATA gt lt CMD gt lt ConfSystemContact gt lt CMD Context SCCI OC ConfigSpace OE 204 OI 0 gt lt DATA Type xsd string gt s lt DATA gt lt CMD gt lt CMDSEQ gt doit LocationContact Ostsee Kiel 12 2 2 5 Generating encrypted passwords with iRMC_PWD exe The Fujitsu Technology Solutions iRMC password encryption and verification Utility iRMC_PWD exe is a Win32 program allowing you to generate encrypted passwords for use with SCCI scripting iRMC_PWD exe can be used both to encrypt a single password and to generate a SCCI batch file for scripted configuration iRMC_PWD standard command line options h This help v Verify an encrypted password string o lt oid gt The Object ID for the data to be encrypted u lt username gt Username for the given Object ID optional p lt password gt Password for the given Object ID encrypted password string to be verified x lt opCodeExt gt Opcode extension for the ConfigSpace data to encrypt 464 iRMC S4 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration p lt password gt Password for the given Object ID Default 1452 ConfBMCAcctUserPassword Supported Values 1452
223. hanged in compliance with RFC3411 The ID needs to be unique across the set of communicating SNMPv3 Agents and Managers The rules for an enginelD are as follows It must be at least five octets in length and may not be longer than 32 octets Each octet can contain a value from 0 up to 255 Hexadecimal 0x00 up to Oxff An SNMP engineID must not be set to all Os or 255s Hexadecimal Oxff If an enginelD starts with a 0 it must be 12 octets long For each engineID there must be a createUser directive in the SNMP trap receiver configuration SNMP Server SNMP Server7 trap destinations DNS names or IP addresses of the servers that belong to this community and are to be configured as Trap Destinations SNMP protocol version to be used for receiving traps gt Click Apply to activate the SNMP server as a trap destination gt Click Test to test the connection to the SNMP server gt Click Apply All to activate all the settings if appropriate 272 iIRMC S4 Alerting Configure alerting 7 14 2 Email Alerting Configure email alerting The Email Alerting page allows you to configure the settings for email alerting Configuration of two mail servers is supported Email alerting can be specified individually for each user see section User lt name gt Configuration User configuration details on page 283 ServerView SwW1 RX10058 Email Alerting system Information Global Email Paging Conf
224. hapter are described in the format used by the IPMI standard for describing IPM commands The IPMI standard describes the IPMI commands using command tables which list the input and output parameters for each command You can find information on the IPMI standards on the Internet under http developer intel com design servers ipmi index htm iIRMC S4 427 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 12 1 2 2 SCCl compliant Power On Off commands 01 15 Get Power On Source This command returns the reason for the most recent Power On The possible reasons are listed below Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group 01 Cmd Command Group Communication 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 15 Command Specifier Response Data BC 01 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 01 Data Length Power on Source Cause of last power on Power on Description Source 0x00 Software or command 0x01 Power switch on the front panel or keyboard 0x02 Automatic restart after power failure 0x03 Clock or timer hardware RTC or software timer 0x04 Automatic restart after fan failure shutdown 0x05 Automatic restart after critical temperature shutdown 0x08 Reboot after watchdog timeout 0x09 Remote on modem RI line SCSI termination power LAN chip card reader 0x0C Reboot after a CPU error 0x15 Reboot by hardware
225. hdog Settings group allows you configure the software watchdog and the boot watchdog The settings made on the ASR amp R Options group become active the next time the managed server is started Watchdog Settings Enabled T Software Watchdog Reset w after timeout delay 1 100 eo Minutes d Boot Watchdog Continue wW after timeout delay 1 100 100 Minutes Apply Figure 152 Server Management Information page Watchdog Settings The software watchdog monitors the activities of systems using the ServerView agents The software watchdog is activated when the ServerView agents and the operating system have been completely initialized The ServerView agents contact the iRMC at defined intervals If no more messages are received from a ServerView agent it is assumed that the system is no longer functioning correctly You can specify an action to be performed if this happens iIRMC S4 247 Server Management Information Configuring the server settings The boot watchdog monitors the phase between startup of the system and the time at which the ServerView agents become available If the ServerView agents do not establish a connection to the iRMC of the server within a specified time it is assumed that the boot process has not been successful You can specify an action to be performed if this happens Proceed as follows gt Check or uncheck the option s under Enabled for the Software Watchdog a
226. he result of the operation If the operation has completed successfully the value 0 is returned For a specification of all public configuration settings ConfigSpace see the SCCI_CS pdf file which is distributed with the PRIMERGY Scripting Toolkit iIRMC S4 457 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration 12 2 1 3 Restrictions All commands specified in the pre file are normally executed sequentially The following are exemptions from this rule To prevent broken network connectivity commands for IPv4 and VLAN network configuration are executed at the end of a command sequence Currently IPv6 configuration is limited to the configuration of the non volatile IPv6 configuration parameters As a workaround you can proceed as follows 1 Arrange your script as follows a At the beginning of the script Disable IPv6 b Configure IPv6 parameters c At the end of the script Enable IPv6 2 Submit the script from an IPv4 address The SSL certificate and the related matching private key are executed at the end of a command sequence Both components must be present in the same pre file and are checked for matching each other f a power management operation for the managed server or a reboot of the iRMC is required or desired It is recommended but not required to run these commands in separate command files You can achieve this e g by splitting the configuration and power management
227. he firmware selector can have the following values Firmware image containing the most recent firmware version firmware image 1 firmware image 2 Firmware image containing the oldest firmware version Firmware image most recently updated ar OO N O Firmware image that has been updated least recently Depending on the update variant used the firmware selector is set differently after the update You can query and explicitly set the firmware selector On the iRMC S4 Information page of the iRMC S4 web interface see Running Firmware on page 175 or Using the flash tool see page 408 iIRMC S4 397 Setting up the USB memory stick 10 2 Setting up the USB memory stick You do not need the USB memory stick if you update the firmware of the iRMC in one of the following ways Using the ServerView Update Manager Using ServerView Update Manager Express or ASP Using the iRMC web interface and TFTP server Proceed as follows gt Download the firmware iRMC Firmware Update for USB Stick from the Download section of the Fujitsu Technology Solutions web server to a directory on your computer The ZIP archive FTS_ lt spec gt zip can be found in your download directory The lt spec gt part of the name provides information on the system type system board firmware SDRR version etc The ZIP archive includes the following files USBImage exe IiRMC_ lt Firmware Version gt exe iRMC_ lt F
228. he managed server on and off and to configure the behavior of the server during the next boot operation see page 102 The Active Users menu displays the currently active AVR sessions see page 105 The Help menu allows you to display information on the version of the currently running KVM Remote Console Utility as well as information on the managed server see page 105 The icons of the AVR toolbar provide direct access to frequently used AVR functions 90 iIRMC S4 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window 5 2 7 1 Video menu The Video menu allows you to configure the AVR settings and to control the AVR Video Keyboard Mouse Options Media Power ActiveUsers Help Pause Redirection Alt P Sa T B iw D amp 50 100 150 Resume Redirection AIltR Refresh Video AItE Turn ON Host Display Turn OFF Host Display AltN Low Bandwidth Mode Capture Screen Alt S Full Screen AltF Start Record Stop Record Settings Exit Figure 32 AVR window Video menu You can select the following functions in the Video menu Pause Redirection Pauses AVR and freezes the AVR view The AVR view remains frozen until AVR is resumed Resume Redirection Resumes AVR and refreshes the AVR view Refresh Video Refreshes the AVR view Turn ON Host Display Switches on the local monitor of the managed server depending on whether this option is selected deselected Thi
229. he remote workstation to the serial controller BMC unpacks the characters contained in the packages sent by the remote workstation and forwards them to the serial controller as a character stream iRMC S4 31 IPMI technical background UDP datagrams to SEL Mgmt Port cece n Datagrams SDR a generated FRU by BMC A y Remote A LAN LAN mgmt Controller p system E g mii or lC PCI System Bus Outgoing packets thi from system ae Bee Motherb Serial Controller software Figure 5 BMC and SOL The SOL character data is then exchanged between the BMC of the managed system and the remote workstation as SOL messages The SOL messages are encapsulated in RMCP data packets and transferred in UDP datagrams over an Ethernet LAN connection using IPv4 Internet Protocol Version 4 The RMCP protocol is based on the RMCP protocol but includes extensions for encryption authentication etc Serial over LAN permits headless management by console redirection by both the BIOS and the operating system of the managed server High cost concentrator solutions are not required Channel concept under IPMI Channels provide the mechanisms with which IPMI messages are routed to the BMC via various connection carriers Up to nine channels can be supported The system interface and the primary IPMB are fixed The other seven channels are availab
230. her the storage medium is displayed during the BIOS POST phase and connect the storage medium as a virtual medium if necessary gt Make sure that the correct boot sequence is specified 418 iRMC S4 Booting from DVD 1 It takes about 5 minutes to boot from ServerView Suite DVD 1 via a virtual storage medium The boot progress is indicated during the boot process Once the boot process has completed the Installation Manager startup displays a dialog box in which you are asked to select a medium for the status backup area status backup medium gt Choose Standard mode as the Installation Manager mode gt Specify whether the configuration data is to be stored on a local replaceable data medium or on a network medium Please note that if you do not select any status backup option all the configuration data is lost when you reboot Status backup medium i The backup medium must not be write protected A USB stick must already be connected to the USB port when the system is booted If you fail to do this and wish to save the configuration file Connect the USB stick now and reboot from ServerView Suite DVD 1 gt Choose the option on local drive floppy USB stick gt Select the corresponding drive in the box to the right of this option For more detailed information on creating Installation Manager status disks see the manual ServerView Installation Manager Connecting the status medium and or the installa
231. http dygraphs com Copyright 2009 License Save History Figure 129 Power Consumption History Power History Chart 218 iRMC S4 Sensors Check status of the sensors 7 10 Sensors Check status of the sensors The Sensors entry provides you with pages which allow you to check the statuses of sensors of the managed server Fans Check fans on page 220 Temperature Report the temperature of the server components on page 222 Voltages Report voltage sensor information on page 224 Power Supply Check power supply on page 225 Component Status Check status of the server components on page 227 To facilitate checking the status the sensor status is not only shown in the form of the current value but also using a color code and a status icon Black font color The measured value is within the normal operational i value range Orange font color The measured value has exceeded the warning threshold A System operation is not yet jeopardized Red font color The measured value has exceeded the critical threshold t3 System operation may be jeopardized and there is a risk of loss of data integrity Table 7 Status of the sensors iRMC S4 219 Sensors Check status of the sensors 7 10 1 Fans Check fans The Fans page provides information on fans and their status S ServerView agement iRMC S4 Web Server
232. iIRMC S4 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems Clicking on Details opens a new page which provides detailed information on the corresponding RAID logical drive ServerView E System Information System Overview System Components Network Inventory E RAID Information Controller Physical Disks Logical Drives sios E irme s4 E Power Management E Power Consumption E Sensors E Event Log Server Management E Network Settings Logical drive 0 details Logical drive 0 on FTS RAID Ctrl SAS 66 16B D3116C 0 ke Status Operational Name RAID level RAID 5 Stripe size 64K Logical size 126 22 GB Read mode No resd shead Write mode Write back Cache mode Direct Disk cache mode Disabled Background initialization Enabled 4 Physical disk s in logical drive 0 on FTS RAID Ctrl SAS 6G 1GB D3116C 0 Slot Status Interface Type Vendor Product Capacity Temperature E Aenima Opestonsi sas HoD FUITSU Mezire mece 32c E User Management E Console Redirection 5 Operstionsi SAS HDD FUJITSU MBD2147RC 14668 31 C Details Video Redirection JWS E virtusi Media Operstionai SAS HDD FUJITSU MBD2147RC 14668 20 C Details pgi 7 Operations sas HOD FWITSU MBDZIa7RC 14668 zoc osais Refresh Fertig E Lokales Intranet Gesch tzter Modus Inaktiv Yar R004 7 Figure 84 Logical Drives Details Locate Turns on the ide
233. iIRMC S4 295 User Management Directory Server Type Type of directory server used The following directory services are supported Active Directory Microsoft Active Directory Novell Novell eDirectory OpenLDAP OpenLDAP Open DS Open DJ Apache DS Authorization Type Authorization type used ServerView LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on LDAP Server ServerView specific LDAP groups with authorization settings in the SVS structure on the LDAP server are used to determine user permissions see manual User Management in ServerView Standard LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on iRMC No ServerView specific SVS structure on the LDAP server is used Instead user authentication is checked by means of the standard LDAP group the user belongs to iIRMC specific user permissions for this standard LDAP group must be configured locally on the iRMC For this the Directory Service User Group Information group is displayed see section Standard LDAP groups with authorization settings on the iRMC S4 on page 297 This method supports group nesting Therefore all iRMC i specific user permissions which you assign to a standard LDAP group are automatically inherited by its nested groups gt Click Apply to activate your settings Different input fields are provided depending on the directory service you select For Active Directory refer to section Configuring iRMC for Microsoft Active Directory on pa
234. ia dialog box The provided storage medium is displayed 118 iIRMC S4 Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation 6 1 4 Clearing Virtual Media connections i A Virtual connection is automatically released in the following cases The AVR session is disconnected The AVR session which established the virtual media connection changes into read only mode due to a successful Full Access request of a second AVR session The settings configured in the Virtual Media Options page are changed see page 333 gt Open the Virtual Media dialog see section Starting Virtual Media wizard on page 113 gt Safely remove the storage device i e ensure that no more applications programs are accessing the storage media gt To clear a Virtual Media connection click the corresponding Disconnect button iRMC S4 119 7 iIRMC web interface The iRMC not only has its own operating system but also acts as a web server providing its own interface You can choose whether to show the menus and dialog boxes of the iRMC web interface in German English or Japanese When you enter values in the web interface you often receive assistance in the form of tool tips Third Party Licenses can be seen by clicking the Third Party Licenses link in the navigation bar of the web interface see page 130 iRMC S4 121 Logging into the iRMC web interface 7 1 Logging into the iRMC web interface
235. ial keys sw1 1x300s8 Smartcard Authentication Other LALT LETRU RALT RCTRU Num Caps Scroll J Figure 24 Advanced Video Redirection AVR window 82 iRMC S4 Using AVR The AVR window also contains the following elements e AVR menu bar provides access to the individual AVR menus see page 90 e The AVR tool bar provides direct access to a variety of AVR tools allowing you among others to stop resume your AVR session use the Virtual Media function record your AVS session and use hotkeys see page 87 e The zoom tool bar allows you to stageless enlarge or reduce the AVR view see page 106 e The integrated special keys in right bottom of the AVR window allow you to use Windows keys or special key combinations which are not sent by AVR if you press them on your own keyboard see page 87 5 2 2 Using a low bandwidth In the case of a reduced data transfer rate you can configure a lower bandwidth bits per pixel bpp in terms of color depth for your current AVR session 5 2 3 Parallel AVR sessions AVR can be used by up to two user sessions simultaneously The AVR session started first is initially in Full access mode and has full control over the server Starting a second AVR session while a previous one is still active When an AVR session2 is started while a previous AVR session1 is still active and in Full access mode the procedure is as described below Inthe AVR window of ses
236. ich is always assigned automatically to the iRMC and enables the iRMC to generate its own IPv6 address Stateful Address Configuration With Stateful Address Configuration the iRMC obtains its IPv6 address from a DHCP server 256 iIRMC S4 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters If you enable the Manual IPv6 configuration option the I Pv6 configuration group displays additional parameters that allow you to manually configure a routable IPv6 address for the iRMC IPv6 configuration Manual IPv6 configuration 7 IPv6 Static Address fdb8 2976 8500 733 219 99ff fea2 fad2 Prefix length 64 IPv6 Static Gateway Link Local Address fe80 219 99ff fea2 fa42 64 Unique Local Address fdb8 2976 8500 733 219 99ff fe a2 fa42 64 IPv6 Gateway Apply Figure 158 Network Interface page manual IPv6 configuration IPv6 Static Address Static IPv6 address for the iRMC Prefix Length Length of the IPv6 prefix IP v6 Static Gateway Static IPv6 address of the default IPv6 gateway in the LAN VLAN Configuration VLAN Enabled This option allows you to activate VLAN support for the iRMC VLAN Id VLAN ID of the virtual network VLAN the iRMC belongs to Permitted value range 1 lt VLAN Id lt 4094 VLAN Priority VLAN priority user priority of the iRMC in the VLAN specified by VLAN Id Permitted value range 0 lt VLAN Priority lt 7 default 0 257 iRMC
237. ides information on each RAID physical disk on the managed server Logical Device Information Provides information on the each RAID logical drives on the managed server Array configuration Provides information on array configuration information BBU status Provides information on status of the battery backup units BBU Table 20 Service Processor menu iIRMC S4 379 Console Redirection EMS SAC 8 13 Console Redirection EMS SAC Start text console redirection You can start console redirection with the Console Redirection EMS SAC item from the main menu i Text based console redirection only works over the LAN with Serial 1 If console redirection is also to be used while the operating system is running the Serial 1 Multiplexer must be set to System Use the keyboard shortcut lt ESC gt or tilde dot to exit the text console It is possible that only one of these options will work depending on the type of PRIMERGY server used 8 14 Start a Command Line shell Start a SMASH CLP shell Start a Command Line shell in the main menu allows you to start a SMASH CLP shell SMASH CLP stands for Systems Management Architecture for Server Hardware Command Line Protocol This protocol permits a Telnet or SSH based connection between the management station and the managed server For further details on SMASH CLP please refer to section Command Line Protocol CLP on p
238. ied in the corresponding entry field 260 iRMC S4 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters IPMI over LAN IPMl over LAN is the specification of the LAN interface in the IPMI standard This specification stipulates how IPMI messages can be sent to or from the iIRMC encapsuCIM lated in RMCP Remote Management Control Protocol data packets These RMCP data packets are transferred via an Ethernet LAN connection using UDP under IPv4 or IPv6 RCMP supports the management of system statuses in systems without running operating system The interface for such a connection is provided on the integrated LAN controller of the iRMC IPMI over LAN enabled This option is enabled by default Allows you to disable the IPMI over LAN feature CIM The Common Information Model CIM is a standardized hierarchical object oriented data model which ensures a uniform representation of the managed resources CIM enabled This option is enabled by default Allows you to disable the CIM protocol gt Click Apply to store the configured settings iRMC S4 261 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters 7 13 3 Proxy Settings Configuring proxy settings The Proxy Settings page allows you to configure the settings for a proxy server which can be optionally used for establishing the connection to an update repository see section Update Settings Configuring general eLCM update settings on page 340 and or fo
239. iguration BIOS E iRMC 4 Email Alerting Enabled Power Management bas SMTP Retries 0 7 3 E Power Consumption SMTP Retry Delay 0 255 30 Seconds E Sensors E Event Log SMTP Response Timeout 45 Seconds Server Management E Network Settings Apply I Alerting SNMP Traps Primary SMTP Server Configuration Email E User Management SMTP Server 00 00 Console Redirection SMTP Port 25 Video Redirection IWS Auth Type None E E Virtual Media Send FQDN with EHLO HELO 4 E Lifecycle Management Secure SSL Logout Verity SSL Certificate Secondary SMTP Server Configuration SMTP Server 0 0 0 0 SMTP Port 25 Auth Type None E Send FQDN with EHLO HELO 7 Secure SSL 7 Verify SSL Certificate T Mail Format dependend Configuration From MailFrom domain com Subject FixedMailSubject Message FixedMailMessage Admin Name ITS_UserlntoO Admin Phone ITS_Userlntot Country Code Customer Id Server URL http mnserver com T attach Screenshot to Critical O S Stop event email F Figure 166 Email Alerting page iRMC S4 273 Alerting Configure alerting Global Email Paging Configuration Configure global email settings The Global Email Paging Configuration group allows you to configure the global email settings Global Email Paging Configuration Email Alerting Enabled oO SMTP Retries 0
240. iguration page see page 291 The following email formats are supported Standard Fixed Subject ITS Format SMS Format Mail Format dependend Configuration From MailFrom domain com Subject FixedMailSubject Admin Name fits usent o Admin Phone ITS_Userinfot S S Country Code OO Customer Server URL rttpiwsevencom O Attach Screenshot to Critical O S Stop event email Apply Figure 170 Email Alerting page Mail Format dependent Configuration Some entry fields are disabled depending on the mail format From Sender identification iRMC Active for all mail formats If the string entered here contains an the string is interpreted as a valid email address Otherwise admin lt ip address gt is used as the valid email address Subject Fixed subject for the alert mails Only active for the Fixed Subject mail format see page 291 Message Type of message email Only active for the Fixed Subject mail format see page 291 278 iIRMC S4 Alerting Configure alerting Admin Name Name of the administrator responsible optional Only active for the TS mail format see page 291 Admin Phone Phone number of the administrator responsible optional Only active for the TS mail format see page 291 Country Code Two characters country code based on ISO 3166 ISO 3166 alpha 2 Customer Id Identifier for the customer Server URL A URL under which the ser
241. il SSL Certificate file Logout Refresh Note Alternatively you may paste the contents of the base64 PEM encoded X 509 SSL certificate or the base64 PEM encoded DSAJRSA private key into the textbox below for upload to the IRMC S4 Important Both files needs to be uploaded one after the other Important Do not upload your CA certificate with this method into the IRMC S4 Use upload from file instead Important After you have uploaded pasted the file s in the textbox below you need to restart the IRMC S4 manually 2003 2013 Fujitsu Technology Solutions All rights reserved Figure 102 Certificate Upload page Fri 26 Jul 2013 12 56 55 PM GMT 184 iRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Displaying the currently valid CA DSA RSA certificate gt In the group Certificate Information and Restore click View Certificate to show the currently valid certificate In the group Certificate Information and Restore click View CA Certificate to show the currently valid CA certificate S ServerView sw1 rx300s8 E System Information System Overview System Components Network Inventory iRMC 4 Information iRMC 4 Time Save Configuration Certificate Upload Generate Certificate iRMC S4 Update E Power Management Power Consumption E Sensors Event Log Server Management E Network Settings Alerting E User Management Console Redir
242. in a scheduled manner This requires that a custom image is already available on the iRMC SD card and offered for selection Table 11 Custom image settings i daily weekly monthly yearly once only 354 iRMC S4 Lifecycle Management Cancel Cancels preparing the download Cancel only works as long as the download has not started Once the download is started the Cancel button is disabled Delete Selected Image Deletes the selected image s from the iRMC SD card Unmount Selected Image Unmounts the selected image Custom Image Logs The Custom Image Logs group informs you if a log file related to the custom image is available and if this applies allows you to store the log file Custom Image Logs i There is no any log file to save Figure 230 Online Update page Online Update Logs Save Opens a confirmation dialog which offers to store the log file The Save button is disabled if no log file is available iIRMC S4 355 Lifecycle Management 7 18 5 PrimeCollect Health management The PrimeCollect page allows you to store several PrimeCollect archives on the iRMC SD card Additionally you can define one special reference image which will not be overwritten by the ring buffer principle Out of band eLCM provided by the iRMC extends and enhances the standard PrimeCollect functionality and usability as follows Creating PrimeCollect archives automatically and sched
243. ing system information PrimeCollect Archives System Reports etc in case of an error Embedded AIS Connect can work in two different modes Warranty Mode In Warranty Mode the only function of AIS Connect is to contact the Enterprise Environment Service System on a daily basis and to send data created by Prime Collect only on the user s demand Contract Mode In Contract Mode AIS Connect reports any issues occurring when the server is operational It also sends PrimeCollect report and SystemReport along with the alarm data 142 iRMC S4 System Information Information on the server Warranty Mode is the default Only the technicians managing the enterprise environment can change the Warranty Mode to Contract Mode This requires to set up a connection The handling of the embedded AIS Connect feature of the iRMC is described below For more detailed information on the embedded AIS functionality please refer to the manual ServerView embedded Lifecycle Management eLCM Alternatively you can download and automatically evaluate the generated XML file by using a cURL or Visual Basic script see section Scripted download and automatic evaluation of the iRMC report on ServerView PRIMERGY RX100 8 FUJITSU ServerView iRMC 54 Web Server Deutsch EEE Als Connect Saanut AIS Connect Status System Overview oe Asset Model Asset Serial Connectio
244. ings 244 iRMC S4 Server Management Information Configuring the server settings 7 12 Server Management Information Configuring the server settings The Server Management Information page allows you to configure the following settings on the server ASR amp R automatic server reconfiguration and restart settings for the server see page 246 Watchdog settings see page 247 Format in which the iRMC device will return UUID information see page 249 ServerView User admia Logout FUIS PRIMERGY RX100 SB FUJITSU ServerView IRMC S4 Web Server beutseh Bae S5W1 RX10058 Server Management Information System Information ASRER Options 2 sios a muc ASRER Boot Delay 1 20 2 Minutes iRMC S4 Information OE be IRMC S4 Time Sean onic Retry counter 0 Max 3 Certificate Upload A pA BIOS Recovery Flash Disabled 3 IRMC 4 Update Prevent Power On on Critical Temperature Disabled E Power Management Power Cycle Delay 7 18 7 Seconds E Power Consumption Sensors E Event Log Apply Server Management E Network Settings Watchdog Settings B Atenina SNMP Traps Enabled Email E User Management E Sofware Watchdog Continue v after timeout delay 1 100 Minutes B Console Redirection Re m P lir PEE E Boot Watchdog Continue w sftertimeout delay 1 100 100 Minutes E Virtus Medis E Lifeoycte Management Apply Refresh Gi Note These settings wil be acti
245. inistration anagement ent Managemen Monitoring Jndate Management Securit ServerBrowser Server Configuration UsersiPasswords National Settings Base Configuration Wizard Home gt gt Server Configuration Server is ESTEE a mm BX40051Labor ServerView Configuration Manager E pdbsm b62c02 E PDBSM RX104 PDBSM RX202 E pdbsm rx204 E pdbsm rx207 pdbsm rx305 5C E pdbsm rx603 oo POBSM Tx101 E pdbsm txtat cross vo PDBSM Tx155 E pdbsm tx156 E pdbsm tx2052 E psbsm tx1542 E svum 141 sm pdbps fsc net Groups Figure 250 Operations Manager Server Configuration window Server list 1 tab 392 iRMC S4 Configuring via Server Configuration Manager gt Inthe hierarchy tree of the Server list tab select the server to be configured This opens the following window S ServerView User svadmin Admi e n ServerBrowser Server Configuration Users Passwords National Settings Base Configuration Wizard Server Configuration Server let Name pdbsm b62m00 CO8 11 1 11 1 1 83 Sg Al Servers Model PDBPs B6c02 8 PDB5 1x154 E pdbsm b62c02 S E pdbsm b 2m00 i f PDBPS B62C09 if POBSM B62c01 i POBSM B62C03 pdbsm b62c07 pll sm pdbps fsc net i pdbsm b62m00 02 i pdbsm b62m00 04 if pdbsm b62m00 05 pdbsm b62m00 06 dbs pdbsm b 2m00 0 Manually select system features Change detected system Please select system W Rack Model Local iew Panel LYP installed Man
246. ion then the virtual functionality supports the following device types Floppy CD ISO image DVD ISO image CD DVD Optical storage media CD DVD are automatically displayed offered for selection Devices connected as virtual media are recognized as the USB connected devices by the iRMC They cannot be used if no USB connection is available e g no USB driver exists You can use the virtual drive to install an operating system on your PRIMERGY server from the remote workstation see chapter Remote installation of the operating system via iRMC S4 on page 413 This section provides information on the following topics e Starting the Virtual Media wizard e Handling virtual media via the Virtual Media dialog box Providing storage media for the Virtual Media session Connecting storage media as virtual media Clearing Virtual Media connections 112 iRMC S4 Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation 6 1 1 Starting Virtual Media wizard You start the Virtual Media wizard by using the AVR Java applet see section Advanced Video Redirection Start Advanced Video Redirection AVR on page 324 gt Start the iRMC web interface see section Logging into the IRMC web interface on page 122 gt Open the Advanced Video Redirection page and click on the Start Video Redirection Java Web Start to start Advanced Video Redirection see section Advanced Video Redirection Start Adv
247. irmware Version gt IMA gt Connect the USB memory stick to your computer gt Start the file iRMC_ lt Firmware Version gt exe or the file USBImage exe One of the following windows is opened depending on the file you call see figure 252 on page 399 398 iRMC S4 Setting up the USB memory stick USBImage V1 12 Image File USB Device 486 MB VBTM Store n Go USB Device ve Copy Status Clear USB Device Figure 252 Copying the image file to the USB memory stick with iRMC_ lt Firmware version gt exe USBimage V1 12 Image File SERM 7 00F IMA USB Device 117 MB JetFlash Transcend USB Device x Copy Status Copy Image File To USB Device Copy USB Device To Image File Clear USB Device Figure 253 Copying the image file to the USB memory stick with USBImage exe If you have called USBImag exe then under Image File you must explicitly specify the file iRMC_ lt Firmware Version gt IMA gt Click Clear USB Device to delete the data from the USB memory stick iRMC S4 399 Setting up the USB memory stick gt Click Copy Image File to USB Device to copy the file BMC_ lt Firmware Version gt IMA to the USB memory stick and extract it CAUTION This action overwrites the content of the USB memory stick When the copy operation is complete the flash tools and image files are present on the USB memory stick Name OFpos Menu E 700F_317 bin fS Autoexec ba
248. is only required for providing images gt Inthe appropriate panel of the Vitual Media dialog box click Browse The Open file browser dialog box opens gt Inthe Open dialog box navigate to the directory of the storage medium that you want to make available as virtual medium from your remote workstation a Open Lx Look In __VirtMedia Iz alle m ERA G ETERNUS DX_Media CD_01 2013 B iso C imageFile iso File Name ImageFile iso Files of Type ISO iso 1ISO NRG nrg NRG ly Figure 51 Open dialog box Windows gt Select the required device type under Files of Type i Physical storage devices must be mounted on Linux systems 116 iRMC S4 Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation gt Specify the storage medium you wish to connect as a virtual medium under File Name Inthe case of an ISO image ISO NRG image enter the file name Alternatively click on the file name in the Explorer Inthe case of a drive enter the name of the drive e g D for drive D Windows dev Linux gt Click Open to confirm your selection The selected storage medium is made available as a virtual medium and displayed in the corresponding panel of the Virtual Media dialog box Display in the Storage Devices dialog Windows Floppy Image v Browse l RPL EEN EES CD DVD Media M je Browse Disconn
249. l Event Log System Event Log Content SEL Configuration 7 is Syslog Configuration Displey Critical y Display Major m A Display Minor EO display info ei css ony Off Show Resolutions Server Management Network Settings Apply Alerting User Management Event Event Error Event Event Alert css Console Redirection Date Severity Code Source Description Group Component Video Redirection JWS W Thu 09 Jui 2015 08 00 38 AM Majer 0390011 BIOS POST Keyboard error POST Errors No Virtual Medis ia Cause Keyboard eror detected during Power On Self Test POST Refresh Check in the case of headless mode without local keybosrd that AVR license is enabled or keyboard check is disabled Resolutions Check keyboard cable If problem persists replace keyboard cable Y wes 08 Jul 2018 08 00 23 AM Major 090011 BIOs POST Keyboard error POST Errors No Cause Keyboard eror detected during Power On Self Test POST Check in the case of headless mode without local keyboard that AVR license is enabled or keyboard check is disabled Resolutions Check keyboard cable If problem persists replace keyboard cable X Figure 136 System Event Log Content page 232 iRMC S4 System Event Log and Internal Event Log System Event Log Information The System Event Log Information group informs you of the number of entries in the IPMI SEL It also indicates the time when the last entries were added or de
250. l return UUID information System UUID Options Get System GUID Response Format ii Specification compatioie v Figure 154 Page Server Management Information System UUID Options Get System UUID Response Format Format in which the iRMC device will return UUID information IPMI Specification compatible System GUID Response Format is compatible to the IPMI Specification SMBIOS 2 6 Specification compatible System GUID Response Format is compatible to the System Management BIOS SMBIOS Reference Specification gt Click Apply to activate your settings iRMC S4 249 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters 7 13 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters The Network Settings entry brings together the links to the pages you use to configure the LAN parameters of the iRMC Network Interface Settings Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC on page 251 Ports and Network Services Configuring ports and network services on page 258 Proxy Settings Configuring proxy settings on page 262 DNS Configuration Configuring DNS for the iRMC on page 264 SNMP Generic Configuration on page 268 250 iIRMC S4 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters 7 13 1 Network Interface Settings Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC The Network Interface page allows you to view and change the Ethernet settings for the iRMC S ServerView Ne
251. lation All the installation files are copied to the managed server The Installation Manager opens a confirmation dialog page when the copy operation is complete and prompts you to remove all the storage media from the removable media drives before the managed server is rebooted Before rebooting the system you must in particular shut down all current virtual media connections Before rebooting the system shut down the current virtual media connections To do this proceed as follows gt Start Virtual Media see page 113 The Virtual Media dialog box is displayed with the currently connected virtual media devices gt Click all Disconnect buttons to remove all the virtual media connections gt Safely remove the storage device i e ensure that no more applications programs are accessing the storage media On the confirmation dialog page click Ok to reboot the managed server Once the managed server has rebooted you can monitor the entire installation by means of the AVR 424 iRMC S4 12 Appendix The appendix provides you with information about the following topics IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC on page 425 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration on page 452 12 1 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iIRMC This section describes a selection of OEM specific IPMI commands supported by the iRMC S4 12 1 1 Overview The following OEM specific IPMI commands are suppor
252. le for the implementation Channels can be either session based or sessionless The session concept has two meanings It is either a concept for user authentication see the section User identifications on page 33 or a concept for routing multiple IPMI message streams via a single channel Examples of session based channels are LAN channels or serial modem channels Examples of sessionless channels are the system interface and the IPMB 32 iIRMC S4 Data Center Management Interface DCMI User identifications For session based channels see the section Channel concept under IPMI on page 32 a user login is necessary By contrast the sessionless channels have no user authentication Under IPMI the user configuration is channel specific Thus users can have different privileges depending on whether they are accessing the BMC via the LAN channel or the serial channel References Information about the IPMI standards can be found on the Internet http developer intel com design servers ipmi index htm 1 7 DCMI Data Center Management Interface The iRMC supports the DCMI Data Center Management Interface protocol which is compliant with the IPMI V2 0 standard DCMI has been designed to improve manageability and energy efficiency of server systems that are deployed in large data centers To meet the hardware management requirements of servers within data centers DCMI s
253. le redirection after the BIOS UEFI POST phase DOS Condition The BIOS setting for console redirection mode must be set to Enhanced see the section BIOS Text Console Configure and start text console redirection on page 319 If the managed server starts the PRIMERGY ServerView Suite diagnosis software you can operate PRIMERGY ServerView Suite diagnosis using console redirection Windows Server 2008 2012 Windows Server 2008 2012 handles console redirection automatically after the POST phase No further settings are necessary While the operating system is booting the Windows Server 2008 SAC console Windows Server 2012 SAC console is transferred A 140 100 100 231 RX200 52 1 SP 140 100 100 231 23 Connected Computer is booting SAC started and initialized Use the ch command for information about using channels Use the command for general help SAC EVENT The CMD command is now available SACH Figure 208 Windows Server SAC console Linux You must configure a Linux operating system in such a way that it handles console redirection after the POST phase Once it has been configured you have complete remote access 322 iRMC S4 Console Redirection Redirecting the console Settings required The settings may differ between program versions SuSe and RedHat Add the following line to the end of the file etc inittab xx 12345 respawn sbin agetty lt baud rate gt ttyS0 RedHa
254. lerting page Secondary SMTP Server Configuration SMTP Server IP address of the secondary mail server You can activate the Domain Name System DNS for the iRMC i see DNS Configuration Configuring DNS for the iRMC on page 264 You can then use a symbolic name instead of the IP address SMTP Port SMTP port of the mail server Auth Type Authentication type for connecting the iRMC to the mail server None No authentication for the connection SMTP AUTH RFC 2554 Authentication according to RFC 2554 SMTP Service Extension for Authentication In this case the following information is required 276 iIRMC S4 Alerting Configure alerting Auth User Name User name for authentication on the mail server Auth Password Password for authentication on the mail server Confirm Password Confirm the password entered Send FQDN with EHLO HELO Enables disables sending the FDQN with EHLO HELO Secure SSL Email is sent SSL encrypted Verify SSL Certificate SSL certificate is verified gt Click Apply to activate your settings iIRMC S4 277 Alerting Configure alerting Mail Format dependent Configuration Configure mail format dependent settings The Mail Format dependent Configuration group allows you to configure the mail format dependent settings You specify the mail format for each user using the New User Configuration User lt Name gt Configuration Email Format Conf
255. leted System Event Log Information Evert Log Status 425 Entries of 425 Ring SEL Last Addition 12 Jun 2009 15 26 02 Last Erase 08 Jan 2008 16 58 51 Clear Event Log Save Event Log Figure 137 System Event Log Content page System Event Log Information Clear Event Log Clears all entries from the IPMI SEL Save Event Log Downloads the file iRMC S4_EventLog sel which contains the IPMI SEL entries iRMC S4 233 System Event Log and Internal Event Log System Event Log Content The System Event Log Content group displays the SEL entries filtered by severity class You can modify the filter criteria for the duration of the current session in the System Event Log Content group However the settings you make here are only valid until the next logout After that the default settings apply again System Event Log Content V isplay Critical Y Woispiay Major i A Display Minor i display Info _ icss only _ at Show Resolutions Apply Event Event Error Event Event Alert css Date Severity Code Source Description Group Component x rhe tre Critical 080048 Watchdog Boot a Timer System Hang No x ae oaoa Critical 080048 Watchdog poor yokes auna System Hang No x e e Critical 080048 Watchdog goon pi Timer System Hang No x ms mes rite Critical 080048 Watchdog aoon beer auma System Hang No x oe ag Critical 80069 Watchdog EM bets fa Hard system Hang No gt lt ag ates ate Critical 080048 Watchdog noor ye
256. lick Apply to activate your settings gt Click Connect The Remote CD DVD Image Options group is shown as follows indicating that the remote image is now connected to the managed server iIRMC S4 337 Virtual Media Remote CD DVD Image Options Share Type v Server 111 11 111 11 Share Name f Image Name Fr User Name User 1 Password Confirm Password Domain Figure 220 Remote CD DVD Image Options gt To clear the connection to the remote image click Disconnect gt To restart the Remote Image Mount service e g in case of a failure click Restart Service 338 iIRMC S4 Lifecycle Management 7 18 Lifecycle Management The embedded Lifecycle Management functionality eLCM of the iRMC allows you to configure and perform lifecycle management of a PRIMERGY server with a few mouse clicks centrally from the iRMC web interface without the need of handling physical devices eLCM provided by the iRMC comprises the following functions eLCM update management eLCM image management eLCM health management To use the eLCM functionality you need a valid eLCM license key which i is purchased together with the iRMC SD card The SD card is used as the iRMC related non volatile mass data storage and is mounted in the iRMC internal Linux file system From the server side files on the IRMC SD card may be read and written through the PCle interface via HTI High
257. link The iRMC only supports the active backup mode i e one port is active until the link fails then the other port takes over the MAC and becomes active e If bonding is enabled the Active Port the LAN Speed and LAN Port 1 options are disabled not visible For iRMC network bonding the involved LAN switches should be 1 located within the same network Beyond that iRMC network bonding does not require a special switch configuration i Please note Even if enabled Network bonding is suspended when the Front LAN becomes active The Front LAN port is activated and can be accessed by the predefined IP address 192 168 1 1 In the event this situation occurs a corresponding note will be displayed in the web interface Bonding settings can nevertheless be configured and modified The settings will be effective once the front LAN is deactivated link down i e the bonding mode will be activated again depending on the currently configured bonding settings iIRMC S4 253 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters The following figure outlines how network bonding works MAC Address 00 19 99 A2 FA 42 Max Transmission Unit MTU 1500 Bonding Enabled DO MAC Address 00 19 99 A2 FA 42 Max Transmission Unit MTU 1500 MAC Address 00 19 99 A2 FA 42 Max Transmission Unit MTU 1500 Active Port Shared LAN Bonding Enabled IV Figure 156 IP
258. ll Power Consumption Sane Tews Enasi I TERSA OEE ia De ee eee es IRONS S User l 26 Watt 30 Watt 30 Watt 37 Watt i LDAP Conigurton I exe compuitn i 2 corecte Redtecton BWE Texicorsole I veo Record veo Redlrecton I Video Redirection I I gt wires nests remor menon T mesin opire I l3 uecyae teregemen Common Seiras I Oriire Update I cusim mage I Navigation area Working area Primecolleci Third Party Licenses Information link Figure 56 Structure of the iRMC web interface iRMC S4 130 Structure of the user interface Choosing the language for the iRMC web interface On the right of the black bar above the work area you will find a flag icon Click this icon to choose the language German English Japanese used to display the navigation area menus and dialog boxes of the web interface Navigation area The navigation area contains the menu tree structure whose nodes combine the links to the individual iRMC functions arranged on a task basis When you click one of these links the link is enabled and the work area for that function is displayed showing any output dialog boxes options links and buttons Below the links to the individual iRMC functions you will find the links Logout and Refresh e Logout allows you to terminate the iRMC session after you have confirmed this in a dialog box Different login screens appear after the session has been closed depending on whether LDAP
259. lowing menu appears if you choose System Information from the main menu System Information Menu 1 View Chassis Information 2 View Mainboard Information 3 View OS and SNMP Information 4 Set ASSET Tag Set System Name Set System Operating System Information Set System Description Set System Location Information SNMP Set System Contact Information SNMP Enter selection or 0 to quit i Figure 238 Remote Manager System Information menu The sub menu contains the following functions View Chassis Information Information on the chassis of the managed server and its product data View Mainboard Information Information on the main board of the managed server and its product data View OS and SNMP Information Information on the operating system and the ServerView version of the managed server and on the SNMP settings Table 14 System Information menu iIRMC S4 371 System Information Information on the managed server Set ASSET Tag Sets a customer specific asset tag for the managed server Table 14 System Information menu 372 iIRMC S4 Power Management 8 9 Power Management The following menu appears if you choose Power Management from the main menu Power Management Menu 1 Immediate Power Off 2 Immediate Reset 3 Power Cycle Power On 5 Graceful Power Off Shutdown 6 Graceful Reset Rebo
260. ls a shutdown request that has been issued Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group 02 Cmd Command Group Communication 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 09 Command Specifier Response Data BC 02 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 434 iRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 12 1 2 4 SCCl compliant signaling command 10 02 Write to System Display This command is used to write characters to the LocalView display if connected Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group 10 Cmd Command Group Fan Test 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 02 Command Specifier Object Index Line on Display to write on Value ID not used Length Number of characters to write incremented by one The string need not be null terminated characters exceeding the length of a display line are truncated Attribute 0 Write String left aligned 1 Write String centered 10 10 n Characters to write to the display string need not be null terminated Response Data BC 10 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first iIRMC S4 435 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 12 1 2 5 Firmware specific commands 20 04 Set Firmware Selector This command configures the firmware image of the iRMC which is to be active after a firmware reset Request Data 20 NetF
261. m Mode 2 Refresh Everyday 5 z Apply Figure 123 Power Consumption Configuration page scheduled Time 1 Time hh ss at which the iRMC starts power control as defined in Mode 1 on the relevant day of the week Time 2 Time hh ss at which the iRMC starts power control as defined in Mode 2 on the relevant day of the week Mode 1 Power consumption mode used by the iRMC for power control as of Time 1 on the relevant day of the week Mode 2 Power consumption mode used by the iRMC for power control as of Time 2 on the relevant day of the week Set Time 1 lt Time 2 otherwise the power control mode specified under Mode 2 will only be activated at Time 2 on the relevant day of the following week i Specifications in the Everyday field take priority iIRMC S4 211 Power Consumption gt Click Apply to activate your settings You can also configure scheduled power control using the Server Configuration Manager see chapter Configuring iIRMC S4 using the Server Configuration Manager on page 387 Power Limit Options The Power Limit Options group is displayed under the following circumstances The power control mode Power Limit is selected and enabled in the Power Consumption Options group The power control mode Scheduled is enabled in the Power Consumption Options group and the power control mode Power Limit is enabled at least once in the Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration gr
262. me pre of your choice Save Filename Saves the edited file name which starting from now will be the name displayed by default in the Backup Filename field iIRMC S4 165 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS Request BIOS Parameter Backup Initiates a backup of single BIOS parameter settings in ServerView WinSCU XML format The backup with the name specified in the Backup Filename field is stored locally on the iRMC Once the backup process has started the current process status is displayed under Backup Status i Notes on the backup process During the backup process all buttons and input fields are disabled If powered off the managed server will be automatically powered on Ifthe server is powered on a reboot is required Otherwise the backup process will remain in state Boot Pending The managed server is powered off after the backup has completed Save Backup to File Only displayed when a backup of single BIOS parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format is available in the local store of the iIRMC Opens a browser dialog allowing you to save the iRMC local copy of the BIOS backup data to a file lt name of your choice gt pre Clear Status Only available if a status is currently displayed under Backup Status Clears the status information indicated under Backup Status 7 6 1 2 Restoration BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format The
263. ments The current ServerView agents must be installed on the managed server The Server Configuration Manager functions can be accessed in the following ways Locally on managed servers using the ServerView Installation Manager Locally on managed Windows based servers using the Windows Start menu This is only supported for servers on which the ServerView agents for Windows are installed iIRMC S4 387 Configuring via Server Configuration Manager On the remote workstation using the graphical interface of the Operations Manager This is only supported for servers on which the ServerView agents for Windows are installed This chapter in detail describes the various ways to call the Server Configuration Manager For details on the Configuration Manager dialog pages please refer to the online help of the Server Configuration Manager 388 iRMC S4 Configuring via Server Configuration Manager 9 1 Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the ServerView Installation Manager You can call the Server Configuration Manager from the ServerView Installation Manager Installation Manager for short Configuration via the Installation Manager is of significance when installing the server The Installation Manager makes the Server Configuration Manager available both during preparation for installation and as a separate maintenance program The Installation Manager is described in the manual ServerView In
264. mmand Line shell Start a SMASH CLP shell on page 380 Remote Manager See chapter iIRMC S4 via Telnet SSH Remote Manager on page 359 None gt Click Apply to activate your settings 286 iRMC S4 User Management SNMPv3 configuration The SNMPv3 configuration group allows you to configure the iRMC user for SNMPv3 Compared to SNMPv1 v2c SNMPv3 provides a higher level of security by authenticating and encrypting the SNMP packets e The parameters of the SNMPv3 configuration group are disabled grayed I out if the SNMP enabled option in the SNMP Configuration page is disabled see section SNMP Generic Configuration on page 268 e Enabling SNMPv3 for the user requires that the password configured for I this user has a minimum length of 8 characters Although the SNMPv8 standard allows you to configure SNMPv3 without authentication and without encryption noAuthNoPriv or with authentication but without encryption authNoPriv the SNMPv3 configuration group only allows you to configure with authentication and with encryption authPriv for security reasons see below SNMPv3 configuration SNMPv3 enabled 7 Access privilege readonly Authentication SHA Privacy DES Apply Figure 176 User Management User lt name gt Configuration page SNMPv3 configuration SNMP v3 enabled Enables SNMPv3 support for the user Access privilege
265. mponent Information Information on the server components on page 139 AIS Connect Configuring and using AIS Connect on page 142 System Report on page 147 Network Inventory on page 151 Driver Monitor on page 152 iRMC S4 133 System Information Information on the server 7 4 1 System Overview General information on the server The System Overview page provides information on the system status asset tag configuration system general information the operating system of the managed server system FRUs Field Replaceable Units IDPROM current overall power consumption of the managed server In addition the System Overview page allows you to enter a customer specific asset tag for the managed server ServerView PRIMERGY RX100 S8 FUJITSU Server View iRMC S4 Web Server Sw4 RX10088 System Overview E System Information System Status System Overview System Components Power LED Power On AIS Connect Error LED or System Report ess Len of Network Inventory Identify LEO ot Identity LED On Driver Monitor E iRMC s4 Asset Tag Configuration Power Management E Power Consumption System Asset Tag System Asset Tag E Sensors E Event Log Apply Server Management E Network Settings System Information 2 Alerting E User Management System Type PRIMERGY RX100 8 Chassis Type RX100S8R1 Serial YLNE000049 Video R
266. mputer you can access the Remote Manager Serial terminal program The Remote Manager Serial interface is identical to the Remote Manager interface see chapter iIRMC S4 via Telnet SSH Remote Manager on page 359 Prerequisites On the managed server The Serial Multiplexer BIOS setting must be configured on the iRMC see section Configuring the serial interface using of the iRMC S4 on page 53 Terminal program VT100 Configure the following port settings for the terminal program Bits per second Set the value to 38400 Data bits Set the value to 8 Parity Set the value to None Stop bits Set the value to Flow Control Set the value to None iIRMC S4 55 Configuring the iRMC S4 over the iRMC S4 web interface 3 4 Configuring the iRMC S4 over the iRMC S4 web interface gt Start the iRMC web interface see section Logging into the IRMC web interface on page 122 3 4 1 Configuring the LAN parameters gt Inthe navigation area click Network Settings see section Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters on page 250 Configuring the LAN settings gt Configure the LAN settings on the Network Interface page See the section Network Interface Settings Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC on page 251 for the settings required Configuring ports and network services gt Configure the ports and network services on the Ports and Network Services page See the section Ports a
267. ms 100 240 V 90 264V 47 63 Hz 10 ms Figure 121 Power Supply Info page 206 iIRMC S4 Power Consumption 7 9 Power Consumption The Power Consumption entry contains the links to the pages for monitoring and controlling the power consumption of the managed server Power Consumption Configuration Configure power consumption of the server on page 208 Power Options Configuring power management for the server on page 203 Not shown on all servers with iRMC Power History Show server power consumption on page 215 Not shown on all servers with iRMC iIRMC S4 207 Power Consumption 7 9 1 Power Consumption Configuration Configure power consumption of the server The Power Consumption Configuration page allows you to specify the mode the iRMC uses to control the power consumption of your PRIMERGY server ServerView FUJITSU ServerView iRMC S4 Web Server test Bae SW1 RX10058 Power Consumption Configuration E System Information Power Consumption Options sios F 5 irme S4 Power Control Mode Scheduled z R Power Monitoring Units Watt Power Consumption me Enable Power Monitor Z Consumption Opti a iiia Power History E Senzore E Event Log Server Management Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration Network Settings E aig Time 1 Mode 4 Time 2 Mode 2 Gonia Sunday OFS controlled OIS controlled
268. mware OPROM Interface Boot Vendor Device SubSys SubVen MAC IPv4 IPv6 Id d d me Version Version Speed Option id a id id Address Address Address o Onboard LAN 300 NA 1Gbis PXE LAN1 00 19 99 E2 43 94 E Power Management o o 4 Onboard LAN 300 NA 16b PXE LAN2 00 19 99 E2 43 95 E Power Consumption E Sensors E Event Log Server Management E Network Settings E Alerting E User Management E Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS E Virtual Media Logout Refresh U Figure 73 Network Inventory page iRMC S4 151 System Information Information on the server 7 4 7 Driver Monitor The Driver Monitor page provides status information on the drivers installed on your system ServerView System Information Driver Monitor Status System Overview System Components Status _ Unknown AIS Connect System Report Network Inventory Monitored Components Driver Monitor Status Designation Location E iRMC s4 x Intel R 1210 Gigabit Network Connection onboard E Power Management o ae E Power Consumption E Sensors OK InteKR 8 Series C220 Series SATA AHCI Controller 8C02 onboard E Event Log Serer Management FRON E Network Settings E Alerting E User Management E Console Redirection Video Redirection IWS E Virtual Media Lifecycle Management Intel R 1210 Gigabit Network Connection 2 onboard Logout Refresh
269. mware image with the most recent version is selected automatically Low FW Image The low firmware image is selected High FW Image The high firmware image is selected Select FW Image with oldest FW version The firmware image with the oldest version is selected Select most recently programmed FW The most recently updated firmware image is selected Select least recently programmed FW The least recently updated firmware image is selected Apply Sets the firmware selector to the option you have set under Firmware Selector iRMC S4 193 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Firmware Update from File The Firmware Update from File group allows you to update the iRMC firmware online To do this you must provide the current firmware image in a file on a remote workstation You will find the appropriate firmware image for your PRIMERGY server on ServerView Suite DVD 2 or you can download it under http support ts fujitsu com com support downloads html IRMC S4 Firmware Update from File Flash Selector High Firmware Image E Update File Browse Apply Figure 111 iRMC S4 Firmware Update page Firmware Update from File Flash Selector Specify what iRMC firmware is to be updated You have the following options Auto inactive firmware The inactive firmware is automatically selected Low Firmware Image The low firmware image firmware image 1 is selected
270. n Valid Valid From May 13 11 49 13 2014 GMT Valid To May 13 11 59 12 2034 GMT Issued To Common Name CN The Super Duper Admin Email Address Administrator superduper org SHA fingerprint b7 57 bf 60 c3 b6 6f 33 81 00 17 5f 15 a1 97 36 e1 6b 14 b3 MDS fingerprint 81 26 9 a 8a af e3 09 12 33 00 13 e3 31 19 b3 ed Certificate File Browse View Certificate Delete Figure 180 User Management User lt name gt Configuration page S MIME certificate View Certificate Delete Deletes the S MIME certificate from the iRMC 290 iRMC S4 User Management Email Configuration Configure user specific email settings The Email Configuration group allows you to configure the user specific settings governing the email format Email Configuration Email Enabled O Encrypted fa Mail Format sms Format z Prefered Mail Serwer Automatic Email Address Use02 domaincom Use extra SMS Email Subject E SMS Email Subject Paging Sewerity Configuration Fan Sensors warming gt Temperature Sensors warming gt Critical Hardware Errors ja System Hang Crtica POST Errors ja Security warming System Status None a Disk Drivers amp Controllers critical gt Network Interface warning gt Remote Management critical gt System Power warning gt Memory critical gt Other None gt Apply Test Figure 181 User Management User lt name gt
271. n Code 802800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first iRMC S4 451 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration 12 2 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration This section provides information on the following topics Howto use an SCCI ServerView Common Command Interface compliant interface for configuring the iRMC Scripted configuration of the iRMC 12 2 1 iRMC configuration data Please note that the interface described below is mainly for remote configuration and is not an SCCI implementation It only uses the SCCI command and configuration definitions and the SCCI file format 12 2 1 1 Overview The iRMC stores internal configuration data in separate sections of its NVRAM Non volatile RAM FTS specific ConfigSpace data which is addressed by the firmware via an internal description or mapping table Original manufacturer specific OMD NVCFG data which is accessed by offset definitions Some configuration data from the original OMD NVCFG data is internally mapped by the firmware to be accessible via ConfigSpace access methods For instance DNS servers and DNS configuration of the iRMC can be accessed both via IPMI OEM LAN configuration parameters and via ConfigSpace Both methods access the same low level data structures in the original NVCFG area Non iRMC specific ServerView software components e g the ServerView Agents or the Server Configuration Man
272. n Status Service Mode Relation Country Remote Session Policy Remote Sessions Active IS Connect aiaa PRIMERGY_IRMC_EMBEDDED_AGENT YLNE000089 Connected Enabled Warranty GERMANY Allow o ho Nenon Inventory Driver Monitor eee AIS Connect Management irme ss Disable AIS Connect Da eaa aai Sena Analysis rites Naw Power Management Le ronmeanenetan AIS Connect Configuration E Sensor Event Loa Use Proxy Z andienean Country GERMANY Network Setting Dauta Apply Test Connection User Management H Console Redirection Video Redirection WS AS Comeet Remota Sesion Virtual Mesia Deny Remote Sessions Disconnect Remote Sessions Fores Poll Lifeaycle Managemen i Currant can be m under Proxy Settings in ting D NOTE Current Proxy Settings proxy pdb fsc net 81 can be modified undi Seni Network Settings Figure 66 AIS Connect page iRMC S4 143 System Information Information on the server AIS Connect Status The AIS Connect Status group provides status information on the embedded AIS agent The value PRIMERGY iRMC EMBEDDED AGENT for Asset Model is fix for all PRIMERGY servers Relation indicates the mode in which AIS Connect is currently working Warranty Mode or Contract Mode The remaining values displayed in the AZS Connect Status group depend on the actions started and values configured in the AZS Connect page AIS Connect Status Asset Model Asset Serial Connection Status Service Mode Relation
273. nagement for the iRMC uses two different types of user identifications Local user identifications are stored locally in the iRMC s non volatile storage and are managed via the iRMC user interfaces Global user identifications are stored in the central data store of a directory service and are managed via this directory service s interfaces The following directory services are currently supported for global iIRMC S4 user management Microsoft Active Directory Novell eDirectory OpenLDAP OpenDJ This chapter provides information on the following topics User management concept for the iRMC User permissions Local user management on the iRMC For detailed information on the global user management using the individual directory services please refer to the User Management in ServerView manual iIRMC S4 59 Concept 4 1 User management concept for the iRMC User management for the iRMC permits the parallel administration of local and global user identifications When validating the authentication data user name password which users enter when logging in to one of the iRMC interfaces iRMC proceeds as follows see also figure 14 on page 61 1 2 The iRMC compares the user name and password with the locally stored user identifications If the user is authenticated successfully by iIRMC user name and password are valid then the user can log in Otherwise the iRMC
274. nd Network Services Configuring ports and network services on page 258 for the settings required Configuring DHCP DNS Dynamic DNS gt Configure the DHCP and DNS settings in the DNS Configuration page See the section DNS Configuration Configuring DNS for the iRMC on page 264 for the settings required 56 iIRMC S4 Configuring the iRMC S4 over the iRMC S4 web interface 3 4 2 Configuring alerting The pages for configuring alerting are grouped in the navigation area under Alerting see section Alerting Configure alerting on page 270 Configuring alert forwarding over SNMP gt Inthe navigation area click SNMP Traps The SNMP Traps page appears gt Configure SNMP trap forwarding See the section SNMP Trap Alerting Configure SNMP trap alerting on page 271 for the settings required Configuring email notification email alerting gt In the navigation area click Email The Email Alerting page appears gt Configure email alerting See the section Email Alerting Configure email alerting on page 273 for the settings required 3 4 3 Configuring text console redirection gt Configure text console redirection in the BIOS Text Console window See the section BIOS Text Console Configure and start text console redirection on page 319 for the settings required iIRMC S4 57 Configuring the iRMC S4 over the iRMC S4 web interface 58 iRMC S4 4 User management for the IRMC 4 User ma
275. nd or Boot Watchdog gt Ifyou have activated either of these options you can configure the following settings after Software Watchdog and or Boot Watchdog Continue No action is performed when the watchdog has expired i e the server continues to run An entry is made in the event log Reset The server management software triggers a system reset Power Cycle The server is powered down and immediately powered up again gt As appropriate enter the time in minutes after which this action is to be performed following after timeout delay The boot watchdog must wait until the system has been started You therefore have to specify a sufficient period for after timeout delay 1 100 gt Click Apply button The configured settings are saved and the actions which have been configured are performed in the appropriate circumstances 248 iRMC S4 Server Management Information Configuring the server settings HP System Insight Manager HP SIM Integration Options In this group you enable or disable HP SIM integration HP System Insight Manager HP SIM Integration Options V HP SIM Integration Enabled Apply Figure 153 Page Server Management Information SIM Integration Enabled Enables or disables HP SIM integration gt Click Apply to activate your settings System UUID Options The System UUID Options group allows you to configure the format in which the iIRMC device wil
276. nder Network Settings gt SNMP Figure 172 User Management New User Configuration page 282 iIRMC S4 User Management 7 15 1 2 User lt name gt Configuration User configuration details The User lt name gt Configuration page allows you to view modify and extend the settings for a user In figure 173 you can see the configuration of the user created in figure 172 i The user ID is shown in brackets after the user name System Information 5 BIOS E iRMc s4 E Power Management E Power Consumption E Sensors E Event Log CAS Configuration Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media E Lifecycle Management Refresh Name user5 Password sesssesessssesseesee Confirm Password Description NewUser Description LAN Channel Privilege Serial Channel Privilege Configure User Accounts Configure iRMC 4 Settings Video Redirection Enabled Remote Storage Enabled IGG User Shell Text Access Remote Manager y SNMPv3 enabled Access privilege resconly Note To ceste or modify a SNMPV3 user SNMP has to be enabled under Network Settings gt SNMP J Note For SNMPVv3 functionality minimal password length limitation 8 signs is compulsory Public Key file Keine Datei ausgew hlt wo Gmb
277. nds the retrieved data to standard output you can redirect or pipe it into additional processing or save the retrieved data with the o outputfilename HTTP access with Digest authentication the default iRMC admin account and saving o to report xml curl digest o report xml u admin admin http 192 168 1 100 report xml HTTPS Access with no certificate check k and Digest authentication and the default iRMC admin account curl digest k u admin admin https 192 168 1 100 report xml iIRMC S4 467 iRMC system report HTTPS Access with a LDAP user account Please note that for LDAP users you have to specify basic authentication since the authentication parameters need to be passed to the LDAP server for verification curl basic k u LDAPuser LDAPpassword https 192 168 1 100 report xml 12 3 1 2 Scripting with Visual Basic Scripting is also possible with Visual Basic The following VB script retrieves the report xml from the iRMC and saves it into a local file also named report xml IP_ADRESSE 192 168 1 100 USER_NAME admin PASSWORD admin FILE_NAME report xm ADDONS report xml On Error Resume Next Function SaveBinaryData FileName ByteArray Const adTypeBinary 1 Const adSaveCreateOverWrite 2 Dim BinaryStream Set BinaryStream CreateObject ADODB Stream BinaryStream Type adlypeBinary BinaryStream Open BinaryStream Writ
278. ne measurement is shown for each period of approx four hours every 120th measurement 168 values in all I month The measurements for the last 6 months One measurement is shown for each period of approx one day every 240th measurement 180 values in all I year Measurements for the last 12 months One measurement is shown for each two day period every 2880th measurement 180 values in all 5 years Measurements for the last 5 years One measurement is shown for each two day period every 2880th measurement 180 values in all iIRMC S4 217 Power Consumption Enable Power Monitoring Specifies whether power monitoring is to be carried out Power Monitoring is enabled by default This setting only applies to PRIMERGY servers that support consumption logging gt Click Apply to activate your settings gt Click Delete History to delete the displayed data Power History Chart Power History Chart shows the power consumption of the managed server over time in the form of a graph using the settings made under Power History Options The difference between the actual power consumption and the power consumption displayed in the power history chart may amount to about 20 Power History Chart Selected Period Min 108 Avg 115 Max162 Tue 06 Aug 2013 15 22 00 Power Min 114 Avg 114 Max122 Power Watt 14 45 14 50 14 55 15 00 15 05 15 10 15 15 15 20 15 25 15 30 15 35 15 40 Last 60 minutes dygraphs library
279. ng the PcSysScan exe from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 you can transform the generated XML file into a human readable HTML file as follows PcSysScan exe xmltransform report xml report html 148 iIRMC S4 System Information Information on the server 7 4 5 CPU Utilization History CPU Utilization provides data facilitating analysis of overall CPU usage for a selected time range The collected data are displayed in a chart which includes maximum minimum and average values of CPU load for single sample and for all samples in the full range of selected time scope CPU Utilization collects real data samples only when host system is on When the host is off data is simulated fake samples of value 0 are generated every 30 seconds CPU Utilization is only accessible for systems on which Node Manager supports CUPS functionality NM_SENS_CORE_CPUS FUJITSU ServerView iRMC S4Web Server CPU Utilization History Options CPU Monitoring Units Percent CPU History Period 1 month Enable CPU Monitoring Apply Delete History CPU History Chart 6 Selected Period Min 0 Avg 4 Max 100 Thu 07 May 2015 04 00 00 CPU Min 58 Avg 59 Max 60 Percent 80 60 40 Ki f 05 05 15 05 06 15 05 07 15 05 08 15 05 09 15 05 10 15 05 11715 05 1215 05 13 15 Last month dygraphs library htto dvaraphs com Copyright 2009 License Save History Figure 72 CPU Utilization History page
280. nhanced Speed Step option has been enabled in the BIOS setup If this is not the case a message to this effect is displayed If this message appears even though Enhanced Speed Step is enabled this may be because The CPU e g low power CPU of the server does not support scheduled power control The system is currently in the BIOS POST phase 210 iRMC S4 Power Consumption S ServerView User admin Logout FUSITSU ServerView Remote Management iRMC S4 Web Server M Deutsch H amp m SW41 RX300S8 Power Consumption Configuration System Information Power Consumption Options 5 Bios GH IRMC 4 Power Control Mode Scheduled lower Management Power Monitoring Units watt E Power Consumption Enable P Monitoring A Consumption Options Sere ee Current Consumption Power History Apply Sensors Event Log Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration Server Management Network Settings Time 4 Mode 4 Time 2 Mode 2 E Alerting Sunday o s controlled ol ors controlled S E User Management Monday D S controlled z O S controlled zj E Console Redirection Ti ___ es contona a o os contone BIOS Text Console C CE o avs contonea SSCS ides kaidi Wednesday D S controlled z D S controlled z Video Redirection JWS Thursday O S controlled K O S controlled z Virtual Media Friday D S controlled z OVS controlled z Logout Saturday O S controlled X O S controlled hh mm Mode 1 hh m
281. niLUN Firmware 04 CMD Command Group Firmware Selector 0 Auto Select firmware image with highest firmware version 1 low firmware image 2 high firmware image 3 Auto oldest version Select firmware image with oldest firmware version 4 MRP Select most recently programmed firmware 5 LRP Select least recently programmed firmware Response Data 24 04 Completion Code 436 iRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 20 05 Get Firmware Selector This command returns the current firmware selector setting Request Data Response Data 20 NetFniLUN Firmware 05 CMD Command Group Firmware 24 05 Completion Code Next Boot Selector 0 Auto Select EEPROM with highest firmware version 1 low EEPROM 2 high EEPROM 3 Auto oldest version Select EEPROM oldest firmware version 4 MRP Select most recently programmed firmware 5 LRP Select least recently programmed firmware Running Selector tells which firmware is currently running 1 low EEPROM 2 high EEPROM iIRMC S4 437 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC CO 19 Get Remote Storage Connection or Status Depending on the parameters passed this command returns information on whether any Remote Storage connections are available the status and type of any Remote Storage connection s If Request Data 1 is set to 1 the command returns
282. nshot is shown in a separate browser window Preview Screenshot This only appears if a video screenshot has been stored A thumbnail of the screenshot is shown in the ASR Screenshot group Make Screenshot Takes a new video screenshot Delete Screenshot This only appears if a video screenshot has been stored The video screenshot stored in the iRMC firmware is deleted after you have confirmed that you wish to do so iIRMC S4 325 Console Redirection Redirecting the console AVR Active Session Table Show current AVR sessions The AVR Active Session Table lists the currently active AVR sessions If no AVR session is currently active then the AVR Active Session Table is not displayed If two AVR Sessions are currently active a Disconnect button is displayed for each Session AVR Active Session Table IP User User User Session Session Address Name ld Type Type Privilege 192 168 0 175 admin 2 BMC User AVR OEM Disconnect 192 168 0 175 useri 3 BMC User AVR OEM Disconnect Figure 211 AVR Active Session Table two active AVR sessions Disconnect If you click Disconnect a confirmation dialog box appears in which you can close the AVR session to the left of the button You can only close AVR sessions of other users with the Disconnect button To close your own session choose Exit from the Extras menu in the AVR window see page 91 326 iRMC S4 Console Redirection Redirecting the console
283. nsumption y E Sensors E Event Log Server Management Always power off Always power on Restore to powered state prior to power loss E Network Settings onime oun E Alerting Sunday E User Management Monday esi shee RARAS Tuesday eo Redirection Virtual Media Wednesday Thursday Logout Friday Refresh Saturday hh mm hh mm Everyday 52 z 5 h 3 52 z 3 a Minutes in advance Apply i Note All power on off times need to be specified in 24 hour format Figure 118 Power Options page iIRMC S4 203 Power Management Power Restore Policy Specify behavior of the server after a power outage The Power Restore Policy group allows you to specify the server s power management behavior after a power outage Power Restore Policy Always power off Always power on Restore to powered state prior to power loss Apply Figure 119 Power Options page Power Restore Policy Always power off The server always remains powered down after a power outage Always power on The server is always powered up again after a power outage Restore to powered state prior to power loss The power up down status of the server is restored to the status prior to the power outage gt Click Apply to activate your settings The configured action will be performed after a power outage 204 iRMC S4 Power Management Power On Off Time Specify power
284. ntify LED of the RAID physical disk on which the logical drive resides iIRMC S4 163 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS 7 6 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS The BIOS entry contains the links to the following pages Backup Restoration Saving Restoring BIOS single parameter settings to from a file on page 164 BIOS Updating BIOS via upload from file or via TFTP on page 168 These pages are only displayed if the BIOS of the managed server supports the corresponding feature requirements 7 6 1 Backup Restoration Saving Restoring BIOS single parameter settings to from a file The Backup Restoration of BIOS Single Parameter Settings page provides you with the following options Back up single BIOS parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format and save the backup to a file Restore single BIOS parameter settings in ServerView WinSCU XML format from a file ServerView FUJITSU ServerView IRMC S4 Web Server Deutsch Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView Win SCU XML format Backup Filename PXi00S8Ri_V4654 R214 0_f Request BIOS Parameter Backup Request Bios i Note The baou D3228 A1x_20160729 pre Edit Filename meter Y performs a backup of BIOS parameters which will be stored locally by the IRMC S4 This feature may not be enabled for all server states p will occur after the next server reboot Restor
285. ntlog text newest last 2 Dump Internal Eventlog raw newest last 3 View Internal Eventlog Information 4 Clear Internal Eventlog 5 Change Internal Eventlog mode Enter selection or 0 to quit Figure 242 Remote Manager Internal Eventlog menu The sub menu contains the following functions View Internal Eventlog The contents of the internal event log are output to text newest last screen in a readable form and in reverse chronological order the most recent entry last Dump Internal The contents of the internal event log are dumped in Eventlog raw newest reverse chronological order the most recent entry last last View Internal Eventlog Display information on the internal event log Information Clear Internal Eventlog Clear the contents of the internal event log Change Internal Changes the buffer mode of the internal event log from Eventlog mode Ring Buffer mode to Linear Buffer mode and vice versa Table 18 Internal Eventlog menu iIRMC S4 377 Service Processor 8 11 Service processor IP parameters identification LED and iRMC S4 reset The following menu appears if you choose Service Processor from the main menu service Processor Menu 1 Configure IP Parameters 2 List IP Parameters 3 Toggle Identify LED 4 Reset iRMC 54 Warm reset 5 Reset iRMC 54 Cold reset Enter selection or 0 to quit it Figure 24
286. ntory ft Bios Certificate Creation E iRMc s4 iRMC 4 Information If you create a new RSA certificate and key all current https connections will be closed and the https server will be automatically restarted Depending iRMC 4 Time on the keysize this process can take up to 5 minutes and no iRMC S4 reset is required Save Configuration A EREN Certiticate Upload ammon Name CN i wlan575 qalal Generate Certificate Organization 0 IRMC 54 iRMC S4 Update Organization Unit OU E Power Management Country C Power Consumption State or Province ST Sensors sw1 1x300s8 City or Locality L Event Lo g Email Address Server Management E Network Settings Alerting E User Management Valid From Jul 26 13 10 08 2013 Valid For days 730 Console Redirection Key Length bits 1024 Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media Create Logout Refresh Figure 108 Generate a self signed RSA Certificate page 190 iRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Certificate Information and Restore The Certificate Information and Restore group allows you to view the currently valid DSA RSA certificate and or restore the default RSA DSA certificate View Certificate You can view the currently valid DSA RSA certificate using this button Default Certificate You can use this button to restore the default certificate delivered with the firmware after you h
287. nvironment provides a standardized interface for exchange of platform management information and for control across systems ICMB is designed in such a way that it can be implemented with a device that is connected to the IPMB IPMI implementation The core element of an IPMI implementation is the Baseboard Management Controller BMC The BMC performs the following tasks The BMC organizes the interface between the system management software and the platform management hardware Itprovides autonomous functions for monitoring event logging and recovery control The BMC acts as a gateway between the system management software and IPMB IPMI allows platform management to be extended Additional management controllers can be connected via the IPMB The IPMB is an I C based serial bus which runs between the main modules of the system It is used for communication with and between the management controllers With the support of multiple management controllers IPMI provides a scalable architecture A complex server system can use multiple controllers for monitoring different subsystems e g power supplies hot swap RAID drive modules etc In addition IPMI provides low level 1 C commands which can be accessed via a management controller connected to the IPMB on unintelligent 12C modules that cannot process IPMI commands An overview of the fundamental elements of an IPMI implementation is available in figure
288. o s4 osu s osuo SN ureysns ISA OSJO UOISSILUISd ISA OS LUSO JBNMUBS ISA OSJO yed Isa osuo jqeu doyp jonuou osuo jqeus doyp osuo AemayeTjoruou osuo femayeiTosjuso YSEW OAUOU Tosu yseuw osuo SSAIPPEHIOMJSU OAUOU OS LUSO SSeIppe yo mou puomssed wew sn dow x ow faw x x x xxx xj X X syunoso y Aue 73S albus X xX X as B07 yusng UOlOs IP UaAS uolduosepyus ns uonduoss piosues Suh ayep Jequunu ayeyspajqeus weu tou lt u gt sesn spunosoe semun dew 7 aaa aS X ues reser ree uasin X yawwog Table 23 Hierarchy of the CLP commands 385 iRMC S4 9 Configuring iRMC S4 using the Server Configuration Manager You can use the Server Configuration Manager to configure power consumption control via iRMC on the managed server configure power supply redundancy via iRMC on the managed server configure AVR title license key and other features on the iRMC configure iRMC time settings configure iRMC for providing virtual media configure iIRMC DNS registration configure iRMC DNS server configure iRMC Email alerting configure iRMC Email format settings configure iIRMC SNMP alerting configure local user management on the iRMC configure a directory server for the IRMC configure the CAS service on the iRMC i Require
289. of the overall system S ServerView User dmin Logout FUSITSU Server View Remote gement iRMC S4 Web Server Current System Power Consumption E System Information Current Overall Power Consumption BIOS IRMG 84 Current Minimum Peak Average Current Maximum E Power Management Power Power Power Power Power E Power Consumption Casiniption Options 142 Watt 112 Watt 124 Watt 114 Watt ee 860 Watt Current Consumption Power History Sensors Power Supply Power Distribution Current Current Total Power System Power SW1 RX300S8 Server Management No Designation E Network Settings Alerting 1 Psut Power 64 Watt rew ok User Management Console Redirection 2 Psu2z Power 48 watt s Sec oK Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media er Detailed Power Consumption Information ogou Current Current Total Power System Power 1 cPurPower 18 watt A 484412 Wat 16 OK 2 CPU2Power 22Watt i 22 442 Watt 19 OK 2 System Power 32 watt eal 32 412 Watt 28 OK Status Refresh No Designation Status 4 HDD Power OK 5 Total Power Out 80 Watt oor OK Figure 125 Current Power Consumption page 214 iRMC S4 Power Consumption 7 9 3 Power History Show server power consumption The Power Consumption History page charts the power consumption of your PRIMERGY server i This page is not shown on all PRIMERGY servers with iRMC
290. of the progress display to increase the randomness of the generated keys When the keys have been generated PuTTYgen displays the key and the fingerprint of the public SSHv2 key PuTTY Key Generator ile Key Conversions Help Key Public key for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file ssh tsa SSAABIN2aC1 ypc2EAASABIOAASIEAIUYihkeZty1 KoCblVABIDOOGXGiwal svRNODM AsHBiC7yi 2p2 344 Ikg6 Z9 9IkCSTLV 20u1 pJLAwCVID 7YCHesFUY 4Rw wKG 3hgp n3mGTNSziINt4NOsUgpynnF23mT Flh s1 3NIn522 99 4 5tvuurSlwp aqDIL Pj28E tsa key 20090807 Key fingerprint ssh tsa 1024 60 20 07 7d c4 ba 47 68 30 f2 c4 a8 cb 0c 77 43 Key comment rsa key 20090807 Key passphrase Confirm passphrase Actions Generate a public private key pair Generate Load an existing private key file Save the generated key Save public key Save private key Parameters Type of key to generate OSSH 1 RSA SSH 2 BSA OSSH 2 DSA Number of bits in a generated key 1024 Figure 17 PuTTYgen Creating a new private SSHv2 key progress bar gt Click Save public key to save the public SSHv2 key to a file You can upload the public key to the iRMC from this file see page 71 gt Click Save private key to save the private SSHv2 key to a file for use with PuTTY see page 73 68 iIRMC S4 Local user management for the iRMC S4 Creating the public and private SSHv2 keys with ssh keygen If itis not already pre installed in the
291. og page S ServerView Fujirsu i Home Deployment j Maintenance Information Help EH Configuration Mass Storage 1 SUSE Linux Enterprise Server SLES 10 3 Installation Info Applications 1 amp Summary Bootdisk Linux Controller raid PartitionSize 512 OperatingSystem Tyne SuSE Linux Enterprise Server V10 x 1386 Installation Media urlstpMocalhos Timezone Europe London ComputerName DHCP true Save the Configuration to File serstarbachaml SSS Note that this file on the server is used as a workfile and will be overwritten It should not be used for permanent storage Back Save Start Installation Cancel Figure 259 Installation Manager Installation Info If you have configured the local CD ROM DVD ROM drive of the managed server as the installation source proceed as follows at the remote workstation gt Clear your currently active virtual media connections For more detailed information on clearing virtual media connections see page 119 gt Remove ServerView Suite DVD 1 from the DVD ROM drive at the remote workstation iRMC S4 423 Installing the operating system gt Insert the Linux installation CD DVD in this DVD ROM drive i Close the application if autostart is active Connect the CD ROM DVD ROM drive containing the Linux installation CD DVD as virtual storage medium In the Installation Info page of the Installation Manager click Start instal
292. on for iRMC S4 users In addition to authentication by means of a user name and password the iIRMC S4 also supports SSHv2 based public key authentication using pairs of public and private keys for local users To implement SSHv2 public key authentication the SSHv2 key of an iRMC user is uploaded to the IRMC S4 and the iRMC user uses their private key with the program PuTTY or the OpenSSH client program ssh for example The iRMC supports the following types of public keys SSH DSS minimum requirement SSH RSA recommended The public SSHv2 keys that you upload to the iRMC can be available either in RFC4716 format or in OpenSSH format see page 78 Public key authentication In outline public key authentication of a user on the iRMC happens as follows The user who wishes to log into the iRMC creates the key pair The private key is read protected and remains on the user s computer The user or administrator uploads the public key to the iRMC If the configuration allows this the user can now log into the iRMC extremely securely and without the need to enter a password The user is only responsible for keeping their private key secret The following steps are necessary to set up private key authentication They are described in the subsequent sections 1 Creating the public and private SSHv2 keys with the program PuTTYgen or ssh keygen and saving them in separate files see page 67 2 Loading the public SSHv
293. on is sufficient i If you want to save the user settings Include User Settings you require ServerView PRIMERGY RX100 S8 FUJITSU ServerView iRMC S4 Web Server Deutsch SW1 RX100S8 syste torino Save iRMC S4 Firmware settings in ServerView Win SCU XML format BIOS S inc S4 iRMC S4 Information iRMC S4 Time m Save Configuration i inctude License Information Certificate Upload L Include SSL and SSH Certificate Generate Certificate Clan other Firmware settings iRMC 4 Update Power Management Swe SRSA I Power Consumption fini Import iRMC S4 Firmware settings in ServerView Win SCU XML format from file Event Log eer ie conta ie E Network Settings Alerting 2 User Management B Console Redirection Save iRMC S4 Firmware settings E include Network Settings El incude User Settings Upload Video Redirection HTMLS 2 Virtus Media I Lifecycle Management Refresh Figure 101 Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings page Save iRMC S4 firmware settings The data is exported from the iRMC in logical sections each corresponding to a selected option The option All other Firmware settings causes the firmware to export all current ConfigSpace values that have not already been exported together with another section New implemented values are automatically exported with newer firmware versions
294. on of the managed server O S controlled Power Consumption is controlled by the operating system of the managed server Minimum Power The iRMC controls the server to achieve the lowest possible power consumption In this event performance is not always ideal Scheduled The iRMC controls power consumption in accordance with a schedule see Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration on page 210 Power Limit The Power Limit Options group is displayed see Power Limit Options on page 212 Power Monitoring Units Unit of electrical power used to display power consumption Watt BTU h British Thermal Unit hour 1 BTU h corresponds to 0 293 Watt iRMC S4 209 Power Consumption Enable Power Monitoring If you enable this option power consumption is monitored over time This setting only takes effect on PRIMERGY servers that support power monitoring gt Click Apply to activate your settings Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration The Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group allows you to specify in detail the schedules and modes O S controlled Minimum Power Power Limit that the iRMC uses to control power consumption on the managed server The Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group only appears if you have enabled the power control mode scheduled in the Power Consumption Options group Configuration for scheduled power control mode assumes that the E
295. onsole redirection BIOS Console Redirection Options Console Redirection Enabled t IV Serial Port Baudrate 9600 X Serial Port Flow Control None X Terminal Emulation T100 lt Serial 1 Multiplexer System z Apply Figure 207 BIOS Text Console page BIOS Console Redirection Options Console Redirection Enabled This option allows you to enable disable console redirection The operating system can also permit text console redirection irrespective of the settings in the BIOS Serial Port Baudrate The following baud rates can be set 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Serial Port Flow Control The following settings are possible None Flow control is disabled XON XOFF Software Flow control is handled by the software CTS RTS Hardware Flow control is handled by the hardware Terminal Emulation The following terminal emulations are available VT100 7Bit VT100 8Bit PC ANSI 7Bit PC ANSI 8 Bit VT100 VT UTF8 320 iRMC S4 Console Redirection Redirecting the console Serial 1 Multiplexer Check the consistency of the multiplexer settings Serial System LAN iRMC gt Click Apply to activate your settings iRMC S4 321 Console Redirection Redirecting the console 7 16 1 2 Text console redirection while the operating system is running Depending on the operating system used on the managed server you can continue to use conso
296. onsole redirection or a SMASH CLP shell If you call the Remote Manager over SSH Secure Shell the connection between the Remote Manager and the managed server is encrypted Operation of the iRMC using the Remote Manager is described in chapter IRMC S4 via Telnet SSH Remote Manager on page 359 Remote Manager Serial Text based serial interface over Serial 1 The Remote Manager serial interface is identical to the Remote Manager interface iIRMC S4 23 Communication interfaces of the iIRMC S4 1 4 Font panel LEDs controlled by the iRMC The iRMC controls the status LEDs which are located on the front panel of the server The LEDs and the layout of how they are arranged differ depending on the server type Status LEDs on the front panel Nexperience design Status of the Server LED on the Server S5 LED green Power LED green AC OFF off off S5 shutdown on off SO power on off on S3 sleep mode off blinking with 1Hz BIOS controlled iRMC not ready on blinking with 0 5 Hz iRMC controlled Power on Delay on on Status LEDs on the front panel legacy design Status of the Server Power LED on the Server AC OFF off S5 shutdown orange SO green power on 3 blinking green with 1Hz sleep state BIOS controlled iRMC not ready blinking alternately in orange green with 1 Hz iRMC controlled Power on Delay yellow 24 iIRMC S4
297. opyright C 2012 American Megatrends Inc Console Redirection Serial 1 Figure 10 Console Redirection menu gt Make the following settings in the Console Redirection menu Console Redirection Set the value to Serial 1 In this case the terminal uses the first serial interface Baud Rate Specify the baud rate Protocol Leave this setting unchanged The setting depends on the terminal type used Flow Control The setting depends on the terminal type used The settings must be the same on both terminal and managed server Exiting the UEFI setup utility gt Save your settings and exit the UEFI setup utility gt Continue with ion Testing the LAN in 50 iRMC S4 Configuring text console redirection via LAN 3 2 2 Using console redirection while the operating system is running Depending on the operating system used on the managed server you can continue to use console redirection after the BIOS POST phase Windows Server 2008 2012 If activated during Windows installation console redirection is thereby automatically configured If console redirection is activated after Windows installation has completed you must configure console redirection manually Windows Server 2008 2012 handles console redirection automatically after the POST phase No further settings are necessary While the operating system is booting the Windows Server SAC console is transferred 140 100 100 231 RX200 S2 1 SP 140
298. or Power Regulation The iRMC attempts to adjust the power consumption to this value which is to be specified as a percentage of the maximum power consumption specified in the Power Limit field Tolerance Time Before Action Period in minutes the Power Limit needs to be exceeded Not until then the action specified in the Action Reaching Power Limit field will be performed Action Reaching Power Limit Action to be performed when the PowerLimit was exceeded for at least the period specified in the Tolerance Time Before Action field Continue No action is performed Graceful Power Off Shutdown Shut down the system gracefully and power it down This option is only supported if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC as Connected Immediate Power Off The server is immediately powered down irrespective of the status of the operating system Enable dynamic Power Control The power limit is controlled dynamically If this option is enabled the iRMC lowers power consumption of the server as soon as the Power Limit is exceeded The iRMC attempts to adjust power consumption to the level specified in the Target for Power Regulation field iRMC S4 213 Power Consumption 7 9 2 Current Power Consumption Show the current power consumption i This view is not supported by all PRIMERGY servers with iRMC The Current Power Consumption page shows the current power consumption of the system components and
299. ormation Information on the RAID systems Details Clicking on Details opens a new page which provides detailed information on the corresponding RAID physical disk S ServerView Link speed 1 5Gb s Max device speed 6 0Gb s Type HDD Vendor SEAGATE Product ST91000640SS Firmware version FTS3 Serial number SXG3ZNJF Physical size 1000 GB Logical Drives Power status Active Temperature 24 C Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtus Media Logout Refresh Figure 82 RAID physical disks details Locate Turns on the identify LED of the RAID physical disk iIRMC S4 161 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems 7 5 4 Logical Drives Information on RAID logical drives The Logical Drives page provides information on the each RAID logical drives on the managed server S ServerView E System Information System Overview System Components 2 Logical drive s on controller FTS RAID Ctrl SAS 6G 1GB 03116C 0 Drive Status Name Size RAID o Operstionsl 931 00 GB RAID6 Physical Disks 1 Operations 837 84GB RAIDS Details Logics Drives Drive Status Name Size RAID o Operational 1862 00 GB RAID 60 1 Operations 1675 69GB RAID 60 Details 2 Operational 278 88 GB RAID 1 Details Video Redirection JWS Virtus Media Logout Figure 83 RAID Information Logical Drives page 162
300. ormation on the status IDs CSS capability performance etc of the CPU s in the managed PRIMERGY server 140 iIRMC S4 System Information Information on the server System Memory Information This group provides information on the status IDs CSS capability and performance of the main memory modules in the managed PRIMERGY server Select Here you can select individual memory modules to which the action you select under Please select memory action from list is to be applied Select all Selects all memory modules Deselect all Cancels your selection Please select memory action from list This list which is only displayed in case of an error allows you to select an action to be applied to the selected memory modules The following actions are offered for selection Reset Error Counter Resets the error counter In the case of an iRMC or ServerBlade it is no longer necessary to explicitly reset the error counter because new modules are detected automatically with the error counter set to 0 Enable Module Enables the memory module Apply to the selected modules Applies the selected action to the selected memory modules View SPD Data No SPD Data Clicking the toggle button View SPD Data No SPD Data shows or hides vendor specific details Serial Presence Detect SPD data for the individual memory components The SPD data for a memory component is stored in an EEPROM integrated in the component and serv
301. ortant Do not upload your CA certificate with this method into the IRMC S2 Use upload from file instead Important After you have uploaded pasted the file s in the textbox below you need to restart the IRMC S2 manually Figure 107 Entering the DSA RSA certificate private DSARSA key directly Proceed as follows gt Copy the X 509 DSA certificate or the private DSA key to the input area You cannot simultaneously enter the certificate and key for the same upload gt Click Upload to load the certificate or the private key onto the iRMC gt Use the Remote Manager to reset the iRMC see section Service processor IP parameters identification LED and iRMC S4 reset on page 378 This is necessary in order to make a certificate or private key loaded onto the iRMC valid gt Click View Certificate to make sure that the certificate has been loaded successfully iRMC S4 189 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates 7 7 5 Generate a self signed Certificate Generate self signed RSA Certificate You can create a self signed certificate using the Generate a self signed Certificate page S ServerView Useradmin Logout FUSITSU Server View Remote Management iRMC S4 Web Server M beutsct naw Generate a self signed RSA Certificate E System Information Certificate Information and Restore System Overview System Components View Certificate Default Certificate Network Inve
302. orthe iIRMC S4 178 Save Configuration Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings 181 Certificate Upload Load the DSA RSA Certificate and private DSAIRSA Key s 4 442 42 eRe eRe EER Oe eRe 183 Generate a self signed Certificate Generate self signed RSA Certificate 02 190 iIRMC S4 Firmware Update 192 Power Management 25 2s sek ee Re eee ww we 197 Power On Off power the server up down 198 Power Options Configuring power management for the server 203 Power Supply Info Power supply and IDPROM data for the FRU COMPONEING sra Fee howe eee Ree SS SRT 206 Power Consumption 0000 252 ee eee 207 Power Consumption Configuration Configure power consumption of MESING 6668 65 6d OE DARKE CORK EDS EK G E SS 208 Current Power Consumption Show the current power consumption 214 Power History Show server power consumption 215 iIRMC S4 7 10 7 10 1 10 2 7 10 3 7 10 4 7 10 5 7 11 FAL TIZ GALS 7 11 4 7 12 7 13 7 13 1 7 13 2 7 13 3 7 13 4 13 6 7 14 7 14 1 7 14 2 7 15 15 1 7 15 11 7 15 12 Sensors Check status of the sensors 219 Fans Checkfans c caq nacta adane ee 220 Temperature Report the temperature of the server components 222 Voltages Report voltage sensor information 224 Power Supply Check power supply 06 225
303. ot Enter selection or 0 to quit i Figure 239 Remote Manager Power Management menu The sub menu contains the following functions Immediate Power Off Powers the server down regardless of the status of the operating system Immediate Reset Completely restarts the server cold start regardless of the status of the operating system Power Cycle Powers the server down completely and then powers it up again after a configured period Power On Switches the server on Graceful Power Off Graceful shutdown and power off Shutdown This menu item is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC S4 as Connected Graceful Reset Reboot Graceful shutdown and reboot This menu item is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iIRMC S4 as Connected Table 15 Power Management menu iIRMC S4 373 Enclosure Information 8 10 Enclosure Information System event log and status of the sensors The following menu appears if you choose Enclosure Information from the main menu Enclosure Information Menu te System Eventlog i Internal Eventlog it Temperature iv Voltages Current f Fans ip Power Supplies id Door Lock im Memory Sensors ic CPU Sensors i3 Component Status 1 List All Sensors Enter selection or 0 to quit ij Figure 240 Remote Manager Enclosure
304. oue AoD Figure 182 Directory Service Configuration page LDAP configuration 294 iIRMC S4 User Management LDAP Enabled This option specifies whether the iRMC can access a directory service via LDAP Directory service access via LDAP is only possible if LDAP Enable has been activated If LDAP Enable is checked then the login information see page 122 is always transferred with SSL encryption between the web browser and the iRMC LDAP SSL Enabled If you check this option then data transfer between iRMC and the directory server is SSL encrypted LDAP SSL Enable has no influence on whether or not the iIRMC web interface pages are SSL protected on opening You should only activate LDAP SSL Enable if a domain controller certificate is installed Disable Local Login If you activate this option then all the local iRMC user identifications are locked and only the user identifications managed by the directory service are valid CAUTION If the option Disable Local Login is activated and the connection to the directory service fails then it is no longer possible to log in at the iRMC Always use SSL Login il This option is only relevant if LDAP is deactivated If you activate this option then the HTTP SSL secured login page is always used even if LDAP is deactivated Only if you do not activate Always use SSL Login and LDAP is deactivated is a mask secured via Digest Authentication Login used
305. oup iRMC S4 297 User Management User Shell Text Access Select the desired user shell here The following options are available SMASH CLP See section Start a Command Line shell Start a SMASH CLP shell on page 380 Remote Manager See chapter iIRMC S4 via Telnet SSH Remote Manager on page 359 None LAN Channel Privilege Assign a privilege group for a LAN channel to the user here User Operator Administrator OEM Refer to section User permissions on page 62 for information on the permissions associated with the privilege groups Serial Channel Privilege Assign a privilege group for a serial channel to the user here The same privilege groups are available as for LAN Channel Privilege Configure User Accounts Permission to configure local user access data Configure iRMC S4 Settings Permission to configure the iRMC settings Video Redirection Enabled Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection AVR in View Only and Full Control mode Remote Storage Enabled Permission to use the Virtual Media functionality 298 iRMC S4 User Management lt Name gt Clicking a link in the Name column opens a new page allowing you to modify and or supplement the configuration settings of the corresponding LDAP user group LDAP User Group Name LDAPusergroup2 User Shell Text Access SMASH CLP LAN Channel Privilege Administrator Serial Channel Pri
306. oup The power limit then applies to all periods for which this power control mode is enabled in the Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group ServerView User admin Logout SW1 RX100S8 System Information BIOS i irme s4 Power Management E Power Consumption Consumption Options E User Management IRMC S4 User LDAP Configuration CAS Configuration E Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media E Lifecycle Management Refresh Power Consumption Configuration Power Control Mode Power Limit Power Monitoring Units Watt Enable Power Monitoring Apply Power Limit Options Power Limit 400 Watt Target for Power Regulation 80 Percent Tolerance Time Before Action 5 Minutes Action Reaching Power Limit Graceful Power Off Shutdown Enable dynamic Power Control 7 Apply Q Note Please make sure that you have enabled Enhanced Speed Step in the BIOS setup in order to use Power Consump n Control Q Note Graceful Shutdown as action after reaching power limit requires installed and running ServerView Agents 212 iIRMC S4 Power Consumption Power Limit Maximum power consumption in Watts When this is reached the action defined in the Action Reaching Power Limit field is performed When the threshold is exceeded a warning message is written to the iIRMC S4 SEL CPU Throttlink activated by Power Capping Target f
307. out In the case of a recovery flash the flash is performed for all three areas of firmware image 2 without any version check Initial Both active and inactive firmware are flashed Readme The Readme file is opened Reboot An iRMC S4 warm start is performed English German Specify keyboard layout German is set by default gt Start the required update variant by clicking on the corresponding button During the firmware update the console informs you about the progress of the update operation If an error occurs the update operation is aborted A corresponding return code is reported see page 410 gt Once the update operation has been completed click on Exit to close the FlashDisk menu gt Remove the USB memory stick from the managed server gt Restart the managed server e g with Ctrl Alt Del 406 iRMC S4 Emergency flash 10 4 Emergency flash If the iRMC S4 firmware can no longer be executed e g because the SDRs are not compatible with the system then you can use the emergency mode to start the firmware running again In emergency mode the system automatically branches to the bootloader and is the ready for the firmware update Emergency mode is indicated by the error LED global error LED red and the identification LED blue flashing alternately To switch the managed server to emergency mode and then update the iIRMC S4 s firmware proceed as follows gt
308. out i Note Repository Location can be modified under Update Settings i Note Start Update Process will cause system reboot Refresh v lt Figure 226 Offline Update page Roughly speaking the offline update comprises the following steps which are processed automatically 1 The iRMC downloads all necessary files in particular the eLCM offline update manager which is a slim version of the ServerView Update Manager Express and the local update repository onto the iRMC SD card 2 The iRMC creates a bootable CD ROM image from these components and mounts it as a virtual CD ROM device 346 iIRMC S4 Lifecycle Management 3 The iRMC shuts down the managed server and reboots the system from the mounted CD ROM device 4 The eLCM offline update manager which is a slim version of the ServerView Update Manager Express installs the firmware updates For a more detailed description see the manual ServerView embedded Lifecycle Management eLCM Starting an offline update always comprises the following steps 1 Preparing the offline update 2 Starting the offline update process Both steps which are described in detail below can be executed manually or scheduled Offline Update preparing and starting the offline update The Offline Update group allows you to prepare and start the offline update process i Update settings cannot be changed while an update is being executed Offline
309. owered on Ifthe managed server is powered on the server is to be rebooted Otherwise the restoration process will remain in state Boot Pending The managed server is powered off after the restoration has completed Clear Status Only available if a status is currently indicated under Restoration Status Clears the status information indicated under Restoration Status iIRMC S4 167 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS 7 6 2 BIOS Updating BIOS via upload from file or via TFTP The BIOS Update Settings page provides information on the current BIOS version on the managed server and allows you to update the BIOS via upload from file or via TFTP You will find the appropriate BIOS image for your PRIMERGY server on ServerView Suite DVD 2 or you can download it under http support ts fujitsu com com support downloads html S ServerView ear adman Tegan T FORTSU ServerView Remote Management iRMC S4 Web Server Deutsch Haas BIOS Update Settings it System Information BIOS Information BIOS Backup Restoration BIOS Version V4 6 5 4 RO 92 0 for D2939 B1x BIOS Update palabras BIOS Update from File E Power Management Power Consumption Update File Browse E Sensors Event Log Apply Server Management E Network Settings H Alerting i Note Only UPC files are supported for a BIOS update User Management BIOS TFTP Update Settings Console Redirection
310. pen a web browser on the remote workstation and enter the DNS name or IP address of the iRMC You can take the DNS name of the iRMC from the label on your PRIMERGY server The following login prompt appears xi Windows Security The server at iRMC S4 iRMCAZFA42 requires a username and password ms Figure 6 Login prompt for the iRMC S4 web interface If the login prompt does not appear check the LAN connection see section Testing the LAN interface on page 47 gt Type in the data for the default administrator account User name admin Password admin gt Click OK to confirm your entries The iRMC web interface opens showing the System Information page see page 133 iIRMC S4 41 3 Configuring the iRMC 4 The following tools are available for configuring the iRMC UEFI setup utility see page 46 iRMC web interface see page 121 Server Configuration Manager see page 387 This chapter provides you with information about the following topics Configuring the LAN interface of the iIRMC using the UEFI setup utility see page 46 Configuring text console redirection via LAN using the UEFI setup utility see page 48 Configuring the serial interface of the iRMC UEFI setup utility see page 53 Configuring the iRMC over the web interface for an overview see page 56 3 1 Configuring the LAN interface of the iIRMC S4 This section describes
311. perating system boots shutdowns fan failures and iRMC firmware flashes System Event Log Configuration Configure IPMI SEL and internal event log on page 238 Syslog Configuration configure syslog forwarding for SEL and internal event log on page 241 Colored icons are assigned to the various event error categories to improve clarity Informational Customer Self Service CSS event Table 8 System event log internal event log content error categories iRMC S4 231 System Event Log and Internal Event Log 7 11 1 System Event Log Content Show information on the SEL and the SEL entries The System Event Log Content page provides information on the IPMI SEL and displays the SEL entries The IPMI SEL contains entries providing information on events like operating system boots shutdowns fan failures and iRMC firmware flashes The CSS Event column indicates for each of the events whether the event was triggered by a CSS Customer Self Service component PRIMERGY RX100 SB FUJITSU ServerView iRMC 4 Web Server Deutsch 9 Re RX100 System Event Log Content Sateenintormstion System Event Log Information a it Lo Event Log Status 68 Entries of 485 Ring SEL Last Addition Thu 09 Jul 2015 08 00 68 AM Power Consumption Last Erase Mon 22 Jun 2015 12 11 14 PM Sensors E Event toa Clear Event Log Save Event Log IPMI SEL content Interna
312. ple please check a generated file 12 3 2 11 SensorDataRecords The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport h implementation Since an entry is quite long for an example please check a generated file 12 3 2 12 PCIDevices The iRMC does not have any direct access to PCI data and therefore can only report a limited subset on information This information is based on what the server BIOS has sent with the F119 OEM IPMI cmd and which can be retrieved with the F11A OEM IPMI cmd Sample Output see below lt PCIDevices Schema 1 gt lt Device gt lt ConfigSpace gt lt VendorId gt 1000 lt Vendor Id gt lt Deviceld gt 005B lt Deviceld gt lt SubVendorId gt 11D3 lt SubVendorId gt lt SubDeviceld gt 1734 lt SubDeviceld gt lt BaseClass gt Mass storage control ler lt BaseClass gt lt SubClass gt RAID control ler lt SubClass gt lt ConfigSpace gt lt Slot gt 4 lt Slot gt lt Device gt lt PCIDevices gt 12 3 2 13 SystemEventLog The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport h implementation Sample output see below lt SystemEventlog Schema 1 gt lt Entry gt lt Date gt 2014 02 05 16 48 13 lt Date gt lt Severi ty gt MINOR lt Severity gt lt ErrorCode gt 19000B lt ErrorCode gt lt Message gt DIMM 1B Non Fujitsu Memory Module detected Warranty restricted lt Message gt 474 iIRMC S4 iRMC system report lt Data Size 14 gt lt HexDump Lines 1 BytesPerLine
313. pply Figure 189 Microsoft Active Directory LDAP User Group Information For details see section Standard LDAP groups with authorization settings on the iRMC S4 on page 297 gt Click Apply to activate your settings 304 iRMC S4 User Management gt Configure the LDAP access data in the Directory Service Access Configuration group The settings that you make here are required for alerting in i connection with global user identifications If alerting is not enabled the settings in the Directory Service Access Configuration group are not significant Figure 190 Microsoft Active Directory Directory Service Access Configuration LDAP Auth User Name User name the iRMC uses to log onto the LDAP server LDAP Auth Password Password the user specified under User Name uses to authenticate themselves on the LDAP server Confirm Password Repeat the password you entered under LDAP Auth Password Test LDAP Access Checks the access data to the LDAP directory server and shows the LDAP status as the result see figure 191 e This test only checks the basic access data Is the LDAP server present Is the user configured but does not fully authenticate the user Directory Service Access Configuration LDAP Status LDAP Server invalid LDAP Auth UserName LDAPuserName LDAP Auth Password seessssesssannennnnn Confirm Password Apply Test LDAP ac
314. puter environments Provision of an architecture framework with uniform interfaces hardware and software discovery resource addressing and data models You can find further information on SMASH under the following link http www dmtf org standards smash SMASH CLP syntax SMASH CLP specifies a common command line syntax and message protocol semantics for managing computers on the Internet and in enterprise and service provider environments You can find detailed information on SMASH CLP in the DMTF document Server Management Command Line Protocol Specification SM CLP DSP0214 The general syntax of the CLP is as follows lt verb gt lt options gt lt target gt lt properties gt lt verb gt Verbs specify the command or action to be executed The list of verbs describes the following activities for instance Establish set and retrieve show data Change the status of a target reset start stop Manage the current session cd version exit Return information on commands help In iRMC systems the verb oemfujitsu also allows the use of special OEM commands iRMC S4 383 Command Line Protocol CLP lt options gt Command options modify the action or the behavior of a verb Options can immediately follow the verb in a command line and must always be introduced by a dash Options allow you to for instance define the output format permit recursive execution o
315. quired user permissions 7 2 Required user permissions The following table 5 provides an overview of the permissions which are required in order to use the individual functions available at the iIRMC web interface Functions in the iRMC web interface Permitted with Required IPMI privilege iRMC specific level permission Configure User Accounts Video Redirection Enabled Remote Storage Enabled Configure iRMC Settings Administrator Operator Open the System Overview page Switch identification LED on off XIXIXIX Set Asset Tag Configuration X Edit Operating System Informations xX Open the System Components page xX X X xX Reset Memory Error Counter X View SPD Data XIXIXIX Open edit the AZS Connect page XIX Open edit the SystemReport page xX X Open the Network Inventory page xX X X xX Open edit the Driver Monitorpage xX X RAID Information Open the RAID Controller page X X Open the Physical Discs page xX X Identify RAID physical disk Locate button x X View Physical Drives page xX X Table 5 Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface 124 iIRMC S4 Required user permissions Functions in the iRMC web interface Permitted with Required IPMI privilege iRMC specific level permission a 3 HBHRE Q s s o e lu e q lajs jul olg j o T
316. r Specify this file under CA Certificate File by clicking the associated Browse button and navigating to the file containing the CA certificate Click Upload to load the certificate and or the private key onto the iRMC When you upload the certificate and or private key all the existing HTTPS connections are closed and the HTTPS server is automatically restarted This process can take up to 30 seconds No explicit reset of the iRMC is required Click View CA Certificate to make sure that the certificate has been loaded successfully iIRMC S4 187 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Loading the DSA RSA certificate and private DSA RSA key from local files You do this using the group SSL Certificate and DSA RSA private key upload from file The private key and the certificate must be loaded on the iRMC at the same time SSL Certificate and DSARSA private key upload from file Note You may upload the contents of the base64 PEM encoded X 509 certificate and the base64 PEM encoded DSA RSA private key from local files Important Both files need to be uploaded at the same time After you have uploaded the files all current https connections will be closed and the https server will be automatically restarted This can take up to 30seconds and no iRMC S2 reset is required SSL Private Keyfile Browse SSL Certificate file Browse Upload Figure 106 Loading the DSA RSA certificat
317. r Management 7 15 1 1 New User Configuration Configuring a new user The New User Configuration page allows you to configure the basic settings for a new user You will find explanations of the fields and selection lists on the New User Configuration page as of page 284 under the description of the User lt name gt Configuration page In figure 172 you can see the configuration of a user with the name User5 ServerView User admin Logout FUJITSU RX100 FUJITSU S4 Web Server New User Configuration E System Information New User Configuration BIOS a irme s4 Name User5 E Power Management Aa zacenamenne E Poner consuroton Conti Passwort o O E Sensors 2 E Event Log User Description NewUser Description Server Management E Network Settings IPMI configuration E Alerting IPMI User Enabled 7 E User Management RMC 4 User LAN Channel Privilege User v Serial Channel Privilege User F LDAP Configuration CAS Configuration E Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Configure User Accounts Configure iRMC 4 Settings I Virtual Media Video Redirection Enabled Lifecycle Management Remote Storage Enabled Third Party Licenses User Shell Text Access Remote Manager SNMPv3 configuration Logout SNMPv3 enabled Fuki Access privilege Authorization Privacy Apply A Note To create or modify a SNMPv3 user SNMP has to be enabled u
318. r Management E Network Settings E Alerting User Management i NOTE Current Proxy Settings proxy pdb fse net81 can be modified under Proxy Settings in Network Settings E Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS virtual Media E Lifecycle Management Common Settings Online Update Offline Update Custom Image Primefallect Logout Refresh Figure 221 Common Update Settings page Repository Location URL of the update repository used for the eLCM update Default hitps support ts fujitsu com Use Proxy Specifies whether a proxy server should be used The proxy settings can be configured changed in the Network Settings Proxy Settings page see page 262 Apply Settings Applies your settings Default Repository Repository location is set to default Attps support ts fujitsu com Test Repository Connection Tests the connection to the repository 340 iIRMC S4 Lifecycle Management 7 18 2 Online Update Configuring the eLCM online update The Online Update page allows you to update BIOS and controller firmware while the server operating system is running On Windows systems it is also possible to update drivers supported by PSPs PRIMERGY Support Packages see the manual Local System Update for PRIMERGY Server for details ServerView User admin Logout FUSITSU PRIMERGY RX300 S8 FUJITSU ServerView iRMC S4 Web Server F Deutsch Bas ee
319. r a null modem cable see 3 3 1 Configuring the serial interface using of the iRMC S4 gt Call the UEFI setup utility of the managed server Do this by pressing F2 while the server is booting gt Call the Server Mgmt menu eS Setup ey poras C 2 American Megatrends Inc Security Pc Mem 00 ave amp it ial Multiplexer Serial Multiplexer System Figure 12 Server Mgmt menu gt Configure the following settings Serial Multiplexer Set the value to iRMC iIRMC S4 53 Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S4 gt Call the Serial Port 1 Configuration menu to configure the serial port Advanced Super IO Configuration Serial Port I Configuration Aptio Setup Utility Copyright C 2012 American Megatrends Inc Serial Port Enabled Figure 13 Serial Port 1 Configuration menu gt Configure the following settings Serial Port Set the value to Enabled Device Settings Displays the base I O address and the interrupt used to access the corresponding serial port e g O 2F8h IRQ 3 Accept the value pair proposed Exiting the UEFI setup utility gt Save your settings and exit the UEFI setup utility gt Continue with 54 iRMC S4 Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S4 3 3 2 Using the Remote Manager Serial interface If you connect a computer over a null modem cable and start a terminal program VT100 on this co
320. r establishing an AIS Connect connection see section AIS Connect Configuring and using AIS Connect on page 142 ServerView FUJITSU Server View iRMC S4 Web Server Deutsch Ha Proxy Settings PRIMERGY RX100 8 SW1 RX100S8 System Information Blos t iRMC 4 Proxy Server proxy pdb fsc net E Power Management ProxyPot a1 SSS Power Consumption e Proxy User E Sensors Password E Event Log Server Management Confirm Password E Network Settings Etheme Ports and Services Proxy Settings DNS SNMP Alerting User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media E Lifecycle Management Logout Refresh Figure 160 Proxy Settings page Proxy Server IP address of the Proxy server You can activate the Domain Name System DNS for the iRMC i see DNS Configuration Configuring DNS for the iRMC on page 264 You can then use a symbolic name instead of the IP address Proxy Port Port of the proxy service Default port number 81 262 iIRMC S4 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters Proxy User User name for authentication on the proxy server Password Password for authentication on the proxy server Confirm Password Confirm the password entered gt Click Apply to activate your settings iRMC S4 263 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters 7 13 4 DNS Configuration Config
321. r ports where the input fields are deactivated in the iRMC web interface 258 iIRMC S4 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters Ports for web based access Session Timeout Period of inactivity in seconds after which the session is automatically closed The login page of the iRMC web interface then appears and you can log in again as required see page 122 Your session will not automatically be closed if it is inactive when il the time specified in Session Timeout has elapsed if you enter a value for the refresh interval which is less than the Session Timeout in the Refresh every seconds field HTTP Port HTTP port of the iRMC Default port number 80 Configurable yes Enabled by default yes Communication direction inbound and outbound HTTPS Port HTTPS HTTP Secure port of the iRMC Default port number 443 Configurable yes Enabled by default yes Communication direction inbound and outbound Force HTTPS If you enable the Force HTTPS option users can only establish a secure connection to the iRMC on the HTTPS port specified in the entry field If you disable the Force HTTPS option users can establish a non secure connection to the iRMC on the HTTP port specified in the entry field If the SSL certificate has expired a message to this effect is issued in the browser Enable SSLv3 Allows an HTTPS session using SSL V3 Enable TLS 1 0 Allows an HTTPS session using TLS V1 0 Enable TLS 1 1 Allo
322. re Version 7 00F Base 7 00 F Firmware Date Jul 29 2013 08 05 37 CEST Firmware Running Low Firmware Image SDRR Version 3 17 ID 0342 TX140S2 Reboot iRMC S4 Figure 94 iRMC S4 Information page Firmware Information and iRMC reboot Reboot iRMC S4 Reboots the iRMC The Reboot iRMC S4 button is disabled during the BIOS POST phase of the managed server Active Session Information The Active Session Information group shows all the currently active IRMC sessions Active Session Information IP User User Session Session Session Remote Address Name ld Type Privilege Shell Port 217 9 101 18 admin 2 HTTP OEM Web GUI 1456 172 25 88 120 admin 2 IPMI1 5 Administrator IPM 1181 Figure 95 iRMC S4 Information page Active Session Information iIRMC S4 175 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates License Key The License Key group allows you to load a license key onto the iRMC License Key KYM i Your temporary license key is still valid for 698899 Days 23 Hours MEDIA Your temporary license key is still valid for 698899 Days 23 Hours eLCM j You do have a valid permanent license key installed Please enter any license key into the area below Upload Figure 96 iRMC S4 Information page License Key You require a valid license key to be able to use the iRMC functions Advanced Video Redirection see page 324 Virtual Media see page 332 and Lifecycle Management
323. reation and download corresponding to the settings configured under Perform archive creation amp download Clicking Deactivate stops currently processed archive creation and download if the creation process has not started yet PrimeCollect archives list The PrimeCollect archives list displays the list of available PrimeCollect archives PrimeCollect archives list No Choose Created File size File name Reference file 1 e Thu 11 Sep 2014 02 06 09 PM 2 90 MB Ref_PrimeCollect_Archive_20140911_1404 zip Yes Set ss referenced Delete Download Figure 233 PrimeCollect page PrimeCollect archives list Set as referenced Marks the currently selected archive as the reference archive If the list contains only one archive this archive will automatically serve as the reference archive Delete Deletes the selected archive from the list Download Opens a file browser dialog allowing you open or save the selected archive 358 iRMC S4 8 IRMC S4 via Telnet SSH Remote Manager A Telnet based interface is available for the iRMC This is known as the Remote Manager You can call the Remote Manager over any Telnet SSH client The iRMC supports secure connections over SSH Secure Shell The Remote Manager interface is identical for Telnet and SSH connections In principle any Telnet SSH client that interprets VT 100 sequences can be used to access the iRMC It is nevertheless recommended that the iRMC S4 web
324. reen LED symbol instead of the status icon is shown in the leftmost column of the Component Status page If a server component has no LED the Identify button is grayed out and labeled No LED Identify Off Lights off the LED that is attached to the related sever component The LED s label turns to Identify The green LED symbol in the leftmost column of the Component Status page disappears and the status symbol is shown again Entries with Designation iRMC Agent BIOS or VIOM Entries with the Designation iIRMC Agent BIOS or VIOM indicate that the iRMC the agent the BIOS or VIOM has detected an error It does not mean that the iRMC the agent the BIOS or VIOM itself is defective Entries with Designation HDD and HDD lt n gt PCleSSD lt n gt agentless HDD monitoring out of band HDD monitoring Entries with the Designation HDD or HDD lt n gt or PClsSSD lt n gt with n 0 1 2 indicate the statuses of Hard Disk Drives HDD or Solid State Disks SSD HDD SSD component status is only displayed if ServerView RAID is installed The entry with Designation HDD indicates the overall HDD status of the server by summarizing the statuses of the individual HDDs The overall HDD status of the server is read and reported to the iRMC by the ServerView agents and the ServerView RAID Manager An entry with Designation HDD lt n gt or PCleSSD lt ns gt with n 0 1 2
325. reset 0x16 Reboot after warm start Ox1A Powered on by a PCI Bus Power Management Event 0x1D Powered on by remote control via remote manager Ox1E Reboot reset by remote control via remote manager 428 iRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 01 16 Get Power Off Source This command returns the reason for the most recent Power Off The possible reasons are listed below Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group 01 Cmd Command Group Communication 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 16 Command Specifier Response Data BC 01 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 01 Data Length Power off Source Cause of last power off Power off Description Source 0x00 Software SWOFF power off by command 0x01 Power switch on the front panel or keyboard 0x02 AC power fail 0x03 Clock or timer hardware RTC or software timer 0x04 Fan failure 0x05 Critical temperature 0x08 Final power off after repeated watchdog timeouts 0x0C Final power off after repeated CPU errors 0x1D Powered off by remote control via remote manager iRMC S4 429 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 01 1C Set Power Off Inhibit This command sets the Power Off Inhibit flag which temporarily suppresses any unfounded attempt to power down the server If the Power Off Inhibit flag is set the firmware saves the cause of any at
326. rganized as a linear buffer When the linear event log has been completely filled it is not possible to add any further entries Apply Activates your settings Default Internal Eventlog display filtering Display Critical Display Major Display Minor Display Info Here you select one or more severity levels for which event log entries should be displayed by default on the on the Internal Event Log Content page see page 235 Ring Buffer The event log is organized as a ring buffer Linear Buffer The event log is organized as a linear buffer When the linear event log has been completely filled it is not possible to add any further entries Apply Activates your settings iRMC S4 239 System Event Log and Internal Event Log Helpdesk Information Helpdesk Information Helpdesk Helpdesk Apply Figure 143 Helpdesk Information Help desk String used to display the Help Desk Apply Activates your settings Add Service Notice In the text field of the Add Service Notice group you can enter a service notice which will be stored in the Internal Event Log of the iRMC Add Service Notice Apply Figure 144 Helpdesk Information Apply Activates your settings 240 iRMC S4 System Event Log and Internal Event Log 7 11 4 Syslog Configuration configure syslog forwarding for SEL and internal event log On the Syslog Configuration page you can configure syslog forwarding
327. rice CAS Copyright 2005 2007 JA SIG All rights reserved JA SIG Central Authentication Serice Figure 201 Centralized Authentication Service CAS Configuration iRMC S4 313 User Management CAS Generic Configuration The CAS Generic Configuration group allows you to configure CAS access data CAS Generic Configuration CAS Enabled Enable SSL HTTPS V Verify SSL Certificate Always Display Login Page t M CAS Network Port 3170 CAS Server 0 0 0 0 CAS Login URL cas login CAS Logout URL cas logout CAS Validate URL casvalidate Assign permissions from E Permissions retrieved via LDAP Local ass dp issions Eni Permissions retrieved via LDAP Figure 202 CAS Generic Configuration CAS Enabled Enables SSO using the CAS service that you specify in the CAS Generic Configuration group Enable SSL HTTPS All communication between the CAS service and the iRMC is SSL encrypted Verify SSL Certificate The SSL Certificate of the CAS service is checked against the CA Certificate 314 iIRMC S4 User Management Always Display Login Page If Always Display Login Page is disabled and the CAS service cannot be reached type 1ogin after the IP address of the iIRMC in your browser s navigation bar Always displays the iRMC login page Login required to continue iRMC S4 Login CAS Login Figure 203 Login page
328. rl SAS 6G 1GB D3116C Serial number 0000000042053449 SAS address 5002005701132280 PCI Vendor and Device Id 1000 0058 Sub Vendor and Device Id 1724 11E4 Driver version megasss2 sys 6 505 05 00 Firmware package version 22 9 0 0023 Patrol Read Stopped Completet Patrol Read iterations 1 Alarm present Yes SMART support Enabled Coercion mode None NVRAM size 32 KB Memory size 1024 MB FlashROM size 16 MB Correctable errors 0 Uncorrectable errors 0 Temperature 74 C Figure 76 RAID controller details iIRMC S4 155 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems 7 5 2 Enclosures Information on RAID enclosures The RAID enclosures information page provides information on each RAID enclosure on the managed server RAID enclosure ETERNUS JX40 ServerView User admin PRIMERGY RX2520 M1 FUJITSU Server View iRMC S4 Web Server Mpeutsch Bas RAID enclosure information Enclosure s on controller LSI MegaRAID SAS 9286CV 8e 0 System Information E RAID Information Controller No Port Chain Vendor Product Partnumber Serial number Hardware version Enclosures Physical Disks 4 0 4 FUJITSU ETERNUS JX40 CA07217 C871 wWK12090174 AA Details Logical Drives Bios E inc S4 E Power Management Power Consumption E Sensors E Event Log Server Management E Network Settings E Alerting User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media Lifecycle Mana
329. rs None X Temperature Sensors None Critical Hardware Errors None z System Hang None z POST Errors None Security None X System Status None z Disk Drivers amp Controllers None X Network Interface None z Remote Management None System Power None Memory None Other None X Apply Figure 149 Syslog Configuration page Syslog filtering options Extended settings iRMC S4 243 System Event Log and Internal Event Log Filtering scope Determines the filtering granularity Basic Basic filtering which does not distinguish between the individual server components special events etc Message severity INFORMATIONAL MINOR MAJOR CRITICAL Here you select one or more severity levels for which event log entries should be forwarded to syslog see page 235 Extended Filtering can be configured separately for each the following component level or system specific event types Fan Sensors Temperature Sensors Critical Hardware Errors System Hang POST Errors Security System Status Disk Drivers amp Controllers Network Interface Remote Management System Power Memory and Other For each event type the following options are available None No event is forwarded Critical Only events with status Critical are forwarded Warning Only events with status Critical or Warning are forwarded All All events are forwarded gt Click Apply to activate your sett
330. rst 1D Command Specifier Response Data BC 01 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first 01 Response Data Length Power Off Inhibit Flag 0 no Inhibit 1 Inhibit iIRMC S4 431 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 01 20 Set Next Power On Time This command switches on a system at the given time independent of the stored On Off times in the Configuration Space i The command takes effect only once You cancel a Power On time previously set with a 01 20 command by specifying the Power On time 0 in a subsequent 01 20 command Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group 01 Cmd Command Group Communication 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first 20 Command Specifier 00 Object ID 0000 Value ID 04 Data Length Time LSB first see below Response Data BC 01 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first Time LSB first Time UNIX specific format when the system switches on again Time is NOT stored in non volatile memory Resolution is 1 minute After the system has switched on Time is set to 0 internally If Time 0 the system is not switched on 432 iRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 12 1 2 3 SCCl compliant communication commands Die SCCl compliant communication commands require that the Agent Service is running under the OS To execute the
331. rted by the iRMC The SCCI commands supported by the iRMC are shown in table 25 SCCI OpCode SCCI Command String Description OxE002 ConfigSpace ConfigSpace Write 0x0111 PowerOnCabinet Power On the Server 0x0112 PowerOffCabinet Power Off the Server 0x0113 PowerOffOnCabinet Power Cycle the Server 0x0204 ResetServer Hard Reset the Server 0x020C RaiseNMI Pulse the NMI Non Maskable Interrupt RequestShutdownAndOff Graceful Shutdown requires running 0x0205 Agent 0x0206 RequestShutdownAndReset Graceful Reboot requires running Agent 0x0209 ShutdownRequestCancelled Cancel a Shutdown Request 0x0203 ResetFirmware Perform a BMC Reset ConnectRemoteFdlmage Connect or Disconnect a Floppy Disk 0x0250 image ona Remote Image Mount NFS or CIFS Share 0x0251 ConnectRemoteCdlmage Connect or Disconnect a CD DVD iso image ona Remote Image Mount NFS or CIFS Share 0x0252 ConnectRemoteHdlmage Connect or Disconnect a Hard Disk image ona Remote Image Mount NFS or CIFS Share Table 25 SCCI commands supported by the iRMC 460 iRMC S4 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration 12 2 2 2 Scripting with cURL The open source command line tool CURL allows you to transfer data specified with URL syntax You can download the latest version of the source code as well as precompiled versions for different operating systems from ttp curl haxx se The following are
332. rted by theiRMC 460 Sonpting wih GURL gt esa nesens ed we Qa eee wd 461 Scripting with Visual Basic VB Script 462 Scripting with Python s es s saoe aos a poaae aan 463 Generating encrypted passwords with iRMC_PWD exe 464 iRMC system report asasan anaana 467 Scripted download and automatic evaluation of the iRMC report 467 SCHUM wih CURL se sa hoe oe RR oe Rw SR a amp 467 Scripting with Visual Basic i i lt a aowe sare aw eS ww 468 Information Sections s s r 60 oe eae ee ae kesa 469 List of supported System Report sections inthe XML 469 Summary SECON oc 4 ee eee SR eRe RR HE a 469 BIOS 224 eee RE REE HEHE OC bA 6 EG aww DES 470 PIOCRSSe fh MGR Dee oe Pee eS ae aE eS 471 MOMO 62644646 o hd bor 2 Hd eo ae SEG 471 Pane p a dk 6 ak Wd be RE AS ee Ee 472 TEMPA bd hk ea a Bk ke a a eS eG 472 Power Supplies 4 5 54 0 8442 esa we ede teka 473 MAES oat g g Hk a eh Ga RS ee a Se HL 473 IDPROMS 2 e Sdec 2 S68 Bi 8 OSH CB Dae Se 4 474 SensorlstaRecords o o ae i be ee Rho DES HO eH ws 474 POIDS aaaea Bee CASS ERE ESE wo ESS 474 SystemEvemtLog ai p s e Be SOG oe Pw Sar HH wh 474 IMEINAIEVENILOG oai r ae FO HSS RKO PRES OR EGS 475 BOOSE 4 6 e444 2 eo MOSER Ge OO4 Ook ee ds 475 ManagementControllers 2 476 iIRMC S4 1 Preface Modern server systems are becoming increasingly complex The requirements with respect to the management of such systems are growing accordingly
333. rverView Update Manager you can start the update of the iIRMC S4 firmware via a graphical user interface or via a command line interface Windows and Linux The ServerView Update Manager accesses the update data via its Update Repository on the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or on the management server You update the update repository on the management server by means of the Download Manager or by performing a manual download from the Download section of the Fujitsu Technology Solutions web server For more detailed information on firmware updates with the ServerView Update Manager see the ServerView Update Manager manual 10 3 3 Online update using ServerView Update Manager Express or ASP Under Windows and Linux operating systems you can update the iRMC firmware either using the graphical user interface of ServerView Update Manager Express or by using the ASP Autonomous Support Package command interface Under Windows you can also start an ASP in the Windows Explorer by double clicking the corresponding ASP exe file When downgrading the firmware please note Downgrade via Update Manager Express The firmware downgrade is only feasible in the Expert mode In addition the Downgrade option must be activated Downgrade via ASP Windows You can perform the downgrade if you start the ASP by double clicking the corresponding exe file When starting the ASP via the CLI you must explicitly specify the Force yes op
334. rview System Components USB Attach Mode Always Attach Nesvoleinvenitony Number of Floppy Devices 2 Number of CD DVD Devices 2 2 E iIRMC 4 E Power Management Power Consumption Enable Boot Once Support Number of Harddisk Devices E Sensors Enable Remote Image Mount Event Log Enable SD Card Support 7 Server Management E Network Settings EE Alerting E User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS E Virtual Media Media Options A Note If you change any of these settings all remote storage services will be restarted and connected devices will be disconnected Logout Refresh Lee a ee Figure 217 Virtual Media Options page USB Attach Mode Attach mode of the virtual media The following modes are offered for selection Always Attach The virtual media is always attached to the server Auto Attach The virtual media is attached to the server only when a virtual media session is started Number of Floppy Devices Maximum number of Floppy devices that may be used in a Virtual Media session 0 to 4 Floppy devices can be configured Default 0 Number of CD DVD Devices Maximum number of CD DVD devices that may be used in a Virtual Media session 0 to 4 four CD DVD devices can be configured Default 2 iRMC S4 333 Virtual Media Number of Harddisk Devices Maximum number of hard disk devices that may be used in a Virtual Media ses
335. s function is disabled in the following cases even if the local monitor is switched off you are in view only mode A high resolution graphics mode is set on the managed server see table 3 on page 80 Local monitor lt status gt display Local Monitor always off iIRMC S4 91 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Turn OFF Host Display Switches off the local monitor of the managed server depending on whether this option is selected deselected If you are in view only mode this function is disabled even if the local monitor is switched off Low Bandwidth Mode In the case of a reduced data transfer rate you can configure here a lower bandwidth bits per pixel bpp in terms of color depth for your all AVR sessions at the same iRMC Normal Default No lower bandwidth 8 bpp 8 bpp color depth 256 colors amp bpp B amp W 8 bpp black amp white depth 256 levels of gray 16 bpp 16 bpp color depth 65 536 colors Capture Screen Makes a screenshot of the AVR view and opens a file browser that allows you to store the related CapturedScreen jpeg file in any directory of your work station or on a network share The same functionality is also available via the Advanced Video Redirection page of the iRMC Web interface see Creating an ASR screenshot on page 325 Full Screen Enables disables Fullscreen mode This option is only enabled if screen resolution on the remote workstation equals
336. s virtual media devices see chapter Virtual Media Wizard on page 111 Video Keyboard Mouse Options Power Control Active Users Help OO amv Figure 41 AVR window Media menu Virtual Media Wizard Click Virtual Media Wizard to start the Virtual Media wizard allowing you to attach or detach media on the remote workstation as virtual media devices see chapter Virtual Media Wizard on page 111 5 2 7 6 AVR window Power Control menu The Power Control menu allows you to power the server up down or to reboot the server Beyond that you can configure the behavior of the server during the next boot operation 102 iIRMC S4 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Video Keyboard Mouse Options Media Active Users Help Power On 00 w 080 Immediate Power Off Power Cycle Press Power Button Immediate Reset Pulse NMI Graceful Reset Reboot Graceful Power Off Shutdown Set Boot Options Figure 42 AVR window Power Control menu Power On Switches the server on Immediate Power Off Powers the server down regardless of the status of the operating system Power Cycle Powers the server down completely and then powers it up again after a configured period You can configure this time in the Power Cycle Delay field of the ASR amp R Options group see page 246 Press Power Button Depending on the operating sys
337. screen resolution on the managed server 92 iIRMC S4 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Start Video Creates a video recording the events that are displayed on the monitor at the managed server i This button is disabled in the following cases You have not yet configured the video settings under the Settings option see below A video recording is currently running Stop Video Stops video recording This option is only enabled when a video recording session is currently running Settings Opens the Video Record dialog box allowing you to configure the settings required for recording a video a Video Record Video Length 60 Seconds Video to be Saved DA vMedia Browse K V Normalized video resolution to 1024 X 768 This might reduce the video quality Cancel Figure 33 Video record settings Video Length Duration of the video in seconds Browse Opens a browser dialog allowing you to navigate to a directory on your computer or on a network share where the video should be stored Video to be Saved Shows the directory you have selected via Browse iRMC S4 93 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Normalized video resolution to 1024x768 In this case a separate video file will be created for each resolution change on the monitor of the managed server If this option is enabled a normalized video resolution of 1024x768 is applied to the overall video output
338. se encryption resize window size to fit your needs and set the language in which the menus and dialog boxes of the AVR window are to be shown Video Keyboard Mouse Options Media Power Active Users Help T Keyboard Mouse Encryption w Ol Window Size GUI Languages gt Figure 40 AVR window Options menu D Actual Size Fit to Host Resolution You can select the following functions in the Options menu Keyboard Mouse Encryption Enables disables keyboard mouse encryption i e your keystrokes and mouse Clicks will be encrypted in real time before being transferred to the managed server This option is not offered for selection if you are connected to the i iRMC web interface over an HTTPS connection In this case all communication between the iRMC web interface and managed server is SSL encrypted 100 iIRMC S4 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Window Size Specifies whether the size of the AVR window is to be shown in its actual size or adapted to the resolution of local monitor of the managed server or to the monitor resolution on the remote workstation Actual Size AVR window is expanded to full monitor size Fit to Client Resolution This option is only enabled if screen resolution on the remote workstation is lower than or equal to screen resolution on the managed server If screen resolution on the remote workstation and on the i managed
339. see page 339 The license key for Lifecycle Management is always purchased together with the iRMC SD card You can purchase the license key The license key for Lifecycle Management is always purchased together with the iRMC SD card Upload When you click this button the license key specified in the input field is loaded onto the iRMC Miscellaneous iRMC S4 Options The Miscellaneous iRMC S4 Options group allows you to make settings for the layout of the iRMC web interface Miscellaneous iRMC S4 Options Default Language l English X Temperature Units Degree Celsius X Color Schema Style Guide Version 2 2 X M Show Video Redirection Java Web Start in Navigation M Show Logout in Navigation O Enable Automatic Apply Apply Figure 97 iRMC Information page Miscellaneous Options 176 iIRMC S4 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates Default Language Specifies the language German English Japanese that is set as default the next time the iRMC web interface is called Temperature Units Specifies the unit used for displaying temperature values at the iRMC web interface degrees Celsius degrees Fahrenheit This setting applies for the current session and is preset the next time the iRMC web interface is called Color Schema Specifies the color scheme for displaying the iRMC web interface This setting applies for the current session and is preset the next time the iI
340. server from ServerView Suite DVD 1 and configuring it with the Installation Manager Proceed as follows at the remote workstation gt Use the iRMC web interface to start up the managed server or reboot the server See page 201 You can follow the progress of the boot process in the AVR window During the managed server s BIOS POST phase virtual storage media are displayed as USB 2 0 devices Virtual storage media are represented by the following entries in the BIOS boot sequence A physical floppy disk is represented by a separate entry FTS RemoteStorage FD USB 2 0 All other virtual storage device types are represented by the shared entry CD ROM DRIVE If a local CD ROM DVD ROM drive and a CD ROM DVD ROM drive connected as virtual media are both present at the managed server then the managed server boots from the CD ROM DVD ROM drive provided via Virtual Image gt Press F2 while the server is booting gt Inthe UEFI set up open the menu Boot in which you can define the boot sequence gt Specify Boot Priority 1 highest priority for the ServerView Suite DVD 1 which is connected as virtual storage medium gt Save your settings and exit the UEFI setup The managed server then boots from ServerView Suite DVD 1 which is connected as virtual storage If the system does not boot from the virtual storage medium ServerView Suite DVD 1 or Installation Manager boot image gt Check whet
341. ses primarily on the handling of the virtual storage media It is assumed that readers are familiar with the Installation Manager functionality see the manual ServerView Installation Manager iRMC S4 The iRMC s LAN interface must be configured see page 43 i Prerequisites for the remote installation of the operating system via The license key for the use of the iRMC functions Advanced Video Redirection AVR and Virtual Media must be installed see page 176 iRMC S4 413 General procedure 11 1 Installing the operating system via iRMC S4 general procedure For the Installation Manager the remote installation of the operating system via iRMC represents a local configuration and installation of the operating system on the managed server which you perform from the remote workstation via the AVR window using virtual media The following steps are required in order to perform an installation via the Installation Manager 1 Connect the virtual storage medium DVD or Installation Manager boot image from which you want to boot as virtual storage medium 2 Boot and configure the managed server via DVD or the Installation Manager boot image 3 Use the Installation Manager at the remote workstation to install the operating system on the managed server Installing Windows without the Installation Manager using the Windows installation CD DVDs You can perform a remote installation of Windows
342. setup utility of the managed server Do this by pressing F2 while the server is booting gt Call the iRMC LAN parameter configuration menu Server Mgmt iRMC LAN Parameters Configuration Aptio Setup Utility Copyright C 2011 American Megatrends Inc Management LAN Enabled Figure 8 iRMC LAN Parameters Configuration Menu 46 iRMC S4 Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S4 gt Configure the following settings Management LAN Set the value to Enabled Management LAN Port The Management setting is recommended For details on configuring the remaining settings see section i Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters on page 250 and or refer to the manual BIOS Aptio Setup Utility manual corresponding to your server gt Save the settings gt If you want to use console redirection on the iRMC continue with section Configuring text console redirection for the iRMC S4 on page 49 If you do not want to use text console redirection on the iRMC exit the UEFI setup and continue with the next section Testing the LAN interface 3 1 4 Testing the LAN interface You can test the LAN interface as follows gt Use a web browser to attempt to log into the iRMC web interface If no login prompt appears it is probable that the LAN interface is not working gt Test the connection to the iRMC with a ping command iIRMC S4 47 Configuring text console redirection via LAN 3
343. sh You can log in either under your current local login or under a different login The login must have been configured as a local login on the iRMC and the associated SSHv2 key must have been loaded on the iRMC S4 ssh reads its configuration options in order from the following sources 1 Command line arguments that you specify when calling ssh 2 User specific configuration file SHOME ssh config 76 iIRMC S4 Local user management for the iRMC S4 Although this file contains no security critical information read write permission should only be granted to the owner Access should be denied to all other users 3 System wide configuration file etc ssh ssh_config This file contains default values for configuration parameters if there is no user specific configuration file or if the relevant parameters are not specified in the user specific configuration file The value found first applies for each option You will find detailed information on the configuration of ssh and on its operands on the manual pages for OpenSSH under http www openssh org manual html Proceed as follows gt Start ssh to log in to the iRMC under SSHv2 authentication ssh 1 lt user gt lt iRMC_S4 gt or ssh L lt user gt lt i RMC_S4 gt lt user gt User name under which you want to log into the iRMC If you do not specify lt user gt ssh uses the user name under which you are logged into your local computer to log you
344. sion 0 to 4 four hard disk devices can be configured Default 1 Enable Remote Image Mount Enables disables the Remote Image Mount which makes it possible to host CD DVD Floppy and hard disk ISO images on a server in the network Activating the Enable Remote Image Mount option displays the additional Remote Image Mount link under Virtual Media in the navigation area Clicking the Remote Image Mount link opens the Remote Image Mount page which contains the panels for configuring the Image Options of the corresponding image type see page 335 gt Click Apply to activate your settings 334 iRMC S4 Virtual Media 7 17 2 Remote Image Mount connecting remote ISO images The Remote Image Mount function makes available to the managed server CD DVD Floppy and hard disk ISO images that host on a server in the network The Remote Image Mount page contains the groups for configuring the Image Options of the corresponding image type CD DVD Floppy and hard disk ISO images S ServerView Remote Image Mount amp Remote CD DVD Image Options E iIRMC S4 Share Type CIFS SMB Common Internet File System v Power Management Server E Power Consumption share Nane oo E Sensors E Event Log Image Name Server Management UserName E Network Settings Password aassesesesaseseaaee E Alerting ConfirmPassword O E User Management pemain Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Apply Conn
345. sion 1 the Virtual Console Sharing Privileges dialog box opens which counts down from 30 seconds Virtual Console Sharing Privileges Give Permission to user user 2 with IP address 111 111 11 11 Allow Virtual Console Allow only Video _ Deny Access ok 24 seconds remaining Figure 25 Virtual Console Sharing Privileges dialog box Give Permission to iIRMC S4 83 Using AVR Allow Virtual Console Session 2 is switched to Full access mode Session 1 is switched Partial access only Video mode i Virtual media connections of session1 are cleared Allow only Video Session 2 is switched to Partial access only Video mode In this mode you can only passively observe keyboard and mouse operation of the server Only the Video and Active Users functions can be used Session 1 remains in Full access mode Deny Access Session 2 is denied access and closed Session1 remains in Full access mode If the counter expires before session 1 has confirmed with OK session 2 is switched to Full access mode Session1 is switched to Partial access only Video mode Requesting Full access when two AVR sessions are currently active If two AVR sessions are currently active and session 1 is the one that is not in Full access mode user 1 of session 1 can request Full access by clicking Request Full Permission in the Options menu of the AVR window see page 101 In this case user 2 of the concurrent AV
346. sion was started If Local Monitor Off Control has been enabled in the AVR page of the iRMC web interface this toggle button allows you to switch between the following states p4 Displays for each currently active AVR session the iRMC user who Indicates that the monitor of the managed server is unlocked i e co actions performed on the AVR console can be seen on the monitor of the managed server Clicking this button will lock the monitor of the managed server Indicates that the monitor of the managed server is locked i e CJ actions performed on the AVR console cannot be seen on the monitor of the managed server Clicking this button will unlock the monitor of the managed server This toggle button allows you to power the managed server on and off 7 Indicates that the managed server is currently powered on Clicking this button starts a confirmation dialog for powering the managed server off immediate power off l Indicates that the managed server is currently powered off Clicking this button starts a confirmation dialog for powering the managed server on Table 4 Icons in the ServerList windows 108 iRMC S4 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window 5 3 Using AVR via HTML5 You have the following options to start AVR gt Click the Start Video Redirection HTMLS button on the Advanced Video Redirection AVR page of the iRMC web interface see page 324 or if displayed gt Click the
347. speed Transfer Protocol In particular communication between the iRMC and the ServerView Agentless Service occurs via HTI The Lifecycle Management link contains links to the following pages Update Settings Configuring general eLCM update settings on page 340 Online Update Configuring the eLCM online update on page 341 Offline Update Configuring the eLCM offline update on page 346 Custom Image Handling custom images on page 352 PrimeCollect Health management on page 356 The iRMC supports an SD card for non volatile mass data storage The SD card is mounted in the iRMC internal Linux file system From the server side files on the iRMC SD card may be read and written through the PCle interface via HTI In order to use the iRMC function Lifecycle Management you require a license key see page 176 iRMC S4 339 Lifecycle Management 7 18 1 Update Settings Configuring general eLCM update settings The Update Settings page allows you to configure the options for the eLCM update repository ServerView FUJITSU ServerView iRMC S4 Web Server Common Update Settings E System Information Common Update Settings PRIMERGY RX100 S8 SW1 RX10058 Repository Location hitp support ts fujitsu com downloadmanager g Power Management E Power Consumption Use Proxy V E Sensors E Event Log Default Repository Test Repository Connection Serve
348. stallation Manager 9 2 Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the Windows Start menu On Windows based servers you can also call the Server Configuration Manager via the Windows Start menu To do this proceed as follows gt On the managed server select Start All Programs Fujitsu ServerView Agents Configuration Tools System Configuration The System Configuration window opens System Configuration online Rx100552 Connection localhost System type choice IV Change system selection manually OK IV Rack Model Special features Figure 248 System Configuration window iRMC S4 389 Configuring via Server Configuration Manager gt Accept the preset values gt Click OK The tab view of the System Configuration window opens You can scroll to the left and right through the tabs by clicking the arrows next to the tabs Applying settings To apply the settings made in the individual tabs proceed as follows for each tab gt Click the Apply button gt Click the Save Page button The iRMC automatically reboots to activate the changed settings 390 iRMC S4 Configuring via Server Configuration Manager 9 3 Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the Operations Manager The Server Configuration Manager dialog boxes for configuring the iRMC are also available from the graphical user interface of the Operations Manager This
349. stem Component Information Information on the server components AIS Connect Configuring and using AIS Connect System REPO s eee kA RA Be R RRR ERE ROR ES i CPU U lizaton HIStory 5 a cd ee ee Ree RR RD RRR Network INVENIO ssa i528 a 64 Se Ro ee Be RD Dee Driver MONO 4 6 6 45 kd eae a eee eR BRS SG iIRMC S4 7 5 ZA Cae 7 5 3 7 5 4 7 6 78 1 7 6 1 1 7 6 1 2 78 2 7 7 Lht Pie 77 3 7 7 4 T6 7 8 7 8 1 78 2 RAID Information Information on the RAID systems 153 RAID Controller Information on RAID controllers and associated BAIENOS 6 45 eee ke eR DEREK DEER oa eRe eS 154 Enclosures Information on RAID enclosures 156 Physical Disks Information on RAID physical disks 160 Logical Drives Information on RAID logical drives 162 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS 164 Backup Restoration Saving Restoring BIOS single parameter setings to from A file 4646s hee dee De ee Re 164 Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML ISNA ek ee BERK SES DEM SESS SSG Se EEE 165 Restoration BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView WinSCU XML format 2844 2d ee 2 PSR OES eS eee GES 166 BIOS Updating BIOS via upload from file or via TFTP 168 iRMC S4 Information firmware and certificates 173 iIRMC S4 Information InformationontheiRMC 174 iRMC S4 Time Time options f
350. stem SensorDataRecords gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System PCIDevices gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System SystemEventlog gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System InternalEventlog gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System BootStatus gt lt Item gt lt Ite ame System ManagementControl lers gt lt Item gt lt Content gt lt Summary gt lt System gt 12 3 2 3 BIOS Since the iRMC has no access to the SMBIOS structures of the server only a very limited subset of information is provided Sample output see below lt Bios Schema 1 gt lt SMBIOS Version Unknown gt lt TypeO Name BIOS Information Type 0 gt 470 iRMC S4 iRMC system report lt BiosVersion gt V4 6 5 4 R1 0 0 for D3239 Alx lt BiosVersion gt lt Type0 gt lt SMBIOS gt lt Bios gt 12 3 2 4 Processor The information generated is based on the F113 and F115 OEM IPMI cmd and is compliant with the CDiagReport h Sample Output see below lt Processor Schema 1 gt lt CPU Boot true gt lt SocketDesignati on gt CPU lt SocketDesignation gt lt Manufacturer gt Intel lt Manufacturer gt lt Model gt lt Version gt Intel R Xeon R CPU E3 1270 v3 3 50GHz lt Version gt lt BrandName gt Intel R Xeon R CPU E3 1270 v3 3 50GHz lt BrandName gt lt Model gt lt Speed gt 3500 lt Speed gt lt Status Description ok gt 1 lt Status gt lt CoreNumber gt 4 lt CoreNumber gt lt LogicalCpuNumber gt 8 lt LogicalCpuNumber gt lt Lev
351. t 12 Command Specifier EEPROM 00 EEPROM 1 01 EEPROM 2 Response Data BC F5 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS byte first Status 00 Checksum Error Runtime FW 01 OK Major FW Revision Binary coded Minor FW Revision BCD coded Aux FW Revision Binary coded major minor res Major FW Revision ASCII coded letter Major SDRR Revision BCD coded Minor SDRR Revision BCD coded SDRR Revision Char ASCII coded letter SDRR ID LSB binary coded SDRR ID MSB binary coded Major Booter Revision Binary coded Major Booter Revision BCD coded Aux Booter Revision Binary coded major minor 444 iIRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC F5 42 Get HDD lightpath status Component Status Signal Read This command returns information on the state of a Hard Disk Drive HDD slot Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F5 Cmd Command Group iRMC 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first 42 Command Specifier Entity ID Zable 37 12 of IPMI 1 5 Spec of Component whose Status Signal is to be read Entity Instance 0 based of Component whose Status Signal is to be read Sensor Type Zable 36 3 of IPMISpec of the Sensor which reports the Status of the Component to which the Status Signal is associated Response Data Option optional Bit 7 2 Reserved Bit 1 Completion Code 0x02 suppressed BitO
352. t Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file etc grub conf console ttyS0O lt baud rate gt console tty0 SuSE Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file boot grub menu st console ttyS0O lt baud rate gt console tty0 iRMC S4 323 Console Redirection Redirecting the console 7 16 2 Advanced Video Redirection Start Advanced Video Redirection AVR The Advanced Video Redirection page allows you to start graphical console redirection The Advanced Video Redirection feature redirects graphical output from the managed server to the remote workstation and assigns keyboard and mouse input from the remote workstation to the managed server so that you can access the managed server from the remote workstation as if you were working locally AVR can be used by two users simultaneously One user has full control over the server full control mode and the other can only passively observe keyboard and mouse operation of the server view only mode In order to use the iRMC function Advanced Video Redirection you require a license key see section iRMC S4 Information Information on the iRMC on page 174 The AVR functionality is made available with a Java applet or via HTML5 Important note Java caching must not be disabled Otherwise AVR cannot be started Java caching is enabled per default ServerView PRIMERGY RX100 58 FUJITSU ServerView iRMC S4 Web Server Deutsch S Biase A
353. t P CHECK EXE fe lclibme bat E command com E config sys E cYT100 EXE E cvT100 5ET F Dosvafuf exe fe lflashm bat P FLIRMCS4 EXE Pe IPMIvIEW EXE T IPMIVIEW INI E KERNEL SYS 2 readme txt SLEEP EXE SWEAT INI 30 720 KB 1 KB 15 KB 1 KB 65 KB 1 KB 20 KB 1 KB 183 KB 6 KB 42 KB 148 KB 14KB 45 KB 9 KB 9 KB 3 KB Type Dateiordner Dateiordner BIN Datei Stapelverarbeitung Anwendung Stapelverarbeitung Anwendung f r MS Systemdatei Anwendung SET Datei Anwendung Stapelverarbeitung Anwendung Anwendung Konfigurationseinst Systemdatei Textdokument Anwendung Konfigurationseinst Figure 254 Image files and flash tool on the USB memory stick Date Modified 26 09 2012 10 26 26 09 2012 10 26 29 07 2013 11 43 09 11 2007 15 02 19 05 2009 10 44 08 03 2006 10 46 16 02 2007 13 29 16 02 2007 14 40 06 08 1988 20 17 05 12 2002 15 06 22 07 2013 08 01 29 07 2013 11 42 17 07 2013 09 08 03 05 2013 10 59 03 08 2010 14 20 16 02 2007 15 11 26 07 2013 08 03 25 02 1998 20 17 08 06 2004 14 12 400 iIRMC S4 Updating firmware images 10 3 Updating firmware images Since the iRMC S4 firmware executes in the SRAM memory of the iRMC S4 it is possible to update both active and inactive firmware images online i e with the server operating system running The following methods are available for updating the firmware images over the iRMC web interfac
354. t 37 lt WarningThreshold gt lt CriticalThreshold gt 42 lt CriticalThreshold gt lt Temperature gt lt Temperature Name Systemboard CSS false gt lt Status Description o0k gt 6 lt Status gt lt CurrValue gt 37 lt CurrValue gt lt WarningThreshold gt 60 lt WarningThreshold gt lt CriticalThreshold gt 65 lt CriticalThreshold gt lt Temperature gt 12 3 2 8 Power Supplies The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport h implementation Sample Output see below lt PowerSupplies Schema 1 Count 1 gt lt PowerSupply Name PSU CSS false gt lt Status Description ok gt 1 lt Status gt lt PowerSupp 1 y gt lt PowerSupplies gt 12 3 2 9 Voltages The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport h implementation Sample Output see below lt Voltages Schema 1 Count 11 gt lt Voltage Name BATT 3 0V CSS false gt lt Status Description ok gt 1 lt Status gt lt CurrValue gt 3 24 lt CurrValue gt lt NomValue gt 3 00 lt NomValue gt lt Thresholds gt lt MinValue gt 2 02 lt MinValue gt lt MaxValue gt 3 50 lt MaxValue gt lt Thresholds gt lt Voltage gt iIRMC S4 473 iRMC system report 12 3 2 10 IDPROMS The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport h implementation In addition the actual name retrieved from the FRU SDR record is provided as Name attribute in the instance tag Since an entry is quite long for an exam
355. t HMT325U7E ber gt Code gt 12372 lt ber MM lt ModuleTy ered gt None lt B ataWith gt FR8A PB 33E39 gt 1281572409 lt Modul eSerialNumber gt pe gt Devicel ype gt DDR3_SDRAM lt Devicelype gt DeviceTechnology gt 256Mx8 15x10x3 lt DeviceTechnology gt ufferedRegis urer gt SK Hynix lt ModuleManufacturer gt uringDate gt 2013 4 lt ModuleManufacturing oduleRevisionCode gt tered gt BusFrequency Unit MHz gt DDR1600 lt BusFrequency gt VoltageInterface gt 1 35V 1 5V lt VoltageInterface gt BurstLengths gt 8 4 lt BurstLengths gt CASLatencies gt 6 7 8 9 10 11 lt CASLatencies gt gStatus gt Fan data is retrieved generated from FAN sensors and is compliant with the CDiagReport h implementation Sample Output see below lt Fans Schema lt Fan Name ad ae Count 2 gt FANL SYS CSS true gt lt Status Description not manageable gt 5 lt Status gt lt Fan gt lt Fan Name FAN PSU CSS false gt lt Status Description not manageable gt 5 lt Status gt lt Fan gt lt Fans gt 12 3 2 7 Temperature The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport h implementation Sample Output see below 472 iIRMC S4 iRMC system report lt Temperatures Schema 1 Count 7 gt lt Temperature Name Ambient CSS false gt lt Status Description o0k gt 6 lt Status gt lt CurrValue gt 27 lt CurrValue gt lt WarningThreshold g
356. t Log Save Internal Event Log Figure 140 System Event Log Content page System Event Log Information Clear Internal Event Log Click Clear Internal Event Log to clear all the entries in the internal event log Save Internal Event Log After you have clicked Save Internal Event Log the iRMC allows you to download the file iRMC S4_InternalEventLog sel which contains the entries of the internal event log 236 iRMC S4 System Event Log and Internal Event Log Internal Event Log Content The Internal Event Log Content group displays the internal event log entries filtered by severity class You can modify the filter criteria for the duration of the current session in the Internal Event Log Content group However the settings you make here are only valid until the next logout After that the default settings apply again Internal Event Log Content Vv gt lt Display Critical Vv y Display Major Vv A Display Minor VG Display Into Apply Event Event Error Event Alert Date Severity Code Description Group i Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 46 16 PM Info 230083 IRMC S4 Browser http connection user admin auto logout Security i Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 44 20 PM Info 230088 iRMC 4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session finished from 172 17 167 194 Security i Tue 06 Aug 2013 02 41 05 PM Info 230087 iRMC S4 Browser AVR connection user admin AVR Session started from 172 17 167 194 Security i Tue 06 Aug 2013 02
357. t first 5 View System Eventlog Information 6 Clear System Eventlog Enter selection or 0 to quit i Figure 241 Remote Manager System Eventlog menu The sub menu contains the following functions View System Eventlog text newest first The contents of the System Event log are output to screen in a readable form and in chronological order the most recent entry first View System Eventlog text oldest first The contents of the System Event log are output to screen in a readable form and in reverse chronological order the oldest entry first Dump System Eventlog raw newest first The contents of the System Event log are dumped in chronological order the most recent entry first Dump System Eventlog raw oldest first The contents of the System Event log are dumped in reverse chronological order the oldest entry first View System Eventlog Information Display information on the System Event log Clear System Eventlog Clear the contents of the System Event log Change System Eventlog mode Changes the buffer mode of the System Event Log from Ring Buffer mode to Linear Buffer mode and vice versa Table 17 System Eventlog menu 376 iIRMC S4 Enclosure Information Internal Eventlog The following menu appears if you select Internal Eventlog from the Enclosure Information sub menu Internal Eventlog Menu 1 View Internal Eve
358. t group None The notification function is deactivated for this paging group Critical The iRMC notifies users by email if an entry in the system event log is reported as CRITICAL Warning The iRMC notifies users by email if an entry in the system event log is reported as Minor or Major or Critical iIRMC S4 301 User Management All The iRMC notifies users of every event in this group which causes an entry to be made in the system event log gt Click Apply to activate your settings 7 15 2 2 Configuring iRMC for Microsoft Active Directory After you have confirmed the Active Directory you have chosen by clicking Apply the following variant of the Directory Service Configuration page is shown ServerView User admin Logout frsu FUJITSU Serverview IRMC 4 Wan Server RB Directory Service Configuration Disable Local Login Aways use SSL Login Directory Server Type Active Directory v Authorization Type Senerview LDAP Groups with Aumorization Semings on LDAP Sener Standard LDAP Groups win Aumorization Setings on IRMC Primary LDAP Server LDAP Server LDAP Port 33 LDAP 81 Port E35 Backup LDAP Server LDAP Server LDAP Port 39 LDAP SSL Port 636 Domain name pomno wan net Bate DN DC comino DC wiso Done Groups airectory as Sub tree from base DN Mote 1 Warning it your directory server Is unreachable and LDAP is enabled you
359. t message output to the text console serial on page 381 Table 12 Main menu of the Remote Manager 368 iIRMC S4 Required user permissions 8 6 Required user permissions In table 13 is given an overview of the user permissions which are required in order to use the individual Remote Manager functions Remote Manager menu items Permitted with f Required IPMI privilege permission level ke 2 oal g JHF aslsif ls o s luig amp lajs jul olg j o ols 5l 2 S ElE 5 Ela e je 3 2 o 35 35 lio E D2 jo l pN p O o S 8 8 05 518 5 O t O DaFol os s la View System Information xX X X X View Chassis Mainboard OS Information Xx Set ASSET Tag x Set System Name x Set System Operating System Information X Set System Description xX Set System Location Information SNMP X Set System Contact Information SNMP X Power Management XIXIX View Enclosure Information XIXJIXIX System Eventlog View Dump System Eventlog xX X X xX System Eventlog Clear System Eventlog xX X X Internal Eventlog View Dump Internal Eventlog xX X X X Internal Eventlog Clear Internal Eventlog xX X X X Sensor overviews Temperature Fans x X X X View Service Processor xX X X X Service Processor List IP Parameters X Service Processor Configure IP Parameters X Table
360. ta B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F1 Cmd Command Group BIOS 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first 09 Command Specifier Response Data BC F1 Completion Code 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first 7 1 reserved 0 BIOS POST State 0 BIOS is notin POST 1 BIOS is in POST 440 iRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC F1 15 Get CPU Info This command returns CPU internal information The iRMC gets this information from the BIOS during the POST phase Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group F1 Cmd Command Group BIOS 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first 15 Command Specifier Socket Number 0 based of the CPU Response Data BC F1 Completion Code 01 Unpopulated CPU Socket 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first CPU ID LS Byte first Platform ID Brand ID Maximal Core Speed of the CPU MHz LS Byte first Intel Qickpath Interconnect in Mega Transactions per second LS Byte first T Control Offset T Diode Offset CPU data Spare Record ID CPU Info SDR LS Byte first Record ID Fan Control SDR LS Byte first CPU ID High Word LS Byte first 0 if none iIRMC S4 441 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 12 1 2 7 iRMC S4 specific commands F5 10 Get System Status This command returns a variety of internal information on the system such as the power
361. te after Preparing the offline update is started immediately preparation Subsequently update process is automatically started No user interaction scheduled never Scheduled preparation of the offline update is started immediately Update process is not started automatically scheduled after Scheduled preparation of the update in preparation combination with subsequently started update process All available update components are installed No user interaction never immediate The update process is started immediately This requires that an update iso image made available by a former update preparation is already available on the iRMC never scheduled The update process is started in a scheduled manner This requires that an update iso image made available by a former update preparation is already available on the iRMC Table 10 Offline update settings 1 After update process is started the managed server is shut down The eLCM Offline Update Manager is started and performs the update 2 daily weekly monthly yearly once only Cancel Cancels preparing executing the offline update Cancel only works as long as the download has not started Once the download is started the Cancel button is disabled 350 iRMC S4 Lifecycle Management Offline Update Logs The Offline Update Logs group informs you if a log file related to the offline update is available and if this applies allows you to store th
362. te is available and if this applies allows you to store the log file i There is no any log file to save pe Figure 225 Online Update page Online Update Logs Save Opens a confirmation dialog which offers to store the log file The Save button is disabled if no log file is available iIRMC S4 345 Lifecycle Management 7 18 3 Offline Update Configuring the eLCM offline update The Offline Update page allows you to update system components like network or storage controller firmware on the managed server Additionally you can install BIOS and iRMC firmware updates An offline update is the method of choice if no Agentless Service is running on the managed server or if the Agentless Service does not support the server operating system The System Information group in the System Overview page informs you whether the ServerView Agentless Service is available on the server see page 137 ServerView E Network Settings Ethemet Ports and Services Proxy Settings DNS Offline Update Prepare Offline Update immediste V SNMP Start Update Process never v E Alerting E User Management MM include BIOS and iRMC Firmware Updates Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Activate Virtus Media E Lifecycle Management Offline Update Logs Update Settings Online Update i There is no any log file to save Offline Update Custom Image PrimeCollect Log
363. ted by the iRMC e SCCl compliant Power On Off commands SCCI ServerView Common Command Interface 0115 Get Power On Source 0116 Get Power Off Source 011C Set Power Off Inhibit 011D Get Power Off Inhibit 0120 Set Next Power On Time e SCCl compliant communication commands 0205 System OS Shutdown Request 0206 System OS Shutdown Request and Reset 0208 Agent Connect Status 0209 Shutdown Request Canceled e SCClI compliant signaling commands 1002 Write to System Display iIRMC S4 425 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC e Firmware specific commands 2004 Set Firmware Selector 2005 Get Firmware Selector C019 Get Remote Storage Connection C01A Set Video Display on off e BlOS specific command F109 Get BIOS POST State F115 Get CPU Info e iRMC S4 specific commands F510 Get System Status F512 Get EEPROM Version Info F542 Get HDD lightpath status Component Status Signal Read F543 Get SEL entry long text F545 Get SEL entry text F5BO Set Identify LED F5B1 Get Identify LED F5B3 Get Error LED F5DF Set Nonvolatile Cfg Memory to Default Values F5E0 Set Configuration Space to Default Values F5F8 Delete User ID 426 iIRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 12 1 2 Description of the IPMI OEM commands The following sections describe the individual OEM specific IPMI commands 12 1 2 1 Description format The OEM specific IPMI commands contained in this c
364. ted if more than one fan is faulty and Shutdown and Power off is also set for these fans gt Click Apply to the selected Fans to activate your settings for the selected fans If in the BIOS Setup the fans of the managed node are set to high speed a note informs about this setting iRMC S4 221 Sensors Check status of the sensors 7 10 2 Temperature Report the temperature of the server components The Temperature page provides information on the status of the temperature sensors which measure the temperature at the server components such as the CPU and the Memory Module and the ambient temperature PRIMERGY RX300 S8 Server View Remote Management iRMC S4 Web Server deutsch SW41 RX300S8 3 System Information Temperature Sensor Information in Celsius Bios E iRMC 4 Temperature Warning Critical Fail E Power Management Salaat No Designation fcaisius Level Level Reaction S E Power Consumption Senor D 1 ambient 23 40 43 Continue OK Fans O 2 systemboard 1 26 75 80 Continue OK Temperature Voltages O 3 systemboard 2 40 75 80 Continue OK Power Supply Component Status CD a4 CPU 36 65 69 Continue OK ere ag Pr s cPu2 44 65 69 Continue OK Serer Management E Network Settings r e MEM A 30 78 82 Continue OK Alerting E User Management O 7 MEM B 78 82 Continue N A Console Redirection O 8 MEMC 78 82 Continue NIA Video Redirection JWS Virtual Medi
365. tem installed and the action configured you can trigger various actions by briefly pressing the power off button These actions could be shutting down the computer or switching it to standby mode Immediate Reset Completely restarts the server cold start regardless of the status of the operating system Pulse NMI Initiates a non maskable interrupt NMI A NMI is a processor interrupt that cannot be ignored by standard interrupt masking techniques in the system iIRMC S4 103 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Graceful Reset Reboot Graceful shutdown and reboot This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC as Connected Graceful Power Off Shutdown Graceful shutdown and power off This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC as Connected Set Boot Options Clicking this item opens the Set Boot Options dialog box which allows you to configure the behavior of the system the next time it is booted m E Set Boot Options Boot Device Selector No Change z Boot Type Extensible Firmware Interface Boot EFI v Next Boot only C OK Cancel i Figure 43 Power Options menu Set Boot Options Boot Device Selector Storage medium you wish to boot from The following options are available No Change The system is booted from the same storage medium as previously PXE
366. tempt to perform a Power Off Power Cycle or restart of the server but does not perform the action The cause of the most recent attempt to perform a Power Off Power Cycle or restart of the server is always saved at any given time The stored action is only performed when the Power Off Inhibit flag is reset The Power Off Inhibit flag is automatically reset after a power failure or when the reset button is pressed The effect of the Power Off Inhibit flag is the same as that of the Dump flag used when creating a main memory dump In this case the initiator must set the flag before making the dump and reset it when the dump is complete Request Data B8 NetFniLUN OEM Group 01 Cmd Command Group Communication 1 3 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first 1C Command Specifier 00 Object ID 6 7 00 00 Value ID 01 Data Length Power Off Inhibit Flag 0 no Inhibit 1 Inhibit Response Data BC 01 1 Completion Code 2 4 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte first 430 iRMC S4 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC 01 1D Get Power Off Inhibit This command gets the value of the Power Off Inhibit flag For further details on the Power Off Inhibit flag see the description of 01 1C Set Power Off Inhibit on page 430 Request Data B8 NetFniILUN OEM Group 01 Cmd Command Group Communication 80 2800 IANA Enterprise Number FTS LS Byte fi
367. ter Max 0 7 Maximum number of restart attempts that should be permitted for the server after a critical error up to 7 Retry counter 0 Max Number of restart attempts that a server should attempt after a critical error maximum value is the value set under Retry counter Max BIOS Recovery Flash Enables disables the BIOS recovery flash bit Enabled The next time the system is booted the BIOS is automatically flashed Disabled The next time the system is booted the BIOS is not automatically flashed 246 iRMC S4 Server Management Information Configuring the server settings The Enabled setting is of value if the operating system no longer boots after the firmware has been updated A BIOS recovery flash is then performed automatically the next time the system is booted from the DOS floppy or a DOS floppy image After a BIOS recovery flash has been performed successfully reset the BIOS Recovery Flash bit to disabled Prevent Power On on Critical Temperature If enabled prevents the server from being powered on in case of critical temperature occurrence Power Cycle Delay 0 15 Time in seconds between powering down and powering up during a power cycle gt Click Apply to save your settings The configured settings are saved and the actions which have been configured are performed in the appropriate circumstances Watchdog Settings Configure software watchdog and boot watchdog The Watc
368. terface UEFI is a specification for a software program that connects a computer s firmware to its operating system UEFI has a firmware validation process called secure boot Secure boot defines how platform firmware manages security certificates validation of firmware and a definition of the interface protocol between firmware and the operating system Extended functionality of the iRMC S4 Alongside the standard functionality the iRMC also supports the Advanced Video Redirection Virtual Media functions and embedded Lifecycle Management eLCM e Advanced Video Redirection AVR The iRMC supports Advanced Video Redirection which offers the following benefits Operation over a standard web browser No additional software needs to be installed in the management station other than the Java Runtime Environment System independent graphical and text console redirection including mouse and keyboard Remote access for boot monitoring BIOS administration and operation of the operating system AVR supports up to two simultaneous virtual connections for working on a server from a different location It also reduces the load on the network by using hardware and video compression Local monitor off support It is possible to power down the local screen of the managed PRIMERGY server during an AVR session in order to prevent unauthorized persons from observing user input and actions carried out on the local server screen durin
369. tes a non maskable interrupt NMI A NMI is a processor interrupt that cannot be ignored by standard interrupt masking techniques in the system Press Power Button Depending on the operating system installed and the action configured you can trigger various actions by briefly pressing the power off button These actions could be shutting down the computer or switching it to standby mode or sleep mode iRMC S4 201 Power Management Power Cycle Powers the server down completely and then powers it up again after a configured period You can configure this time in the Power Cycle Delay field of the ASR amp R Options group see page 246 Graceful Power Off Shutdown Graceful shutdown and power off This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC as Connected Graceful Reset Reboot Graceful shutdown and reboot This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC as Connected gt Click Apply to start the required action 202 iRMC S4 Power Management 7 8 2 Power Options Configuring power management for the server The Power Options page allows you to define the server s behavior after a power outage and specify the server s power on off times S ServerView SW4 RX30088 E System Information Bios E iRMC s4 E Power Management Power On Off Power Options Power Supply Info E Power Co
370. the server on page 134 iIRMC S4 105 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window Server Information System Name iRMCFDAF9B System Type PRIMERGY TX140 2 Chassis Type TX14082FS Serial FKI0113000032 BIOS Version 4 6 5 4 RO 75 0 for D3239 A1x iRMC FW SDR Version FKIO113000032 System GUID E6C17B63 3FE0 6841 A6BA 1 BADOESFB 7BB EE Figure 45 AVR window Help menu 5 2 7 9 AVR Tool bar The icons of the AVR toolbar provide direct access to frequently used AVR functions When moving your mouse pointer on an icon you often receive assistance in the form of tool tips In Partial access only Video mode only the Video and Active Users icons can be used 50 100 150 oag w amp Oleid jel Figure 46 AVR window Preferences menu 106 iIRMC S4 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window If Video Redirection is executed in the Num Lock On mode on the server side the client side also turns to Num Lock ON The following list shows the icons in the ServerList window and their meanings Resumes AVR and refreshes the AVR view Pauses AVR and freezes the AVR view The AVR view remains frozen until AVR is resumed O Enables disables fullscreen mode Ra Aa Indicates whether green or not red a hard disk USB redirection is established for this AVR session Clicking the icon starts the Virtual Media wizard see chapter Virtual Media Wi
371. the severity for the display of SEL entries xX X X X Open Internal Event Log Content page xX X Clear the internal event log iEL xX X Save event log iEL xX X Define the severity for the display of SEL entries xX X Open Event Log Configuration page xX X X xX Modify Default Web Interface display filtering X Change SEL Mode xX Change Helpdesk Information X Server Management Open edit Server Management Info page Network Settings Open edit the Network Interface page X Open edit the Ports and Netw Services page X Open edit DNS Configuration page X Open edit SNMP Configuration page X Table 5 Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface iRMC S4 127 Required user permissions Functions in the iRMC web interface Permitted with Required IPMI privilege jj iRMC specific level permission ke Zla 2Qi o 5gs l 8 G e meh a 5 Die o g 5 2D gt O ET ejeg l 2 o 3 i o 3 DPIiDlo lo b p 4 4 O W 22 6 9 3 S O j lt joOoJ gt O JO gt Alerting Open edit SNMP TRAP Alerting page X Open edit the Email Alerting page X User Management Open edit the iRMC S4 User page X Open edit the Directory Service Config page X Open CAS Configuration page xX X Edit CAS Generic Configuration X Edit CAS User Privilege and Permissions X Console Redirection Open the BIOS Text Console page
372. the time at which the fan test is to be started automatically Disable Fan Test Select this option to disable fan testing 220 iIRMC S4 Sensors Check status of the sensors gt Click Apply to activate your settings gt Click Start Fan Test to start the fan test explicitly System Fans Specify server behavior in the event that a fan fails The System Fans group provides you with information on the status of the fans You can use the options or buttons to select individual fans or all the fans and specify whether the server should be shut down after a specified number of seconds if this fan fails Select all Selects all fans Deselect all All selections are cancelled gt Select the fans for which you wish to define the behavior in the event of a fault gt Define the behavior in the event of a fault using the list at the bottom of the work area Choose continue if the server is not to be shut down if the selected fans fail Choose Shutdown and Power off if the server is to be shut down and powered down if the selected fans fail If you choose this option you must also specify the time in seconds between failure of the fan and shutdown of the server Shutdown Delay in the field to the right of the list Shutdown and Power off will be executed in case of a fan failure regardless of whether ServerView agents are running on the managed server In the case of redundant fans shutdown is only initia
373. tion Linux You must explicitly specify option f or option force For more detailed information on firmware updates with Update Manager Express and ASP see the Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers manual 402 iRMC S4 Updating firmware images 10 3 4 Update using the operating system flash tools An online update using the operating system flash tools is only performed as a recovery flash i e no version check is performed i Prerequisite The flash tools and the files for the firmware update must be present in the file system of the managed server You use one of the following flash tools depending on the operating system you are running DOS flirmes4 Windows winflirmcs4 Prerequisite The ServerView agents for the used Windows operation system 32 64 bit must be running on the managed server Windows 32 bit w32flirmcs4 No agents required Windows 64 bit w64flirmcs4 No agents required Linux linflirmces4 You call the flash tools in the Windows command line flirmcs4 w32flirmcs4 w64flirmcs4 winflirmcs4 or at the Linux CLI linflirmcs4 The syntax and operands for the flash tools are described in section Flash tools on page 408 iRMC S4 403 Updating firmware images Proceed as follows i An online update using a USB memory stick is described below see gt section Setting up the USB memory stick on page 398 Connect the USB memory stick to the managed ser
374. tion Start Advanced Video Redirection AVR on page 324 7 16 1 BIOS Text Console Configure and start text console redirection The BIOS Text Console page allows you to configure and start text console redirection Text console redirection can also be configured in the BIOS see section Configuring text console redirection for the IRMC S4 on page 49 S ServerView Server View Remote Management iRMC 4 Web Server Deutsch Haat SW1 RX300S3 BIOS Text Console il System Inform ation BIOS Console Redirection Options i BIOs ENE Sd Console Redirection Enabled 7 lad Power Management Serial Port Baudrate 9500 Power Consumption paisanacee Serial Port Flow Control None lt E Event Log Terminal Emulation vT100 z Server Management G tishnsie Settings Serial 1 Multiplexer System lt E Alerting User Management Apply E Console Redirection BIOS Text Console i Note The Operating System can provide Text Console access independend from BIOS settings Video Redirection Note Text Console input is only possible if the serial multiplexer is switched to the IRMC 4 Video Redirection JWS Virtual Media Logout Refresh Figure 206 BIOS Text Console page iRMC S4 319 Console Redirection Redirecting the console 7 16 1 1 BIOS Console Redirection Options Configure text console redirection BIOS Console Redirection Options allows you to configure text c
375. tion media via the network gt Setup the required shares for this purpose If you are making a medium with a prepared configuration file and or an installation medium available via the network you have to choose this option Depending on your infrastructure you can either obtain a temporary IP address via DHCP or manually configure an IPv4 or IPv6 address for the current Installation Manager session gt Start the Installation Manager by clicking Continue iRMC S4 419 Booting from DVD 1 Starting local deployment The Welcome screen appears when you start the Installation Manager Welcome to ServerView Installation Manager 11 13 05 Server Information Type PRIMERGY TX300 S7 Ident No YLAX000045 BIOS Vers V4 6 5 3 R1 19 0 for BIOS Date 12 06 2012 D2949 A1x l iRMC S3 BMC FW 6 53A RSB Model RSB FW DiskSpace NaN GB RAM 8192 MB RAID 1 FTS RAID Ctrl SAS 6G MAC 00 19 99 C0 9D V 5 6 512MB 02616 0 iii Wizard based Configuration of BIOS and Hardware Components Deployment as well as Installation of Operating Systems Configuration of the Target System s BIOS and Hardware Configuration Components without Installation of Operating Systems Maintenance Tools which can be used either before an Maintenance Installation or Separately N Version and Usage Information about ServerView Installation Information Manager and Integrated Tools Fig
376. to the server Special keys such as Windows keys are not sent Some special key combinations suchas ALT F4 cannot be sent because they are interrupted by the clients operating system In such cases you should use the integrated special keys or the hotkeys defined by yourself or the virtual keyboard Full keyboard support The Full keyboard support feature allows you to use via SoftKeyboard all function keys of the managed server s physical keyboard Integrated special keys In the lower right of the AVR window you will find a bar containing the special keys These keys are implemented as sticky keys i e they remain pressed indicated by a red label when you click them and only return to their normal position when you click them again Using the integrated special keys you can for instance use special key combinations which are not sent by AVR if you press them on your own keyboard iIRMC S4 87 Using AVR LALT LCTRL RALT RCTRL Num Caps Scroll Figure 30 AVR window integrated special keys LALT Left Alt ernate key corresponds to the Alt key on your keyboard LCTRL Left CTRL key corresponds to the left Ctrl key on your keyboard RAIt Right Alt ernate key Alt ernate Graphic key corresponds to the Alt Gr key on your keyboard RCTRL Right CTRL key corresponds to the right Ctrl key on your keyboard Num Num Key A
377. twork Interface Settings E iRMC s4 MAC Address 00 19 99 A2 FA 42 E Power Management LAN Speed Auto Negotiation lt Power Consumption LAN Port ManagementLAN x ka Sensors Max Transmission Unit MTU 1500 Event Log Server Management E Network Settings Bonding Enabled Ethemet IPva Enabled JF Ports and Services IPV6 Enabled 7 DNS Alerting Apply E User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS IPv4 configuration E Virtual Media IP Address 172 17 167 208 Logout Subnet Mask fess 255 255 0 Gateway 172 17 167 1 DHCP Enabled Apply IPv6 configuration Manual IPv6 configuration 7 Refresh Link Local Address fe80 219 99ff fea2 fa42 54 Unique Local Address fdb8 2976 8500 575 219 99ff fe a2 fa42 54 IPv6 Gateway fe80 217 dfff teO7 3580 Apply VLAN configuration VLAN Enabled VLAN Id JO VLAN Priority 0 Apply Figure 155 Network Interface page iIRMC S4 251 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters CAUTION Contact the network administrator responsible for the system before you change the Ethernet settings If you make illegal Ethernet settings for the iRMC you will only be able to access the iRMC using special configuration software the serial interface or via the BIOS Only users with the Configure iRMC S4 Settings permission are allowed to edit Ethernet settings see chapter User management
378. u to enter a passphrase and to confirm it that is used to encrypt the private key If you press Enter to confirm without entering a passphrase ssh keygen does not use a passphrase ssh keygen informs the user that the newly generated private SSHv2 key has been saved in the file ssh id_rsa ssh keygen informs the user that the newly generated public SSHv2 key has been saved in the file ssh id_rsa pub ssh keygen displays the fingerprint of the public SSHv2 key and the local login to which the public key belongs 70 iIRMC S4 Local user management for the iRMC S4 4 3 3 2 Loading the public SSHv2 key onto the iRMC from a file Proceed as follows gt Under the iRMC web interface open the detailed view for the required browser in this case user3 iRMC S4 User Management page ServerView FUJITSU Server View iRMC S4 Web Server WIN 2ECKQOJBOJF User Enabled 7 Name admin Password asaaaasaaaasanaaanna E System Information System Overview System Components Network Inventory Description User 02 Description E iRMC 4 User Shell Text Access Remote Manager X E Power Management ea Power Consumption E Sensors Event Log z E Server Management RE EOE IES E Network Settings E Alerting LAN Channel Privilege OEM z E User Management Serial Channel Privilege OEM z IRMC 4 User LDAP Configuration Confirm Password Configure User Acco
379. uled Storing PrimeCollect archive files on the iRMC SD card In particular you can define one special reference image which will not be overwritten by the ring buffer principle Maintaining a history of PrimeCollect archives Transferring PrimeCollect archives to another server via management LAN or AIS Connect Downloading PrimeCollect archive to the local computer PrimeCollect archive file creating is based on the communication between the iRMC and the ServerView Agentless Service The System Information group in the System Overview page informs you whether the ServerView Agentless Service is available on the server see page 137 ServerView User admin Logout FUIITSU PRIMERGY RX300 S8 FUJITSU ServerView iRMC S4 Web Server M Deutsch BZS Power Mar t F saps PrimeCollect Power Consumption NI E Sensors E Event Log Schedule PrimeCollect archives Gan Magaan Status No operation scheduled E Network Settings E Alerting Perform archive creation amp download immediste V User Management Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Virtus Media E Lifecycle Management Update Settings Online Update No Choose Offline Update 1 OJ Thu 11 Sep 2014 02 06 09 PM 2 90 MB Ref_PrimeCollect_Archive_20140911_1404 zip Yes Custom Image a me Logout i Note The number of stored archives is limited to 7 The oldest archive will be
380. unts V CAS Configuration Configure iRMC 4 Settings W Console Redirection Video Redirection Enabled V E virtual Media Remote Storage Enabled V 1 Logout Apply Refresh SSHv2 public key upload from file there is no key assigned to this N Publio Keyi a YS e i Upload 4 Email Configuration 2 Email Enabled Mail Format Standard z Pratared Mall Server Automato E Email Address UseO2 domain com Paging Severity Configuration Fan Sensors Warming v Temperature Sensors Warning z Critical Hardware Errors an System Hang Critical z POST Errors All fori Security Warning z System Status None x Disk Drivers amp Controllers Critical g Figure 18 iRMC web interface Loading the public SSHv2 key onto the iRMC gt Click Browse in the group User SSHv2 public key upload from file 1 and navigate to the file containing the required public key 2 gt Click Upload to load the public key onto the iRMC After the key has been successfully uploaded the iRMC displays the key fingerprint in the group User SSHv2 public key upload from file iIRMC S4 71 Local user management for the iRMC S4 User SSHv2 public key upload from file Key fingerprint RSA 1023 ee 99 d ac 8f Se 7 2F 2 9b 81 80 3f 84 28 7d Key fingerprint IRSA 1023 2e 99 d ac 8f 8e 7 2F 2 9b 3 1 80 3f 84
381. upports among others the following key features Inventory functions server identification Power Management and power monitoring Power consumption monitoring and control Event logging Temperature monitoring Detailed information about DCMI can be found on the DCMI home page http www intel com technology product DCMI iIRMC S4 33 Changes compared with the previous version 1 8 Changes since the previous versions of the manual This manual refers to the iRMC S4 firmware version 8 0 and replaces the following online manual iRMC integrated Remote Management Controller April 2015 edition The manual includes the following updates e iRMC web interface New redirection function via HTML5 parallel to the Java based redirection New HP SIM integration CIM support With the Common Information Model CIM relationship information what s connected to what can be used to help trace the source and status of problems e Extended SNMP support e RESTful API REST REpresentational State Transfer is an architectural style and an approach to communications that is often used in the development of Web services When Web services use REST architecture they are called RESTful APIs Application Programming Interfaces or REST APIs REST architecture involves reading a designated Web page that contains an XML file 34 iIRMC S4 Changes compared with the previous version 1 9
382. ure 14 Login authentication via the iIRMC S4 Although optional the use of SSL for the LDAP connection between the i iRMC and directory service is recommended An SSL secured LDAP connection between iRMC and the directory service guarantees secure data exchange and in particular the secure transfer of the user name and password data SSL login via the iRMC web interface is only required if LDAP is active LDAP enable option see page 295 iIRMC S4 61 User permissions 4 2 User permissions The iRMC distinguishes between two mutually complementary types of user permissions Channel specific privileges via assignment to channel specific permission groups Permissions to use special iRMC functions The privileges and permissions required for the use of the individual iIRMC functions are described for the iRMC web interface on page 124 for the Remote Manager on page 369 Channel specific privileges channel specific permission groups The iRMC assigns each user identification to one of the following four channel specific permission groups User Operator Administrator OEM Since iRMC assigns these permissions on a channel specific basis users can have different permissions depending on whether they access the iRMC over the LAN interface or the serial interface The scope of permissions granted increases from User lowest permission level through Operator and Administr
383. ure 20 PuTTY Selecting and loading an SSH session gt Select a saved SSH session or create a new SSH session for the iRMC S4 for which you want to use the SSHv2 key iIRMC S4 73 Local user management for the iRMC S4 gt Click Load to load the selected SSH session This opens the following window 2X PuTTY Configuration Category Session Basic options for your PuTTY session Logging Specify your connection by host name or IP address Terminal Host Name or IP address Port Keyboard Bell 172 25 250 200 22 Features Protocol Window O Raw Olelnet ORlogin SSH Appearance Behaviour Translation Saved Sessions i Selection TX300 85 Colours Default Settings Connection TX12082 toaa D ca TX15085 Load save or delete a stored session TX200 84 Telnet TX200 85 Rlogin 5 SSH 4 E Close window on exit Odlways OvNever Only on clean exit Tunnels v Ca _ Figure 21 PuTTY Loading an SSH session gt Choose SSH Auth to configure the SSH authentication options This opens the following window see figure 22 on page 75 74 iIRMC S4 Local user management for the iRMC S4 OX PuTTY Configuration Category Session Logging Terminal Keyboard Bell Features amp Window Appearance Behaviour Translation Selection Colours Connection Data Proxy Telnet Rlogin SSH Kex x11 Tunnels
384. ure 257 Installation Manager Welcome screen gt Click Deployment to start preparation of the local installation deployment To prepare the installation the Installation Manager wizards take you through a sequence of configuration steps that gather specifications for configuring the system and for subsequent unattended installation of the operating system Configure the local CD ROM DVD ROM drive of the managed server as the installation source You can then also make the Windows installation CD DVD available from the CD ROM DVD ROM drive of the remote workstation if you connect it to the managed server as a virtual storage medium see section Installing Windows on the managed server after configuration on page 421 Once you have completed configuration with the Installation Manager the Installation Info dialog page for the Windows installation see page 421 or for the Linux installation see page 423 is displayed This allows you to start the installation process 420 iIRMC S4 Installing the operating system 11 4 Installing the operating system on the managed server after configuration Once you have completed configuration you should install the operating system on the managed server 11 4 1 Installing Windows on the managed server after configuration After configuration has been completed the Installation Manager displays the following dialog page S ServerView Fujitsu Home
385. uring DNS for the iRMC The DNS Configuration page allows you to activate the Domain Name System DNS for the iRMC and to configure a host name for the iRMC S ServerView DNS Configuration E System Information System Overview System Components Network Inventory ons Enabled IZ Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP DNS Domain fiian575 qalab Power Management ONS Search Path E Power Consumption DNS Server 4 172 1 E Sensors DNS Server 2 172 Event Log DNS Server 3 Server Management y DNS Retries 2 E Network Settings EN DNS Timeout 5 Seconds Ports and Services DNS E Alerting User Management DNS Name Console Redirection Video Redirection JWS Register DHCP Address in DNS via DHCP Server Virtual Media T Register full domain name FQDN via DHCP in DNS T DNS Update Enabled Logout M Use iRMC 4 name instead of server hostname M add Serial Number I Add Extension IRMC S4 name IRMC Extension iRMC DNS name IRMCA2FA4S2 Apply i Note Registration of the DNS name via DHCP server is only supported for IPw4 addresses Refresh Figure 161 DNS Configuration page 264 iIRMC S4 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters DNS Settings The DNS Settings group allows you to activate the Domain Name System DNS for the iRMC This makes it possible to use symbolic DNS names instead of IP addresses for configuring th
386. used SMS Email Subject Only if Mail Format SMS Format is enabled SMS gateway provider specific Email subject 292 iRMC S4 User Management Paging Severity Configuration Here you can configure system events about which an iRMC user is to be informed by email Every entry in the event log for the iRMC is assigned to a particular paging group The following settings are available for each event group None The notification function is deactivated for this paging group Critical The iRMC notifies users by email if an entry in the system event log is reported as CRITICAL Warning The iRMC notifies users by email if an entry in the system event log is reported as Minor or Major or Critical All The iRMC notifies users of every event in this group which causes an entry to be made in the system event log gt Click Apply to activate your settings iRMC S4 293 User Management 7 15 2 Directory Service Configuration LDAP Configuring the directory service at the iRMC In order to perform global user management via a directory service see the User Management in ServerView manual you must configure the iRMC appropriately in the Directory Service Configuration page Currently support for iRMC LDAP access is provided for the following directory services Microsoft Active Directory Novell eDirectory and Open LDAP The following characters are reserved as metacharacters for search strings in LDAP
387. ve after the next server reboot HP system Insight Manager HP SI Integration Options HP SIM Integration Enables Apply ot tongues odo so he RUC 34 devioe will retutn some identiying intometion in response to an unauthenticated XL query sent tom HP Sst Insight Manage Sy default the RNC S4 is congue to return thie infomation System UUID Options Get System GUID Response Format IPMI Specification compatible Apply J Nets Microsoft SCVMM needs this to be set fo SMBIOS 2 8 Specification compstibis Figure 150 Server Management Information page iRMC S4 245 Server Management Information Configuring the server settings ASR amp R Options Configure ASR amp R settings The ASR amp R Options group allows you to configure the ASR amp R automatic server reconfiguration and restart settings for the server The settings made on the ASR amp R Options group become active the next time the managed server is started ASR amp R Options ASR amp R Boot Delay 1 30 2 Minutes Retry counter Max 0 7 3 Retry counter 0 Max f1 BIOS Recovery Flash Disabled Prevent Power On on Critical Temperature Disabled X Power Cycle Delay 0 15 7 Seconds Apply Figure 151 Server Management Information page ASR amp R Options ASR amp R Boot Delay 1 30 Delay time in minutes before the server restarts 1 30 minutes Retry coun
388. ve0 C Fixed Drive 4 il l Hard disk USB Key Media II PhysicalDrive0 C Fixed Drive 4 il Status Target Drive Connected To Read Bytes nia nia 8KB nia Virtual Floppy 1 Not Connected Virtual Floppy 2 Not Connected Virtual CD DVD 1 D Virtual CD DVD 2 Not Connected ld gt 4 Floppy Image Browse Connect Floppy al Floppy Key Media II Floppy Image 7 Browse Connect Floppy CD DVD Media gt CD Image Browse Disconnect Connected to Host CD DVD Device 0 p CD DVD Media II Connect CD DVD Connect Hard disk USB Key Connect Hard disk USB Key Close Figure 50 Virtual Media dialog box The Status panel informs on both the storage media which are currently available for virtual media connections and the storage media which are currently connected as virtual storage media iIRMC S4 115 Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation 6 1 3 Provision of storage media for virtual media i At any time during your AVR session you can the following options Adding additional virtual media connections to your already existing ones Disconnect individual virtual media connections For providing a storage medium of the favored type e g a DVD Image proceed as follows Physical drives are automatically displayed Browsing
389. ver In the Windows command line or the Linux Command Line Interface CLI switch to the drive corresponding to the USB memory stick Set the firmware selector to the value 4 by calling the flash tool with the parameter s 4 E g in the Windows command line you enter w32flirmcs4 b 4orw6o4flirmcs4 b 4 Start the update of the firmware and the SDR data by calling the flash tool with the corresponding update files E g in the Windows command line you enter w32flirmcs4 bin i or wo4flirmcs4 bin i This flashes the new version into the inactive EEPROM i Firmware and SDR are flashed from the same bin file If you call the flash tool with the parameter wr the updated firmware will automatically be activated once the flash has completed In this case it will not be necessary to reboot the iRMC During the firmware update the console informs you about the progress of the update operation If an error occurs the update operation is aborted and a corresponding return code is reported see page 410 Restart the managed server This automatically activates the firmware image with the updated firmware 404 iRMC S4 Updating firmware images 10 3 5 Update via the FlashDisk menu For an update via the FlashDisk menu you require a bootable USB memory stick see section Setting up the USB memory stick on page 398 Proceed as follows gt Connect the USB memory stick to the managed server directly or via
390. ver is accessible under certain conditions You have to enter the URL manually Only active for the Standard mail format Attach Screenshot to Critical O S Stop event email A screenshot generated automatically by the iRMC in case of a critical OS stop event is attached to the corresponding Critical O S Stop event email The generation of the screenshot may fail for various reasons e g unsupported graphic mode Thus if no screenshot is available within 45 seconds at most the email is sent without attachment gt Click Apply to store your settings iIRMC S4 279 User Management 7 15 User Management The User Management entry contains the links to the pages for local user management as well as for the configuration of the directory service for global user management LDAP configuration iIRMC S4 User local user management on the iRMC on page 280 Directory Service Configuration LDAP Configuring the directory service at the iRMC on page 294 Centralized Authentication Service CAS Configuration Configuring the CAS Service on page 313 7 15 1 iRMC S4 User local user management on the iRMC The iRMC S4 User page contains a table showing all the configured users Each line contains the data for one configured user The user names are implemented in the form of links Clicking on a user name opens the User lt name gt Configuration window see page 283 in which you can view or
391. verView Suite DVD 1 or an Installation Manager boot image and optionally a formatted USB memory stick as a status backup medium If installation is performed from the vendor s installation CD DVD Windows or Linux installation CD DVD and optional drivers It is recommended that the ServerView Suite DVD 1 and the i operating system installation CD DVD are stored in a folder as an image file ISO image and that they are connected from there as virtual storage media or provided via Remote Image Mount 416 iRMC S4 Remote Storage connections The prepared storage media are displayed in the Virtual Media dialog box a Virtual Media CD DVD Media Connect CD DVD CD Image v Browse CD DVD Media I Connect CD DVD Browse mana Taimana Connect Hard disk USB Key Figure 256 Storage Devices dialog box ServerView Suite DVD 1 ISO image gt Click Connect to connect the DVD ROM drive DVD or the Installation Manager boot image as virtual storage media Connect the ISO image image file provided via Remote Image Mount You can use an image file provided via Remote Image Mount for booting from an Installation Manager boot image For details on how to provide an image file via Remote Image Mount see section Remote Image Mount connecting remote ISO images on page 335 iIRMC S4 417 Booting from DVD 1 11 3 Booting the managed
392. vilege Administrator Configure User Accounts Configure iRMC S4 Settings Video Redirection Enabled Remote Storage Enabled Email Enabled Mail Format Standard Prefered Mail Server Automstic Paging Severity Configuration Fan Sensors Warning Y Temperature Sensors Warning Critical Hardware Errors AIl v System Hang Critical POST Errors All v Security Warning System Status None v Disk Drivers amp Controllers Critics Network Interface Warning Y System Power Warning Y Other None v Remote Management Critical Memory Critical Figure 185 Microsoft Active Directory Directory Service User Group Information iRMC S4 299 User Management The Options of LDAP User Group Information and Privileges and Permissions for LDAP User Group are as described under the New Group option see page 297 The options of Email Configuration for LDAP User Group are as follows Email Configuration for LDAP User Group Email Enabled Mail Format Standard Prefered Mail Server Automatic Paging Severity Configuration Fan Sensors Warning Y Temperature Sensors Warning Y Critical Hardware Errors AIl v System Hang Critical POST Errors All v Security Warning Y System Status None v Disk Drivers amp Controllers Critical Y Network Interface Warning Y Remote Management Critics Y System Power Warning Y Memory Critical Other None v Apply Figure 186
393. wet not be able to logini I Note 2 LDAP iz cleabied this seming olsables etandard Wen browser RFC2617 autenticationiogin and forces the uze of Pe nas login screen 1 LDAPuserorouot 2 LDAPuserorouo Figure 187 Directory Service Configuration Specifications for Microsoft Active Directory e The entries shown as examples in figure 187 refer to the examples and figures shown in the User Management in ServerView manual 302 iIRMC S4 User Management Proceed as follows gt Complete your specifications in the Global Directory Service Configuration group LDAP Enabled LDAP L Enabled Disable Local Login Always use SSL Login Directory Server Type Active Director v Authorization Type Senverview LDAP Groups win Aumorizatio Settings on LDAP Sener Standard LDAP Groups win Aumorization Seinge on IRMC Primary LDAP Server LDAP Server LDAP Port 339 LDAP SL Port 636 Backup LDAP Server LDAP Server LDAP Port 538 LDAP SSL Port 636 Domain name somino sian net Base DN DC comino DC twisn DC net Groups directory as sub tree from base DN Apply J Figure 188 Global Directory Service Configuration Specifications for Microsoft Active Directory Primary LDAP Server LDAP directory server that is to be used LDAP Server IP address or DSN name of the primary LDAP server LDAP Port LDAP port of the primary LDAP server LDAP
394. which forwards the events entries of SEL and or the internal event log to dedicated syslog servers ama Syslog forwarding options BIOS See E mcs T i C Event forwarding through Syslog Enabled L IRMC 4 Time am Save Configuration be Cerificate Upload Generate Certicate _S SlOg server addresses e IRMC S4 Update i Power Management oe asean Server 4 Port 514 E Sensors Protocol top up Brent tog Type hie Wise IPMI SEL content Internal Event Log Syslog Server 2 jr SEL Configuration Server 2 Port 514 Syslog Configuration aia a A k TCP UDP seni wee sa E Neswoe Settings E Alerting Server 3 User Management Srey I Console Redirection alee aid i Video Redirection IWS Protocol top ur E virus tesia Toe hen Hse E Lifecycle Management E Rettesh Syslog filtering options Filtering scope Basic z Message severity V criticat Z major E minor El informational a Figure 145 Syslog Configuration page iIRMC S4 241 System Event Log and Internal Event Log Syslog forwarding options The Syslog forwarding options group allows you to enable disable syslog forwarding Event fonstding trough Syslog Enabled Apply Figure 146 Syslog Configuration page Syslog Forwarding Options Event forwarding through Syslog Enabled Enables disables the forwarding of the events of SEL and or internal event lo
395. which comes with an integrated SD card allows for comprehensive lifecycle management of a PRIMERGY server As life cycle management is largely integrated embedded in and entirely controlled by the iRMC it is called embedded Life Cycle Management eLCM Some eLCM functions require the iRMC to communicate and cooperate with the ServerView Agentless Service running on the managed server Communicating with the ServerView Agentless Service also provides the iIRMC S4 with additional in band information This manual describes how to configure the iRMC and the various user interfaces available 14 iIRMC S4 Purpose and target groups of the manual 1 1 Purpose and target groups of the manual This manual is aimed at system administrators network administrators and service staff who have a sound knowledge of hardware and software It provides basic information on the technology behind IPMI and deals with the following aspects in detail e Logging on to the iRMC e Configuring the iIRMC e User management on the iRMC e Advanced Video Redirection via iIRMC e Virtual Media via iRMC e iRMC web interface e Telnet SSH based interface Remote Manager of the iRMC e Configuring the iRMC with the Server Configuration Manager e Updating the firmware e Remote installation of the operating system via iRMC e Appendix IPMI OEM Commands IPMI OEM Commands Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration Service If you have any
396. wing occurs If the server is powered off the server will be automatically powered on to initiate the flash process lf the server is already powered on you must restart the server to initiate the flash process CAUTION If a BIOS update is currently in progress do not power off or restart the server 2 Subsequently flash data is transferred to memory The status display will indicate when the transfer has successfully completed 3 Before the actual flashing process is started the flash update image is checked iRMC S4 169 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS a JViewer admin ms123irmc 0 fps E3 Video Keyboard Mouse Options Media Power Active Users Help uw OOO CGE UG a LALT LCTRL RALT RCTRL Num Caps Scroll Figure 90 Updating BIOS checking update flash image 4 Once the update flash image is successfully verified the actual flashing process is started The status indication shows the percentage completion of the flash process 5 After the BIOS update has successfully completed the server is powered off The following entry is written to the system event log SEL BIOS TFTP or HTTP HTTPS flash OK BIOS Information This group provides information on the current BIOS version on the managed server 170 iRMC S4 BIOS Backing up restore BIOS settings flashing BIOS BIOS Upload from File The BIOS Upload from File group
397. ws an HTTPS session using TLS V1 1 Enable TLS 1 2 Allows an HTTPS session using TLS V1 2 iIRMC S4 259 Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters Enable Auto Refresh If you activate this option the contents of the iRMC web interface are automatically refreshed periodically Specify the refresh interval in the Refresh every seconds field Reresh every seconds Length in seconds of the interval for automatically refreshing the iRMC web interface If you enter a value for the refresh interval which is less than the i Session Timeout see page 259 your session will not automatically be closed when the time specified in Session Timeout has elapsed in the event of inactivity Ports for text based access Telnet Port Telnet port of the iIRMC Default port number 3172 Configurable yes Enabled by default no Communication direction inbound and outbound Session Drop Time Period of inactivity in minutes after which a Telnet SSH connection is automatically cleared SSH Port SSH Secure Shell port of the IRMC Default port number 22 Configurable yes Enabled by default yes Communication direction inbound and outbound Telnet Enabled If you enable the Telnet Enabled option users can establish a connection to the iRMC on the Telnet port specified in the corresponding entry field SSH Enabled If you enable the SSH Enabled option users can establish a connection to the iRMC on the SSH port specif
398. zard on page 111 D Indicates whether green or not red a floppy redirection is established for this AVR session Clicking the icon starts the Virtual Media wizard see chapter Virtual Media Wizard on page 111 Indicates whether green or not red a CD DVD redirection is established for this AVR session Clicking the icon starts the Virtual Media wizard see chapter Virtual Media Wizard on page 111 Indicates whether green or not grayed out the mouse pointer of the remote workstation is visible in the AVR window Clicking the icon allows you to switch between the two modes Displays the SoftKeyboard see section AVR window Keyboard menu on page 94 for details I E Depending on whether video settings have already been configured Starts video recording or opens the Video Record dialog box for configuring video settings see section Video menu on page 91 for details E Displays the list of available hotkeys To apply a hotkey click the related item See section AVR window Keyboard menu on page 94 for details on defining hotkeys a 100 150 The zoom tool bar allows you to stageless enlarge or reduce the AVR view Table 4 Icons in the ServerList windows iRMC S4 107 Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window has started the AVR session and the IP address of the remote workstation from which the AVR ses
399. zilla Firefox as of version 32 110 iRMC S4 6 Virtual Media Wizard A valid virtual media VM license key is required to use the Virtual Media Wizard The Virtual Media Wizard makes available to the managed server a virtual drive the source of which you provide on a remote workstation The virtual media connection between the managed server and the remote workstation is established using the AVR Java applet Depending on the settings made in the Virtual Media Options page you can connect up to 12 virtual media in total and choose between the following types Physical Floppies and or Floppy Images up to 4 Physical CD DVDs and or CD DVD ISO Images up to 4 in total HardDisk drives and or HardDisk USB images up to 4 in total It is not necessary that the remote media are physically located on the remote workstation They can also be located on any network share accessible from this remote workstation Remote workstation Floppy disk image up to 4 Accessing the Virtual drive CD DVD drive image up to 4 lt a 000000000000000000 0 Hard disk USB key up to 4 d Managed server Figure 48 Virtual media provided via a remote connection iRMC S4 111 Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation 6 1 Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation If you provide the source for a virtual drive on the remote workstat

iRMC S4 - integrated Remote Management Controller

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents